Wago Pfc200mane
Wago Pfc200mane
Wago Pfc200mane
WAGO-I/O-SYSTEM 750
750-8212(/xxx-xxx)
PFC200; G2; 2ETH RS
Controller PFC200; 2nd Generation; 2 x ETHERNET,
RS-232/-485
Hansastraße 27
D-32423 Minden
E-Mail: info@wago.com
Web: www.wago.com
Technical Support
E-Mail: support@wago.com
Every conceivable measure has been taken to ensure the accuracy and
completeness of this documentation. However, as errors can never be fully
excluded, we always appreciate any information or suggestions for improving the
documentation.
E-Mail: documentation@wago.com
We wish to point out that the software and hardware terms as well as the
trademarks of companies used and/or mentioned in the present manual are
generally protected by trademark or patent.
Manual
Version 1.4.0, valid from FW Version 03.05.10(17)
WAGO-I/O-SYSTEM 750 Table of Contents 3
750-8212 PFC200; G2; 2ETH RS
Table of Contents
1 Notes about this Documentation ........................................................... 14
1.1 Validity of this Documentation............................................................... 14
1.2 Copyright .............................................................................................. 14
1.3 Property rights ...................................................................................... 15
1.4 Symbols ............................................................................................... 16
1.5 Number Notation .................................................................................. 18
1.6 Font Conventions ................................................................................. 18
2 Important Notes ...................................................................................... 19
2.1 Legal Bases.......................................................................................... 19
2.1.1 Subject to Changes .......................................................................... 19
2.1.2 Personnel Qualifications .................................................................. 19
2.1.3 Use of the 750 Series in Compliance with Underlying Provisions ..... 19
2.1.4 Technical Condition of Specified Devices......................................... 20
2.2 Safety Advice (Precautions) ................................................................. 21
2.3 Licensing Terms of the Software Package Used................................... 24
2.4 Special Use Conditions for ETHERNET Devices .................................. 25
3 Overview .................................................................................................. 26
4 Properties ................................................................................................ 29
4.1 Hardware Description ........................................................................... 29
4.1.1 View ................................................................................................. 29
4.1.2 Labeling ........................................................................................... 31
4.1.2.1 Production Code.......................................................................... 31
4.1.3 Connectors ...................................................................................... 32
4.1.3.1 Wiring Level................................................................................. 32
4.1.3.2 Service Interface ......................................................................... 33
4.1.3.3 Network Connectors .................................................................... 34
4.1.3.4 Communication Interface ............................................................. 35
4.1.3.4.1 Operating as an RS-232 Interface........................................... 36
4.1.3.4.2 Operating as an RS-485 Interface........................................... 37
4.1.4 System Contacts .............................................................................. 38
4.1.4.1 Data Contacts.............................................................................. 38
4.1.4.2 Power Jumper Contacts .............................................................. 39
4.1.5 Display Elements ............................................................................. 40
4.1.5.1 Power Supply LEDs..................................................................... 40
4.1.5.2 System/Fieldbus LEDs ................................................................ 41
4.1.5.3 Network Connector LEDs ............................................................ 42
4.1.5.4 Memory Card Slot LED ................................................................ 43
4.1.6 Operating Elements ......................................................................... 44
4.1.6.1 Operating Mode Switch ............................................................... 44
4.1.6.2 Reset Button................................................................................ 45
4.1.7 Memory Card Slot ............................................................................ 46
4.2 Schematic Diagram .............................................................................. 47
4.3 Technical Data ..................................................................................... 48
4.3.1 Mechanical Data .............................................................................. 48
4.3.2 System Data .................................................................................... 48
Manual
Version 1.4.0, valid from FW Version 03.05.10(17)
4 Table of Contents WAGO-I/O-SYSTEM 750
750-8212 PFC200; G2; 2ETH RS
4.3.3 Power Supply ................................................................................... 48
4.3.4 Clock ................................................................................................ 49
4.3.5 Programming ................................................................................... 49
4.3.6 Local Bus ......................................................................................... 49
4.3.7 ETHERNET ..................................................................................... 50
4.3.8 Communication Interface ................................................................. 50
4.3.9 Connection Type .............................................................................. 50
4.3.10 Climatic Environmental Conditions ................................................... 51
4.4 Approvals ............................................................................................. 52
4.5 Standards and Guidelines .................................................................... 54
5 Function Description .............................................................................. 55
5.1 Network ................................................................................................ 55
5.1.1 Interface Configuration ..................................................................... 55
5.1.1.1 Operation in Switch Mode............................................................ 55
5.1.1.2 Operation with Separate Network Interfaces................................ 56
5.1.1.3 MAC ID and IP Address Assignment Examples ........................... 57
5.1.2 Network Security .............................................................................. 58
5.1.2.1 Users and Passwords.................................................................. 58
5.1.2.1.1 Services and Users ................................................................. 58
5.1.2.1.2 WBM User Group.................................................................... 59
5.1.2.1.3 Linux® User Group .................................................................. 59
5.1.2.1.4 SNMP User Group .................................................................. 60
5.1.2.2 Web Protocols for WBM Access .................................................. 61
5.1.2.2.1 TLS Encryption ....................................................................... 61
5.1.2.3 Root Certificates .......................................................................... 63
5.1.3 Network Configuration...................................................................... 64
5.1.3.1 Host Name/Domain Name ........................................................... 64
5.1.3.2 Routing ........................................................................................ 64
5.1.4 Network Services ............................................................................. 67
5.1.4.1 DHCP Client ................................................................................ 67
5.1.4.2 DHCP Server............................................................................... 67
5.1.4.3 DNS Server ................................................................................. 69
5.1.5 Cloud Connectivity Functionality ...................................................... 70
5.1.5.1 Components of the Cloud Connectivity Software Package .......... 71
5.2 Memory Card Function ......................................................................... 72
5.2.1 Formatting........................................................................................ 72
5.2.2 Data Backup .................................................................................... 74
5.2.2.1 Backup Function.......................................................................... 74
5.2.2.2 Restore Function ......................................................................... 75
5.2.3 Inserting a Memory Card during Operation ...................................... 77
5.2.4 Removing the Memory Card during Operation ................................. 77
5.2.5 Setting the Home Directory for the Runtime System ........................ 78
5.2.6 Load Boot Project ............................................................................ 78
5.3 Licensed Software Components ........................................................... 80
6 Mounting .................................................................................................. 81
6.1 Installation Position............................................................................... 81
6.2 Overall Configuration ............................................................................ 81
6.3 Mounting onto Carrier Rail .................................................................... 83
6.3.1 Carrier Rail Properties...................................................................... 83
Manual
Version 1.4.0, valid from FW Version 03.05.10(17)
WAGO-I/O-SYSTEM 750 Table of Contents 5
750-8212 PFC200; G2; 2ETH RS
6.3.2 WAGO DIN Rails ............................................................................. 84
6.4 Spacing ................................................................................................ 84
6.5 Mounting Sequence.............................................................................. 85
6.6 Inserting Devices .................................................................................. 86
6.6.1 Inserting the Controller ..................................................................... 86
7 Connect Devices ..................................................................................... 87
7.1 Connecting a Conductor to the CAGE CLAMP® ................................... 87
7.2 Power Supply Concept ......................................................................... 88
7.2.1 Overcurrent Protection ..................................................................... 88
7.2.2 Supplementary Power Supply Regulations ...................................... 89
8 Commissioning ....................................................................................... 90
8.1 Switching On the Controller .................................................................. 90
8.2 Determining the IP Address of the Host PC .......................................... 91
8.3 Setting an IP Address ........................................................................... 92
8.3.1 Assigning an IP Address using DHCP .............................................. 93
8.3.2 Changing an IP Address Using the “CBM” Configuration Tool and a
Terminal Program ............................................................................ 94
8.3.3 Changing an IP Address using “WAGO Ethernet Settings” .............. 97
8.3.4 Temporarily Setting a Fixed IP Address ........................................... 99
8.4 Testing the Network Connection ......................................................... 100
8.5 Changing Passwords .......................................................................... 101
8.6 Shutdown/Restart ............................................................................... 102
8.7 Initiating Reset Functions ................................................................... 103
8.7.1 Warm Start Reset .......................................................................... 103
8.7.1.1 CODESYS V2 Runtime System................................................. 103
8.7.1.2 e!RUNTIME Runtime System .................................................... 103
8.7.2 Cold Start Reset............................................................................. 103
8.7.2.1 CODESYS V2 Runtime System................................................. 103
8.7.2.2 e!RUNTIME Runtime System .................................................... 103
8.7.3 Software Reset .............................................................................. 104
8.7.4 Factory Reset ................................................................................ 104
8.8 Configuration ...................................................................................... 106
8.8.1 Configuration via Web-Based-Management (WBM) ....................... 107
8.8.1.1 WBM User Administration.......................................................... 109
8.8.1.2 General Information about the Page .......................................... 112
8.8.2 Configuration via Console-Based-Management-Tool (CBM) using a
Terminal Program .......................................................................... 114
8.8.2.1 CBM Menu Structure Overview ................................................. 116
8.8.3 Configuration using “WAGO Ethernet Settings”.............................. 119
8.8.3.1 Identification Tab ....................................................................... 121
8.8.3.2 Network Tab .............................................................................. 122
8.8.3.3 PLC Tab .................................................................................... 124
8.8.3.4 Status Tab ................................................................................. 125
9 Run-time System CODESYS 2.3........................................................... 126
9.1 Installing the CODESYS 2.3 Programming System ............................ 126
9.2 First Program with CODESYS 2.3 ...................................................... 126
9.2.1 Start the CODESYS Programming System .................................... 126
9.2.2 Creating a Project and Selecting a Target System ......................... 126
Manual
Version 1.4.0, valid from FW Version 03.05.10(17)
6 Table of Contents WAGO-I/O-SYSTEM 750
750-8212 PFC200; G2; 2ETH RS
9.2.3 Creating the PLC Configuration ..................................................... 128
9.2.4 Editing the Program Function Block ............................................... 135
9.2.5 Loading and Running the PLC Program in the Fieldbus Controller
(ETHERNET) ................................................................................. 137
9.2.6 Creating a Boot Project .................................................................. 139
9.3 Syntax of Logical Addresses .............................................................. 139
9.4 Creating Tasks ................................................................................... 140
9.4.1 Cyclic Tasks ................................................................................... 143
9.4.2 Freewheeling Tasks ....................................................................... 144
9.4.3 Debugging an IEC Program ........................................................... 145
9.5 System Events ................................................................................... 149
9.5.1 Creating an Event Handler ............................................................. 151
9.6 Process Images .................................................................................. 154
9.6.1 Process Images for I/O Modules Connected to the Controller ........ 155
9.6.2 Process Image for Slaves Connected to the Fieldbus .................... 156
9.7 Access to Process Images of the Input and Output Data via CODESYS
2.3 ...................................................................................................... 156
9.8 Addressing Example ........................................................................... 157
9.9 Local Bus Synchronization ................................................................. 159
9.9.1 Case 1: CODESYS Task Interval Set Smaller than the Local Bus
Cycle .............................................................................................. 159
9.9.2 Case 2: CODESYS Task Interval Smaller than Twice the Local Bus
Cycle .............................................................................................. 160
9.9.3 Case 3: CODESYS Task Interval Greater than Twice the Local Bus
Cycle .............................................................................................. 161
9.9.4 Case 4: CODESYS Task Interval Greater than 10 ms.................... 162
9.9.5 Local Bus (KBus) Settings ............................................................. 163
9.9.5.1 Effect of Update Mode on CODESYS Tasks ............................. 164
9.9.5.1.1 Asynchronous Update Mode ................................................. 164
9.9.5.1.2 Synchronous Update Mode ................................................... 164
9.10 Memory Settings in CODESYS........................................................... 165
9.10.1 Program Memory ........................................................................... 165
9.10.2 Data Memory and Function Block Limitation .................................. 167
9.10.3 Remanent Memory ........................................................................ 168
9.11 General Target System Settings ......................................................... 169
9.12 CODESYS Visualization ..................................................................... 169
9.12.1 Limits of CODESYS Visualization .................................................. 172
9.12.2 Eliminating Errors in CODESYS Web Visualization ........................ 174
9.12.3 FAQs about CODESYS Web Visualization .................................... 175
10 e!RUNTIME Runtime Environment ....................................................... 177
10.1 General Notes .................................................................................... 177
10.2 CODESYS V3 Priorities ...................................................................... 178
10.3 Memory Spaces under e!RUNTIME.................................................... 179
10.3.1 Program and Data Memory ............................................................ 179
10.3.2 Function Block Limitation ............................................................... 179
10.3.3 Remanent Memory ........................................................................ 179
11 Modbus – CODESYS V2........................................................................ 180
11.1 General .............................................................................................. 180
11.2 Features ............................................................................................. 180
Manual
Version 1.4.0, valid from FW Version 03.05.10(17)
WAGO-I/O-SYSTEM 750 Table of Contents 7
750-8212 PFC200; G2; 2ETH RS
11.3 Configuration ...................................................................................... 181
11.3.1 Modbus Settings ............................................................................ 182
11.3.2 Modbus TCP Settings .................................................................... 183
11.3.3 Modbus UDP Settings .................................................................... 183
11.3.4 Modbus RTU Settings .................................................................... 183
11.4 Data Exchange ................................................................................... 186
11.4.1 Process Image ............................................................................... 187
11.4.2 Flag Area ....................................................................................... 188
11.4.3 Modbus Registers .......................................................................... 189
11.4.4 Modbus Mapping ........................................................................... 189
11.4.4.1 Modbus Mapping for Write Bit Services FC1, FC2 ..................... 189
11.4.4.2 Modbus Mapping for Write Bit Services FC5, FC15 ................... 190
11.4.4.3 Modbus Mapping for Read Register Services FC3, FC4, FC23 . 191
11.4.4.4 Modbus Mapping for Write Register Services FC6, FC16, FC22,
FC23 ......................................................................................... 193
11.5 WAGO Modbus Registers .................................................................. 195
11.5.1 Process Image Properties .............................................................. 196
11.5.1.1 Register 0x1022 – Number of Registers in the Modbus Input
Process Image .......................................................................... 196
11.5.1.2 Register 0x1023 – Number of Registers in the Modbus Output
Process Image .......................................................................... 196
11.5.1.3 Register 0x1024 – Number of Bits in the Modbus Input Process
Image ........................................................................................ 196
11.5.1.4 Register 0x1025 – Number of Bits in the Modbus Output Process
Image ........................................................................................ 196
11.5.2 Network Configuration.................................................................... 197
11.5.2.1 Register 0x1028 – IP Configuration ........................................... 197
11.5.2.2 Register 0x102A – Number of Established TCP Connections .... 197
11.5.2.3 Register 0x1030 – Modbus TCP Socket Timeout ...................... 197
11.5.2.4 Register 0x1031 – MAC Address for ETHERNET-Interface 1 (eth0)197
11.5.2.5 Register 0x1037 - Modbus TCP Response Delay ...................... 197
11.5.3 PLC Status Register ...................................................................... 198
11.5.4 Modbus Watchdog ......................................................................... 198
11.5.4.1 Register 0x1100 – Watchdog Command ................................... 200
11.5.4.2 Register 0x1101 – Watchdog Status ......................................... 202
11.5.4.3 Register 0x1102 – Watchdog Timeout ....................................... 202
11.5.4.4 Register 0x1103 – Watchdog Config ......................................... 202
11.5.4.5 Register 0x1104 – Watchdog Operation Mode .......................... 203
11.5.5 Modbus Constants Registers ......................................................... 204
11.5.5.1 Electronic Nameplate ................................................................ 204
11.5.5.2 Register 0x2010 – Revision (Firmware Index) ........................... 204
11.5.5.3 Register 0x2011 – Series Designator ........................................ 204
11.5.5.4 Register 0x2012 – Device ID ..................................................... 204
11.5.5.5 Register 0x2013 – Major Firmware Version ............................... 205
11.5.5.6 Register 0x2014 – Minor Firmware Version ............................... 205
11.5.5.7 Register 0x2015 – MBS Version ................................................ 205
11.6 Diagnostics ......................................................................................... 206
11.6.1 Diagnostics for the Modbus Master ................................................ 206
11.6.2 Diagnostics for the Runtime System .............................................. 206
11.6.3 Diagnostics for the Error Server ..................................................... 206
Manual
Version 1.4.0, valid from FW Version 03.05.10(17)
8 Table of Contents WAGO-I/O-SYSTEM 750
750-8212 PFC200; G2; 2ETH RS
12 Modbus – e!RUNTIME ........................................................................... 209
12.1 Modbus Address Overview ................................................................. 209
12.2 Modbus Registers............................................................................... 210
12.2.1 Modbus Watchdog ......................................................................... 212
12.2.1.1 Register 0xFA00 – Watchdog Command................................... 214
12.2.1.2 Register 0xFA01 – Watchdog Timeout ...................................... 215
12.2.1.3 Register 0xFA02 – Watchdog Status ......................................... 215
12.2.1.4 Register 0xFA03 – Watchdog Config ......................................... 216
12.2.1.5 Modbus TCP Connection Watchdog Register............................ 217
12.2.2 Status Registers............................................................................. 218
12.2.2.1 PLC Status Register .................................................................. 218
12.2.3 Electronic Nameplate ..................................................................... 218
12.2.3.1 Order Number ........................................................................... 218
12.2.3.2 Firmware Version ...................................................................... 218
12.2.3.3 Hardware Version ...................................................................... 218
12.2.3.4 Firmware Loader/Boot Loader ................................................... 218
12.2.4 Modbus Process Image Version .................................................... 218
12.2.5 Modbus Process Image Registers.................................................. 218
12.2.6 Constant Registers ........................................................................ 219
12.2.7 Live Register .................................................................................. 219
12.3 Estimating the Modbus Master CPU Load .......................................... 220
13 Diagnostics............................................................................................ 221
13.1 Operating and Status Messages......................................................... 221
13.1.1 Power Supply LEDs ....................................................................... 221
13.1.1.1 A LED ........................................................................................ 221
13.1.1.2 B LED ........................................................................................ 221
13.1.2 System/Fieldbus LEDs ................................................................... 222
13.1.2.1 SYS LED ................................................................................... 222
13.1.2.2 RUN LED .................................................................................. 225
13.1.2.3 I/O LED ..................................................................................... 227
13.1.2.4 MS LED ..................................................................................... 228
13.1.3 Network Connection LEDs ............................................................. 229
13.1.3.1 LNK LED ................................................................................... 229
13.1.3.2 ACT LED ................................................................................... 229
13.1.4 Memory Card Slot LED .................................................................. 230
13.2 Diagnostics Messages via Flashing Sequences ................................. 231
13.2.1 Flashing Sequences ...................................................................... 231
13.2.2 Example of a Diagnostics Message Indicated by a Flashing
Sequence....................................................................................... 232
13.2.3 Meaning of Blink Codes and Procedures for Troubleshooting ........ 233
13.2.4 Meaning of Blink Codes and Procedures for Troubleshooting ........ 239
14 Service ................................................................................................... 240
14.1 Inserting and Removing the Memory Card.......................................... 240
14.1.1 Inserting the Memory Card ............................................................. 240
14.1.2 Removing the Memory Card .......................................................... 240
14.2 Firmware Changes ............................................................................. 242
14.2.1 Use e!COCKPIT to Update/Downgrade the Firmware .................... 243
14.2.2 Use WAGOupload to Update/Downgrade the Firmware................. 244
Manual
Version 1.4.0, valid from FW Version 03.05.10(17)
WAGO-I/O-SYSTEM 750 Table of Contents 9
750-8212 PFC200; G2; 2ETH RS
14.2.3 Perform Firmware Update/Downgrade ........................................... 245
14.3 Updating Root Certificates .................................................................. 246
15 Removal ................................................................................................. 247
15.1 Removing Devices.............................................................................. 247
15.1.1 Removing the Controller ................................................................ 247
16 Disposal ................................................................................................. 248
16.1 Electrical and electronic equipment .................................................... 248
16.2 Packaging........................................................................................... 248
17 Use in Hazardous Environments ......................................................... 250
17.1 Marking Configuration Examples ........................................................ 251
17.1.1 Marking for Europe According to ATEX and IECEx ........................ 251
17.1.2 Marking for the United States of America (NEC) and Canada (CEC)255
17.2 Installation Regulations....................................................................... 258
17.2.1 Special Notes including Explosion Protection ................................. 258
17.2.2 Special Notes Regarding ANSI/ISA Ex .......................................... 260
18 Appendix ............................................................................................... 261
18.1 Configuration Dialogs ......................................................................... 261
18.1.1 Web-Based-Management (WBM) .................................................. 261
18.1.1.1 “Information” Tab ....................................................................... 261
18.1.1.1.1 “Device Status” Page ............................................................ 261
18.1.1.1.2 “Vendor Information” Page .................................................... 263
18.1.1.1.3 “PLC Runtime Information” Page .......................................... 264
18.1.1.1.4 “WAGO Software License Agreement” Page ........................ 266
18.1.1.1.5 “Open Source Licenses” Page .............................................. 267
18.1.1.1.6 “WBM Third Party License Information” Page ....................... 268
18.1.1.1.7 “WBM Version” Page ............................................................ 269
18.1.1.2 “Configuration” Tab.................................................................... 270
18.1.1.2.1 “PLC Runtime Configuration” Page ....................................... 270
18.1.1.2.2 “TCP/IP Configuration” Page ................................................ 273
18.1.1.2.3 “Ethernet Configuration” Page............................................... 275
18.1.1.2.4 “Configuration of Host and Domain Name” Page .................. 278
18.1.1.2.5 “Routing” Page...................................................................... 280
18.1.1.2.6 “Clock Settings” Page ........................................................... 284
18.1.1.2.7 “Configuration of Serial Interface RS232/RS485” Page ......... 286
18.1.1.2.8 “Configuration of Service Interface” Page ............................. 287
18.1.1.2.9 “Create Bootable Image” Page.............................................. 288
18.1.1.2.10 “Firmware Backup” Page ...................................................... 289
18.1.1.2.11 “Firmware Restore” Page ...................................................... 291
18.1.1.2.12 “Active System” Page ........................................................... 293
18.1.1.2.13 “Mass Storage” Page ............................................................ 294
18.1.1.2.14 “Software Uploads” Page ...................................................... 295
18.1.1.2.15 “Configuration of Network Services” Page ............................ 296
18.1.1.2.16 “Configuration of NTP Client” Page ....................................... 298
18.1.1.2.17 “PLC Runtime Services” Page .............................................. 299
18.1.1.2.18 “SSH Server Settings” Page ................................................. 301
18.1.1.2.19 “TFTP Server” Page.............................................................. 302
18.1.1.2.20 “DHCP Server Configuration” Page ...................................... 303
Manual
Version 1.4.0, valid from FW Version 03.05.10(17)
10 Table of Contents WAGO-I/O-SYSTEM 750
750-8212 PFC200; G2; 2ETH RS
18.1.1.2.21 “Configuration of DNS Server” Page ..................................... 304
18.1.1.2.22 “Status overview” Page ......................................................... 305
18.1.1.2.23 “Configuration of Connection <n>” Page ............................... 306
18.1.1.2.24 “Configuration of General SNMP Parameters” Page ............. 310
18.1.1.2.25 “Configuration of SNMP v1/v2c Parameters” Page ............... 311
18.1.1.2.26 “Configuration of SNMP v3 Users” Page ............................... 313
18.1.1.2.27 “WBM User Configuration” Page ........................................... 315
18.1.1.3 “Fieldbus” Tab ........................................................................... 316
18.1.1.3.1 “OPC UA Configuration” Page .............................................. 316
18.1.1.3.2 “MODBUS Services Configuration” Page .............................. 319
18.1.1.4 “Security” Tab ............................................................................ 320
18.1.1.4.1 “OpenVPN / IPsec Configuration” Page ................................ 320
18.1.1.4.2 “General Firewall Configuration” Page .................................. 322
18.1.1.4.3 “Interface Configuration” Page .............................................. 323
18.1.1.4.4 “Configuration of MAC Address Filter” Page ......................... 325
18.1.1.4.5 “Configuration of User Filter” Page ........................................ 327
18.1.1.4.6 “Certificates” Page ................................................................ 329
18.1.1.4.7 “Security Settings” Page ....................................................... 330
18.1.1.4.8 “Advanced Intrusion Detection Environment (AIDE)” Page ... 331
18.1.1.5 “Diagnostic” Tab ........................................................................ 333
18.1.1.5.1 “Diagnostic Information” Page ............................................... 333
18.1.2 Console-Based-Management (CBM) ............................................. 334
18.1.2.1 “Information” Menu .................................................................... 334
18.1.2.1.1 “Information” > “Controller Details” Submenu ........................ 334
18.1.2.1.2 “Information” > “Network Details” Submenu .......................... 335
18.1.2.2 “PLC Runtime” Menu ................................................................. 336
18.1.2.2.1 “PLC Runtime” > “Information” Submenu .............................. 336
18.1.2.2.2 “Information” > “Runtime Version” Submenu ......................... 337
18.1.2.2.3 “Information” > “Webserver Version” Submenu ..................... 337
18.1.2.2.4 “Information” > “State” Submenu ........................................... 337
18.1.2.2.5 “Information” > “Number of Tasks” Submenu ........................ 338
18.1.2.2.6 “Information” > “Project Details” Submenu ............................ 338
18.1.2.2.7 “Information” > “Tasks” Submenu.......................................... 338
18.1.2.2.8 “Tasks” > “Task n” Submenu ................................................. 339
18.1.2.2.9 “PLC Runtime” > “General Configuration” Submenu ............. 339
18.1.2.2.10 “General Configuration” > “PLC Runtime Version” Submenu 340
18.1.2.2.11 “General Configuration” > “Home Dir On SD Card” Submenu340
18.1.2.2.12 “PLC Runtime” > “WebVisu” Submenu.................................. 341
18.1.2.3 “Networking” Menu .................................................................... 342
18.1.2.3.1 “Networking” > “Host/Domain Name” Submenu .................... 342
18.1.2.3.2 “Host/Domain Name” > “Hostname” Submenu ...................... 343
18.1.2.3.3 “Host/Domain Name” > “Domain Name” Submenu ............... 343
18.1.2.3.4 “Networking” > “TCP/IP” Submenu........................................ 343
18.1.2.3.5 “TCP/IP” > “IP Address” Submenu ........................................ 344
18.1.2.3.6 “IP Address” > “Xn“ Submenu ............................................... 344
18.1.2.3.7 “TCP/IP” > “Default Gateway” Submenu ............................... 345
18.1.2.3.8 “Default Gateway” > “Default Gateway n” Submenu.............. 345
18.1.2.3.9 “TCP/IP” > “DNS Server” Submenu ...................................... 346
18.1.2.3.10 “Networking” > “Ethernet” Submenu ...................................... 346
18.1.2.3.11 “Ethernet” > “Switch Configuration” Submenu ....................... 347
Manual
Version 1.4.0, valid from FW Version 03.05.10(17)
WAGO-I/O-SYSTEM 750 Table of Contents 11
750-8212 PFC200; G2; 2ETH RS
18.1.2.3.12 “Ethernet” > “Ethernet Ports” Submenu ................................. 347
18.1.2.3.13 “Ethernet Ports” > “Interface Xn” Submenu ........................... 348
18.1.2.4 “Firewall” Menu .......................................................................... 349
18.1.2.4.1 “Firewall” > “General Configuration” Submenu ...................... 350
18.1.2.4.2 “General Configuration” > “Interface xxx” Submenu .............. 351
18.1.2.4.3 “Firewall” > “MAC Address Filter” Submenu .......................... 353
18.1.2.4.4 “MAC Address Filter” > “MAC address filter whitelist” Submenu354
18.1.2.4.5 “MAC address filter whitelist” > “Add new / No (n)” Submenu 354
18.1.2.4.6 “Firewall” > “User Filter” Submenu ........................................ 355
18.1.2.4.7 “User Filter” > “Add New / No (n)” Submenu ......................... 356
18.1.2.5 “Clock” Menu ............................................................................. 357
18.1.2.6 “Administration” Menu ............................................................... 358
18.1.2.6.1 “Administration” > “Users” Submenu ..................................... 359
18.1.2.6.2 “Administration” > “Create Image” Submenu ......................... 359
18.1.2.7 “Package Server” Menu ............................................................. 360
18.1.2.7.1 “Package Server” > “Firmware Backup” Submenu ................ 360
18.1.2.7.2 “Firmware Backup” > “Auto Update Feature” Submenu ........ 361
18.1.2.7.3 “Firmware Backup” > “Destination” Submenu........................ 361
18.1.2.7.4 “Package Server” > “Firmware Restore” Submenu ............... 362
18.1.2.7.5 “Firmware Restore” > “Select Package” Submenu ................ 362
18.1.2.7.6 “Package Server” > “System Partition” Submenu .................. 363
18.1.2.8 “Mass Storage” Menu ................................................................ 364
18.1.2.8.1 “Mass Storage” > “SD Card” Submenu ................................. 364
18.1.2.9 “Software Uploads” Menu .......................................................... 365
18.1.2.10 “Ports and Services” Menu ........................................................ 366
18.1.2.10.1 “Ports and Services” > “Telnet” Submenu ............................. 367
18.1.2.10.2 “Ports and Services” > “FTP” Submenu ................................ 367
18.1.2.10.3 “Ports and Services” > “FTPS” Submenu .............................. 368
18.1.2.10.4 “Ports and Services” > “HTTP” Submenu .............................. 368
18.1.2.10.5 “Ports and Services” > “HTTPS” Submenu ........................... 369
18.1.2.10.6 “Ports and Services” > “NTP” Submenu ................................ 369
18.1.2.10.7 “Ports and Services” > “SSH” Submenu ................................ 370
18.1.2.10.8 “Ports and Services” > “TFTP” Submenu .............................. 370
18.1.2.10.9 “Ports and Services” > “DHCPD” Submenu .......................... 371
18.1.2.10.10 “DHCPD” > “Xn” Submenu .................................................... 371
18.1.2.10.11 “Ports and Services” > “DNS” Submenu................................ 372
18.1.2.10.12 “Ports and Services” > “IOCHECK PORT” Submenu ............ 373
18.1.2.10.13 “Ports and Services” > “Modbus TCP” Submenu .................. 373
18.1.2.10.14 “Ports and Services” > “Modbus UDP” Submenu .................. 374
18.1.2.10.15 “Ports and Services” > “OPC UA” Submenu ......................... 374
18.1.2.10.16 “…” > “Firewall Status” Submenu .......................................... 375
18.1.2.10.17 “Ports and Services” > “PLC Runtime Services” Submenu.... 376
18.1.2.10.18 “PLC Runtime Services” > “CODESYS 2” Submenu ............. 377
18.1.2.10.19 “PLC Runtime Services” > “e!RUNTIME” Submenu .............. 378
18.1.2.11 “SNMP” Menu............................................................................ 379
18.1.2.11.1 “SNMP” > “General SNMP Configuration” Submenu ............. 379
18.1.2.11.2 “SNMP” > “SNMP v1/v2c Manager Configuration” Submenu 380
18.1.2.11.3 “SNMP” > “SNMP v1/v2c Trap Receiver Configuration”
Submenu .............................................................................. 380
18.1.2.11.4 “SNMP” > “SNMP v3 Configuration” Submenu...................... 381
Manual
Version 1.4.0, valid from FW Version 03.05.10(17)
12 Table of Contents WAGO-I/O-SYSTEM 750
750-8212 PFC200; G2; 2ETH RS
18.1.2.11.5 “SNMP” > “(Secure)SNMP firewalling” Submenu .................. 382
18.2 Process Data Architecture .................................................................. 383
18.2.1 Digital Input Modules...................................................................... 384
18.2.1.1 1 Channel Digital Input Module with Diagnostics ....................... 384
18.2.1.2 2 Channel Digital Input Modules ................................................ 384
18.2.1.3 2 Channel Digital Input Module with Diagnostics ....................... 384
18.2.1.4 2 Channel Digital Input Module with Diagnostics and Output
Process Data ............................................................................. 385
18.2.1.5 4 Channel Digital Input Modules ................................................ 385
18.2.1.6 8 Channel Digital Input Modules ................................................ 385
18.2.1.7 8 Channel Digital Input Module NAMUR with Diagnostics and
Output Process Data ................................................................. 386
18.2.1.8 8 Channel Digital Input Module PTC with Diagnostics and Output
Process Data ............................................................................. 387
18.2.1.9 16 Channel Digital Input Modules .............................................. 388
18.2.2 Digital Output Modules ................................................................... 389
18.2.2.1 1 Channel Digital Output Module with Input Process Data ......... 389
18.2.2.2 2 Channel Digital Output Modules ............................................. 389
18.2.2.3 2 Channel Digital Input Modules with Diagnostics and Input
Process Data ............................................................................. 390
18.2.2.4 4 Channel Digital Output Modules ............................................. 391
18.2.2.5 4 Channel Digital Output Modules with Diagnostics and Input
Process Data ............................................................................. 391
18.2.2.6 8 Channel Digital Output Module ............................................... 391
18.2.2.7 8 Channel Digital Output Modules with Diagnostics and Input
Process Data ............................................................................. 392
18.2.2.8 16 Channel Digital Output Modules ........................................... 392
18.2.2.9 8 Channel Digital Input/Output Modules .................................... 393
18.2.3 Analog Input Modules .................................................................... 394
18.2.3.1 1 Channel Analog Input Modules ............................................... 394
18.2.3.2 2 Channel Analog Input Modules ............................................... 394
18.2.3.3 2 Channel Analog Input Modules HART .................................... 395
18.2.3.4 4 Channel Analog Input Modules ............................................... 396
18.2.3.5 8 Channel Analog Input Modules ............................................... 397
18.2.3.6 3-Phase Power Measurement Module ....................................... 398
18.2.4 Analog Output Modules.................................................................. 400
18.2.4.1 2 Channel Analog Output Modules ............................................ 400
18.2.4.2 4 Channel Analog Output Modules ............................................ 400
18.2.5 Specialty Modules .......................................................................... 401
18.2.5.1 Counter Modules ....................................................................... 401
18.2.5.2 Pulse Width Modules ................................................................. 404
18.2.5.3 Serial Interface Modules with Alternative Data Format .............. 404
18.2.5.4 Serial Interface Modules with Standard Data Format ................. 405
18.2.5.5 Serial Interface Modules ............................................................ 405
18.2.5.6 Data Exchange Module ............................................................. 406
18.2.5.7 SSI Transmitter Interface Modules ............................................ 406
18.2.5.8 Incremental Encoder Interface Modules .................................... 407
18.2.5.9 DC-Drive Controller ................................................................... 409
18.2.5.10 Stepper Controller ..................................................................... 410
18.2.5.11 RTC Module .............................................................................. 411
Manual
Version 1.4.0, valid from FW Version 03.05.10(17)
WAGO-I/O-SYSTEM 750 Table of Contents 13
750-8212 PFC200; G2; 2ETH RS
18.2.5.12 DALI/DSI Master Module ........................................................... 411
18.2.5.13 DALI Multi-Master Module ......................................................... 412
18.2.5.14 LON® FTT Module ..................................................................... 415
18.2.5.15 EnOcean Radio Receiver .......................................................... 415
18.2.5.16 MP Bus Master Module ............................................................. 416
18.2.5.17 Bluetooth® RF-Transceiver ........................................................ 416
18.2.5.18 Vibration Velocity/Bearing Condition Monitoring VIB I/O ............ 417
18.2.5.19 KNX/EIB/TP1 Module ................................................................ 418
18.2.5.20 AS-interface Master Module ...................................................... 418
18.2.6 System Modules ............................................................................ 420
18.2.6.1 System Modules with Diagnostics ............................................. 420
18.2.6.2 Filter Module.............................................................................. 420
18.2.6.3 Binary Space Module ................................................................ 420
18.3 CODESYS V2 Libraries ...................................................................... 422
18.3.1 General Libraries ........................................................................... 422
18.3.1.1 CODESYS System Libraries ..................................................... 422
18.3.1.2 SysLibCom.lib ........................................................................... 423
18.3.1.3 SysLibFile.lib ............................................................................. 423
18.3.1.4 SysLibFileAsync.lib.................................................................... 424
18.3.1.5 SysLibRtc.lib.............................................................................. 425
18.3.1.6 BusDiag.lib ................................................................................ 426
18.3.1.7 mod_com.lib .............................................................................. 426
18.3.1.8 SerComm.lib.............................................................................. 426
18.3.1.9 WagoConfigToolLIB.lib .............................................................. 427
18.3.1.10 WagoLibCpuUsage.lib ............................................................... 444
18.3.1.11 WagoLibDiagnosticIDs.lib .......................................................... 445
18.3.1.12 WagoLibLed.lib.......................................................................... 445
18.3.1.13 WagoLibNetSnmp.lib ................................................................. 445
18.3.1.14 WagoLibNetSnmpManager.lib ................................................... 445
18.3.1.15 WagoLibSSL.lib ......................................................................... 446
18.3.1.16 WagoLibTerminalDiag.lib........................................................... 446
List of Figures ................................................................................................ 447
List of Tables .................................................................................................. 450
Manual
Version 1.4.0, valid from FW Version 03.05.10(17)
14 Notes about this Documentation WAGO-I/O-SYSTEM 750
750-8212 PFC200; G2; 2ETH RS
Table 1: Variants
Item Number/Variant Designation
750-8212 PFC200; G2; 2ETH RS
750-8212/025-000 PFC200; G2; 2ETH RS; T
750-8212/025-001 PFC200; G2; 2ETH RS; Tele; T
750-8212/025-002 PFC200; G2; 2ETH RS; Tele; T; ECO
1.2 Copyright
This Manual, including all figures and illustrations, is copyright-protected. Any
further use of this Manual by third parties that violate pertinent copyright
provisions is prohibited. Reproduction, translation, electronic and phototechnical
filing/archiving (e.g., photocopying) as well as any amendments require the
written consent of WAGO Kontakttechnik GmbH & Co. KG, Minden, Germany.
Non-observance will involve the right to assert damage claims.
Manual
Version 1.4.0, valid from FW Version 03.05.10(17)
WAGO-I/O-SYSTEM 750 Notes about this Documentation 15
750-8212 PFC200; G2; 2ETH RS
Manual
Version 1.4.0, valid from FW Version 03.05.10(17)
16 Notes about this Documentation WAGO-I/O-SYSTEM 750
750-8212 PFC200; G2; 2ETH RS
1.4 Symbols
Personal Injury!
Indicates a high-risk, imminently hazardous situation which, if not avoided, will
result in death or serious injury.
Personal Injury!
Indicates a moderate-risk, potentially hazardous situation which, if not avoided,
could result in death or serious injury.
Personal Injury!
Indicates a low-risk, potentially hazardous situation which, if not avoided, may
result in minor or moderate injury.
Damage to Property!
Indicates a potentially hazardous situation which, if not avoided, may result in
damage to property.
Important Note!
Indicates a potential malfunction which, if not avoided, however, will not result in
damage to property.
Manual
Version 1.4.0, valid from FW Version 03.05.10(17)
WAGO-I/O-SYSTEM 750 Notes about this Documentation 17
750-8212 PFC200; G2; 2ETH RS
Additional Information:
Refers to additional information which is not an integral part of this
documentation (e.g., the Internet).
Manual
Version 1.4.0, valid from FW Version 03.05.10(17)
18 Notes about this Documentation WAGO-I/O-SYSTEM 750
750-8212 PFC200; G2; 2ETH RS
Manual
Version 1.4.0, valid from FW Version 03.05.10(17)
WAGO-I/O-SYSTEM 750 Important Notes 19
750-8212 PFC200; G2; 2ETH RS
2 Important Notes
This section includes an overall summary of the most important safety
requirements and notes that are mentioned in each individual section. To protect
your health and prevent damage to devices as well, it is imperative to read and
carefully follow the safety guidelines.
All changes to the coupler or controller should always be carried out by qualified
personnel with sufficient skills in PLC programming.
This product is designed for protection class IP20. There is protection against
finger injury and solid impurities up to 12.5 mm diameter is assured; protection
against water damage is not ensured.
The product represents an open-type device. It may only be installed in
enclosures (tool-secured enclosures or operating rooms) which fulfil the listed
requirements specified in the safety instructions in chapter “Safety Advice
(Precautions)”.
The product is intended for installation in automation systems. It does not have
its own integrated separator. A suitable separator must therefore be created on
the plant side.
Manual
Version 1.4.0, valid from FW Version 03.05.10(17)
20 Important Notes WAGO-I/O-SYSTEM 750
750-8212 PFC200; G2; 2ETH RS
The operation of the product in residential areas without further measures is only
permitted if the product complies with the emission limits (interference emissions)
according to EN 61000-6-3.
• Repairs,
• Changes to the hardware or software that are not described in the
operating instructions,
• Improper use of the components.
Further details are given in the contractual agreements. Please send your
request for modified and new hardware or software configurations directly to
WAGO Kontakttechnik GmbH & Co. KG.
Manual
Version 1.4.0, valid from FW Version 03.05.10(17)
WAGO-I/O-SYSTEM 750 Important Notes 21
750-8212 PFC200; G2; 2ETH RS
Manual
Version 1.4.0, valid from FW Version 03.05.10(17)
22 Important Notes WAGO-I/O-SYSTEM 750
750-8212 PFC200; G2; 2ETH RS
Manual
Version 1.4.0, valid from FW Version 03.05.10(17)
WAGO-I/O-SYSTEM 750 Important Notes 23
750-8212 PFC200; G2; 2ETH RS
Manual
Version 1.4.0, valid from FW Version 03.05.10(17)
24 Important Notes WAGO-I/O-SYSTEM 750
750-8212 PFC200; G2; 2ETH RS
The licence conditions of the software packages are stored in the controller in
text form. They can be accessed via the WBM page “Legal Information” > “Open
Source Software.”
You can obtain the source code with licensing terms of the open-source software
from WAGO Kontakttechnik GmbH & Co. KG on request. Send your request to
support@wago.com with the subject “Controller Board Support Package.”
Manual
Version 1.4.0, valid from FW Version 03.05.10(17)
WAGO-I/O-SYSTEM 750 Important Notes 25
750-8212 PFC200; G2; 2ETH RS
• Change the default passwords before first use! This will reduce the risk of
unauthorized access to your system.
• Regularly change the passwords used! This will reduce the risk of
unauthorized access to your system.
• Regularly perform threat analyses. You can check whether the measures
taken meet your security requirements.
Manual
Version 1.4.0, valid from FW Version 03.05.10(17)
26 Overview WAGO-I/O-SYSTEM 750
750-8212 PFC200; G2; 2ETH RS
3 Overview
The controller 750-8212(PFC200; G2; 2ETH RS) is an automation device that
can perform control tasks of a PLC. It is suitable for mounting on a DIN rail and
stands out on account of its various interfaces.
You can connect all available I/O modules of the WAGO-I/O-SYSTEM 750 (750
and 753 Series) to the controller, enabling it to internally process analog and
digital signals from the automation environment, or to supply these signals to
other devices via one of the available interfaces.
Manual
Version 1.4.0, valid from FW Version 03.05.10(17)
WAGO-I/O-SYSTEM 750 Overview 27
750-8212 PFC200; G2; 2ETH RS
flag variables in an integrated NVRAM) for IEC-61131-3 programming in
CODESYS applications.
</dg_
Two ETHERNET interfaces and the integrated, configurable switch enable wiring
in all necessary configurations with one common network where both ports share
a common IP address or with two separate networks where each port has its own
IP address.
The physical interfaces (ports) are assigned via logical bridges and can be e.g.,
configured via the WBM.
• 10BASE-T / 100BASE-TX
• Full/Half duplex
• Autonegotiation
The following fieldbus circuits are implemented for exchange of process data:
In the controller, all input signals from the sensors are combined. After
connecting the controller, all of the I/O modules on the bus node are detected
and a local process image is created from these. Analog and specialty module
data is sent via words and/or bytes; digital data is sent bit by bit.
No direct access from fieldbus to the process image for I/O modules!
Any data that is required from the I/O module process image must be explicitly
mapped in the CODESYS program to the data in the fieldbus process image and
vice versa! Direct access is not possible!
Manual
Version 1.4.0, valid from FW Version 03.05.10(17)
28 Overview WAGO-I/O-SYSTEM 750
750-8212 PFC200; G2; 2ETH RS
In the controller's initial state, the installed firmware is based on Linux®, with
special real-time extensions of the RT-Preempt patch. In addition, the following
application programs are also installed on the controller, along with a number of
different auxiliary programs:
• a SNMP server/client
• a Telnet server
• a SSH server/client
• a Web server
• a NTP client
• a DHCP server
• a DNS server
Manual
Version 1.4.0, valid from FW Version 03.05.10(17)
WAGO-I/O-SYSTEM 750 Properties 29
750-8212 PFC200; G2; 2ETH RS
4 Properties
4.1 Hardware Description
4.1.1 View
Figure 1: View
Manual
Version 1.4.0, valid from FW Version 03.05.10(17)
30 Properties WAGO-I/O-SYSTEM 750
750-8212 PFC200; G2; 2ETH RS
Manual
Version 1.4.0, valid from FW Version 03.05.10(17)
WAGO-I/O-SYSTEM 750 Properties 31
750-8212 PFC200; G2; 2ETH RS
4.1.2 Labeling
The front labeling includes:
- Device designation
- Name of the display elements, connections and control elements
- Serial number with hardware and firmware version
The serial number indicates the delivery status directly after production.
There are two serial numbers in two rows in the side marking. They are left of the
release tab. The first 10 positions in the longer row of the serial numbers contain
version and date identifications.
01 14 01 01 01 (additional positions)
WW YY FW -- HW FL -
Calendar Year Firmware Hardware Firmware Internal information
week version version loader
version
The row order can vary depending on the production year, only the longer row is
relevant. The back part of this and the shorter row contain internal administration
information from the manufacturer.
Manual
Version 1.4.0, valid from FW Version 03.05.10(17)
32 Properties WAGO-I/O-SYSTEM 750
750-8212 PFC200; G2; 2ETH RS
4.1.3 Connectors
Manual
Version 1.4.0, valid from FW Version 03.05.10(17)
WAGO-I/O-SYSTEM 750 Properties 33
750-8212 PFC200; G2; 2ETH RS
The connection to the 4-pin header under the cover flap can be realized via the
communication cables with the item numbers750-920 and 750-923 or via the
WAGO radio adapter with the item number 750-921.
Manual
Version 1.4.0, valid from FW Version 03.05.10(17)
34 Properties WAGO-I/O-SYSTEM 750
750-8212 PFC200; G2; 2ETH RS
Manual
Version 1.4.0, valid from FW Version 03.05.10(17)
WAGO-I/O-SYSTEM 750 Properties 35
750-8212 PFC200; G2; 2ETH RS
Manual
Version 1.4.0, valid from FW Version 03.05.10(17)
36 Properties WAGO-I/O-SYSTEM 750
750-8212 PFC200; G2; 2ETH RS
Depending on the device type DTE (Data Terminal Equipment, e.g., PC) or DCE
(Data Communication Equipment, e.g., PFC, modem), the RS-232 signals have
different data directions.
Manual
Version 1.4.0, valid from FW Version 03.05.10(17)
WAGO-I/O-SYSTEM 750 Properties 37
750-8212 PFC200; G2; 2ETH RS
To minimize reflection at the end of the line, the RS-485 line must be terminated
at both ends by a cable termination. If required, one pull-up or pull-down resistor
may be used. These resistors ensure a defined level on the bus when no
subscriber is active, i.e., when all subscribers are in “Tri-state”.
Manual
Version 1.4.0, valid from FW Version 03.05.10(17)
38 Properties WAGO-I/O-SYSTEM 750
750-8212 PFC200; G2; 2ETH RS
Communication between the controller and the I/O modules and system power
supply for the I/O modules is provided via the local bus, which consists of 6 data
contacts designed as self-cleaning gold spring contacts.
Do not exceed the maximum total current for I/O modules (5 VDC) via data
contacts!
The maximum permissible total current for internal system supply of the I/O
modules may not be exceeded. The permissible total current is specified in the
technical data of the head station and power supply. The data contacts for
internal system supply can be damaged and the permissible operating
temperature can be exceeded by higher values.
When configuring the system, do not exceed the permissible total current. If there
is a higher power requirement, you must use an additional supply to provide the
system voltage (5 VDC)!
Manual
Version 1.4.0, valid from FW Version 03.05.10(17)
WAGO-I/O-SYSTEM 750 Properties 39
750-8212 PFC200; G2; 2ETH RS
Manual
Version 1.4.0, valid from FW Version 03.05.10(17)
40 Properties WAGO-I/O-SYSTEM 750
750-8212 PFC200; G2; 2ETH RS
Manual
Version 1.4.0, valid from FW Version 03.05.10(17)
WAGO-I/O-SYSTEM 750 Properties 41
750-8212 PFC200; G2; 2ETH RS
Manual
Version 1.4.0, valid from FW Version 03.05.10(17)
42 Properties WAGO-I/O-SYSTEM 750
750-8212 PFC200; G2; 2ETH RS
Manual
Version 1.4.0, valid from FW Version 03.05.10(17)
WAGO-I/O-SYSTEM 750 Properties 43
750-8212 PFC200; G2; 2ETH RS
Table 14: Legend for Figure “Indicating Elements, Memory Card Slot”
Designation Color Description
SD Yellow/Off Memory card status
Manual
Version 1.4.0, valid from FW Version 03.05.10(17)
44 Properties WAGO-I/O-SYSTEM 750
750-8212 PFC200; G2; 2ETH RS
The function of the mode selector switch depends on the activated runtime
system (CODESYS V2 or e!RUNTIME).
Manual
Version 1.4.0, valid from FW Version 03.05.10(17)
WAGO-I/O-SYSTEM 750 Properties 45
750-8212 PFC200; G2; 2ETH RS
You can initiate different functions using the Reset button depending on the
position of the mode selector:
• Restore factory setting (factory reset, see section “Service” > “Firmware
Changes” > “Factory Reset”)
Manual
Version 1.4.0, valid from FW Version 03.05.10(17)
46 Properties WAGO-I/O-SYSTEM 750
750-8212 PFC200; G2; 2ETH RS
The slot for the SD memory card is located on the front of the housing. The
memory card is locked in the enclosure by a push/push mechanism. Inserting
and removing the memory card is described in the Section “Service” > “Inserting
and Removing the Memory Card.”
The memory card is protected by a cover flap. The cover cap is sealable.
Manual
Version 1.4.0, valid from FW Version 03.05.10(17)
WAGO-I/O-SYSTEM 750 Properties 47
750-8212 PFC200; G2; 2ETH RS
Manual
Version 1.4.0, valid from FW Version 03.05.10(17)
48 Properties WAGO-I/O-SYSTEM 750
750-8212 PFC200; G2; 2ETH RS
Manual
Version 1.4.0, valid from FW Version 03.05.10(17)
WAGO-I/O-SYSTEM 750 Properties 49
750-8212 PFC200; G2; 2ETH RS
4.3.4 Clock
</dg_
4.3.5 Programming
Table 21: Technical Data – Programming
Programming CODESYS V2 WAGO-I/O-PRO V2.3
e!RUNTIME e!COCKPIT
IEC 61131-3 LD, FBD, ST, FC
CODESYS V2 memory configuration
Program memory (Flash) 16 MByte
Data memory (RAM) 64 MByte
Non-volatile memory (NVRAM, 128 kByte
Retain + Flags)
e!RUNTIME memory configuration
Program memory (flash) 32 MByte
Data memory (RAM) 128 MByte
Non-volatile memory (NVRAM, 128 kByte
Retain + Flags)
Retain variables max. CODESYS V2 10,000
e!RUNTIME Not specified
Manual
Version 1.4.0, valid from FW Version 03.05.10(17)
50 Properties WAGO-I/O-SYSTEM 750
750-8212 PFC200; G2; 2ETH RS
4.3.7 ETHERNET
Table 23: Technical Data – ETHERNET
ETHERNET 2 x RJ-45 (switched or separated mode)
Transmission medium Twisted Pair S-UTP, 100 Ω, Cat 5,
100 m maximum cable length
Baud rate 10/100 Mbit/s; 10Base-T/100Base-TX
Protocols DHCP, DNS, SNTP, FTP, FTPS (only
explicit connections), SNMP, HTTP,
HTTPS, SSH, Modbus (TCP, UDP)
Modbus input and CODESYS V2 1,000 words,
output process image, also with Modbus access to the flag
max. area (see Section "Modbus" > … >
"Flag Area")
e!RUNTIME 32,000 words
No direct access from fieldbus to the process image for I/O modules!
Any data that is required from the I/O module process image must be explicitly
mapped in the CODESYS program to the data in the fieldbus process image and
vice versa! Direct access is not possible!
Manual
Version 1.4.0, valid from FW Version 03.05.10(17)
WAGO-I/O-SYSTEM 750 Properties 51
750-8212 PFC200; G2; 2ETH RS
Manual
Version 1.4.0, valid from FW Version 03.05.10(17)
52 Properties WAGO-I/O-SYSTEM 750
750-8212 PFC200; G2; 2ETH RS
4.4 Approvals
The following approvals have been granted to the basic version and the variants
of the “PFC200; G2; 2ETH RS” controller (750-8212) described in this document:
Conformity Marking
Ordinary
UL61010-2-201
Locations
The following Ex approvals have been granted to the basic version and the
variants of the “PFC200; G2; 2ETH RS” controller (750-8212) described in this
document:
The following ship approvals have been granted to the basic version and the
variants of the “PFC200; G2; 2ETH RS” controller (750-8212) described in this
document:
DNV GL
[Temperature: B, Humidity: B, Vibration: B, EMC: B, Enclosure: (*)]
(*) Required protection according to the rules shall be provided upon
installation on board.
Manual
Version 1.4.0, valid from FW Version 03.05.10(17)
WAGO-I/O-SYSTEM 750 Properties 53
750-8212 PFC200; G2; 2ETH RS
The following ship approvals have been granted to the basic version of the
“PFC200; G2; 2ETH RS” controller (750-8212):
Manual
Version 1.4.0, valid from FW Version 03.05.10(17)
54 Properties WAGO-I/O-SYSTEM 750
750-8212 PFC200; G2; 2ETH RS
The basic version and the variants of the “PFC200; G2; 2ETH RS” controller
(750-8212) described in this document fulfill the following safety standards:
The basic version and the variants of the “PFC200; G2; 2ETH RS” controller
(750-8212) described in this document fulfill the following EMC standards:
Manual
Version 1.4.0, valid from FW Version 03.05.10(17)
WAGO-I/O-SYSTEM 750 Function Description 55
750-8212 PFC200; G2; 2ETH RS
5 Function Description
</dg_
5.1 Network
• Two separate networks where each port has its own IP address.
The physical interfaces (ports) are assigned via logical bridges and can be e.g.,
configured via the WBM.
For interface X1, a fixed IP address can be set temporarily (“Fix IP Address”
mode). The setting is carried out with the Reset button (see Section
“Commissioning” > … > “Temporarily Setting a Fixed IP Address”).
For operation in Switch mode, the TCP/IP settings such as the IP address or
subnet mask apply to both X1 and X2.
When switching to Switch mode, the X1 settings are applied as a new common
configuration for X1 and X2.
The device is then no longer accessible via the IP address previously set for X2.
This must be taken into account for CODESYS applications that use X2 for
communication.
Manual
Version 1.4.0, valid from FW Version 03.05.10(17)
56 Function Description WAGO-I/O-SYSTEM 750
750-8212 PFC200; G2; 2ETH RS
When operating with separate interfaces and fixed IP address, the device can still
be accessed via the interface X2 via the regular IP address.
Manual
Version 1.4.0, valid from FW Version 03.05.10(17)
WAGO-I/O-SYSTEM 750 Function Description 57
750-8212 PFC200; G2; 2ETH RS
One common network with one common IP address for both ports
Table 29: MAC ID and IP Address Assignment for One Bridge with Two Ports
Bridge MAC ID IP Addr. Port MAC ID Port MAC ID
1 01 1 X1 02 X2 03
Two separate networks where each port has its own IP address
Table 30: MAC ID and IP Address Assignment for Two Bridges with One/One Ports
Bridge MAC ID IP Addr. Port MAC ID Port MAC ID
1 01 1 X1 01
2 02 2 X2 02
Manual
Version 1.4.0, valid from FW Version 03.05.10(17)
58 Function Description WAGO-I/O-SYSTEM 750
750-8212 PFC200; G2; 2ETH RS
Several groups of users are provided in the controller which can be used for
various services.
Default passwords are set for all users. We strongly recommend changing these
passwords on startup!
Change passwords
Default passwords are documented in these instructions and therefore do not
offer adequate protection! Change the passwords to meet your particular needs.
All password-protected services and their associated users are listed in the
following table.
Users
WBM Linux®
SNMP
admin
admin
Service
user
user
root
Manual
Version 1.4.0, valid from FW Version 03.05.10(17)
WAGO-I/O-SYSTEM 750 Function Description 59
750-8212 PFC200; G2; 2ETH RS
WBM has its own user administration system. The users in this system are
isolated from the other user groups in the system for security reasons.
Change passwords
Default passwords are documented in these instructions and therefore do not
offer adequate protection! Change the passwords to meet your particular needs.
The Linux® users group include the actual users of the operating system, which is
likewise used by most services.
The passwords for these users must be configured through a terminal connection
via SSH/RS-232.
Change passwords
Default passwords are documented in these instructions and therefore do not
offer adequate protection! Change the passwords to meet your particular needs.
Manual
Version 1.4.0, valid from FW Version 03.05.10(17)
60 Function Description WAGO-I/O-SYSTEM 750
750-8212 PFC200; G2; 2ETH RS
The SNMP service manages its own users. In its initial state, no users are stored
in the system.
Manual
Version 1.4.0, valid from FW Version 03.05.10(17)
WAGO-I/O-SYSTEM 750 Function Description 61
750-8212 PFC200; G2; 2ETH RS
The HTTP and HTTPS web protocols can be used to access the WBM pages for
the controller. HTTPS is preferred because it uses the SSL/TLS protocol. The
SSL/TLS protocol ensures secure communication through encryption and
authentication
The default setting for the controller allows strong encryption, but uses only
simple authentication methods. As authentication for any secure communication
channel plays a central role, it is strongly recommended that you use secure
authentication. The security certificate saved on the controller is the basis for
authentication. The default location for the security certificate is:
/etc/lighttpd/https-cert.pem
The “TLS Configuration” group of the WBM page “Security” can be used to switch
the cryptographic methods allowed for HTTPS and the TLS versions that can be
used.
Manual
Version 1.4.0, valid from FW Version 03.05.10(17)
62 Function Description WAGO-I/O-SYSTEM 750
750-8212 PFC200; G2; 2ETH RS
Manual
Version 1.4.0, valid from FW Version 03.05.10(17)
WAGO-I/O-SYSTEM 750 Function Description 63
750-8212 PFC200; G2; 2ETH RS
For communication encrypted with TLS, root certificates are used to verify the
authenticity of the communication partner.
A root certificate, which is signed by a certificate authority, serves to verify the
validity of all certificates issued by this certificate authority.
The root certificates stored on the controller (root CA bundle) form the basis for
authentication of services hosted on the Internet (e.g., email providers and cloud
services).
This file contains the certificates provided by Mozilla. A list of the included root
certificates and their respective validity periods can be requested from the
following address:
https://hg.mozilla.org/releases/mozilla-release/raw-
file/79f079284141/security/nss/lib/ckfw/builtins/certdata.txt
The root certificates can be updated on the controller by updating the file
/etc/ssl/certs/ca-certificates.crt (see section “Service” > “Updating Root
Certificates”).
Manual
Version 1.4.0, valid from FW Version 03.05.10(17)
64 Function Description WAGO-I/O-SYSTEM 750
750-8212 PFC200; G2; 2ETH RS
</dg_
The default host name or the configured name is active again if the network
interfaces are set to static IP addresses or if a host name is not received via the
DHCP response.
A similar mechanism is used for a domain name as for the host name. The
difference is that a default domain name is not set. As long as a domain name is
not configured or supplied by DHCP, the domain name is empty.
5.1.3.2 Routing
As part of the TCP/IP configuration, the controller allows you to configure static
routes, IP masquerading and port forwarding. Default gateways are configured
via static routes, since default gateways are a special case of static routes.
A network station transmits to a gateway all network data packets for systems
outside of its local network. This gateway is responsible for the appropriate
routing of the data packets so that they reach the target system. To allow access
to different target systems, it may be necessary to configure multiple gateways.
This is configured by adding routing entries.
A routing entry consists of the following information:
• Destination address,
• Destination mask,
• Gateway address,
• Gateway metric.
Default Gateway:
If the value “default” is entered in the “Destination Address” field, a default
gateway, also called a default route, is defined. The value “0.0.0.0” must then be
set in the “Destination Mask” field.
Route:
If an IP address or IP address range is entered in the “Destination Address” field,
then all network data packets that are directed to the network address or network
address range are sent to the gateway address corresponding to the entry.
If the IP address of the gateway is outside the IP address space that the
controller can reach, the associated route is not enabled.
The metric value of the configured routing entries can be specified for the
controller. The default value for the metric is 20. Besides the manually
configurable routes, default gateways can also be set via DHCP replies. All
default gateways transferred via DHCP are assigned a permanent metric value of
10.
Metric example:
A controller obtains its IP configuration via a DHCP server and receives both the
IP address and the network mask 192.168.1.10/24. Furthermore, a gateway with
IP address 192.168.1.2 and metric value 20 is set up on the controller. Therefore,
when no specific routing entry exists for the target address of network data
packets, the controller sends them to gateway 192.168.1.2. Besides the IP
address and network mask, the DHCP server is now instructed to allocate a
default gateway of 192.168.1.1. The controller gives this default gateway a metric
value of 10. Therefore, the default gateway received via DHCP is preferred over
the manually configured gateway.
The routing entries are used to specify which gateways the network data packets
are sent. If the controller is running in switched mode and only has one network
interface, all network traffic passes through this network interface. If the controller
is running in separated mode or contains a modem, it has more than one network
interface. Therefore, it is possible for a network data packet to arrive at the
controller on one network interface and depart on a different network interface.
This forwarding between different network interfaces must be explicitly enabled; it
is disabled when the controller is delivered. To enable the forwarding, “Routing
enabled entirely” must be enabled in the “General Routing Configuration” group.
In this case, the controller can function as a router.
Manual
Version 1.4.0, valid from FW Version 03.05.10(17)
66 Function Description WAGO-I/O-SYSTEM 750
750-8212 PFC200; G2; 2ETH RS
For forwarding network communication through a router, it is necessary to note
that corresponding routing entries must be provided not only for the router, but
also for the respective endpoints of the communication. The routing entries of the
endpoints must ensure that the desired network data packets are sent via the
router, both when the connection is established and with the replies.
Manual
Version 1.4.0, valid from FW Version 03.05.10(17)
WAGO-I/O-SYSTEM 750 Function Description 67
750-8212 PFC200; G2; 2ETH RS
The controller can get network parameters from an external DHCP master via the
DHCP Client service.
• IP address
• SubNet mask
• Router/gateway
• Hostname
• Domain
• DNS server
• NTP server
For the IP address, SubNet mask and router/gateway parameters, the entries are
stored per ETHERNET port.
The Hostname and Domain parameters are each stored according to the LIFO
principle (Last In First Out). The settings from the last DHCP offer received are
always used.
The DNS and NTP Server parameters are stored centrally for global use. All
transmitted parameters are stored.
The controller provides the DHCP server service for the automatic configuration
of IP addresses of network stations on the same subnet.
Generally, only one DHCP server can be active on a subnet at one time.
In “switched” mode, these settings are possible for both interfaces together and
in “separated” mode for each interface separately.
Manual
Version 1.4.0, valid from FW Version 03.05.10(17)
68 Function Description WAGO-I/O-SYSTEM 750
750-8212 PFC200; G2; 2ETH RS
The settings are made, for example, in the WBM via the “DHCP Configuration”
page.
The DHCP server also passes other parameters in addition to the IP address.
The following table shows the complete list.
Not all parameters can be set in the WBM. If you want to set other values for the
existing parameters or want to pass other parameters via DHCP, the DHCP
Manual
Version 1.4.0, valid from FW Version 03.05.10(17)
WAGO-I/O-SYSTEM 750 Function Description 69
750-8212 PFC200; G2; 2ETH RS
server must be manually configured. For the controller, the DHCP server service
is handled by the program "dnsmasq".
From a Linux® command line, an editor must be used to change the file
“/etc/dnsmasq.d/dnsmasq_default.conf” to set the configuration.
The controller offers the DNS server service for the automatic assignment of
hostnames to IP addresses of network stations.
The DNS server takes over the names and IP addresses of local network stations
from the DHCP server. This DNS server routes requests for non-local names,
such as from the Internet, to higher-level DNS servers if configured and
accessible.
The settings are made, e.g., in the WBM, via the “Configuration of DNS Service”
page.
Manual
Version 1.4.0, valid from FW Version 03.05.10(17)
70 Function Description WAGO-I/O-SYSTEM 750
750-8212 PFC200; G2; 2ETH RS
You can specify the cloud service to use: Microsoft Azure, Amazon Web Services
and IBM Cloud are available.
Data is transmitted from the controller to the cloud service as JSON files. The
connection can be encrypted with TLS; see the section “Functional Description” >
… > “TLS Encryption.”
You can find the settings that must be configured in the controller in order to use
the cloud connectivity functionality in the section “Start-Up” > … > “Configuration
Using Web-Based Management.
Manual
Version 1.4.0, valid from FW Version 03.05.10(17)
WAGO-I/O-SYSTEM 750 Function Description 71
750-8212 PFC200; G2; 2ETH RS
Use encryption methods to protect your data and observe the information
provided by the Federal Office for Information Security – “Cloud: Risks and
Security Tips”.
Observe comparable publications of the competent, public institutions of your
country.
Manual
Version 1.4.0, valid from FW Version 03.05.10(17)
72 Function Description WAGO-I/O-SYSTEM 750
750-8212 PFC200; G2; 2ETH RS
The function of the memory card in normal operation and possible faults that may
occur when the memory card is used are described in the following sections for
different operating modes.
5.2.1 Formatting
Manual
Version 1.4.0, valid from FW Version 03.05.10(17)
WAGO-I/O-SYSTEM 750 Function Description 73
750-8212 PFC200; G2; 2ETH RS
Memory card access from CODESYS only possible with FAT16, FAT32 or
NTFS!
If the CODESYS user “admin” (see the section “Network” > “Network Security” >
“Users and Passwords” > “Services and Users“) is supposed to be able to access
files created on the memory card, the memory card must be formatted with
FAT16, FAT32 or NTFS.
If the Linux® file system formats EXT2 or EXT3 are used, “root” rights are
required for data access. Therefore, access via CODESYS is not possible.
Manual
Version 1.4.0, valid from FW Version 03.05.10(17)
74 Function Description WAGO-I/O-SYSTEM 750
750-8212 PFC200; G2; 2ETH RS
The necessary settings can be made and the functions can be executed via the
WBM pages or via the CBM “Backup” and “Restore” menus.
The storage medium (internal memory or SD card) and, if applicable, the storage
location on the network can be set.
The backup function enables the data of the internal memory and device settings
to be saved on the memory card during operation.
The backup function can be called via the WBM page “Firmware Backup” or the
CBM menu “Firmware Backup.”
The network or the inserted memory card can be selected as the target medium.
The files of the internal drive are stored on the target medium in the directory
media/sd/copy and in the corresponding subdirectories.
The information that is not present as files on the controller is stored in XML
format in the directory media/sd/settings/.
If the memory card is selected as the target medium, the LED above the memory
card slot flashes yellow during the save operation.
The device settings and files of the internal drive are then saved on the target
medium.
Manual
Version 1.4.0, valid from FW Version 03.05.10(17)
WAGO-I/O-SYSTEM 750 Function Description 75
750-8212 PFC200; G2; 2ETH RS
The controller has an automatic update function. If this function is activated on a
memory card before the data backup and a controller is booted from this memory
card, this data is restored automatically on the internal memory of the controller.
The restore function is used to load the data and device settings from the
memory card to the internal memory during operation.
The restore function can be called via the WBM page “Firmware Restore” or the
CBM menu “Firmware Restore.”
The network or, if it is inserted, the memory card can be selected as the source
medium.
If the memory card is selected as the source medium, the LED above the
memory card slot flashes yellow during the load operation.
When loading the data, the files are copied from the directory media/sd/copy/ of
the source medium to the appropriate directories on the internal memory.
The device has an active and an inactive root partition. The system backup is
stored on the inactive partition. Startup is then performed from the newly written
partition. If the startup process can be completed, the new partition is switched to
active. Otherwise, booting is performed again from the old active partition during
the next boot process.
The boot project is loaded automatically and the settings automatically activated
after a restart. The “Boot project location” setting on the “General PLC Runtime
Configuration Web” page of the WBM determines whether the boot project of the
internal drive or the memory card is loaded.
Manual
Version 1.4.0, valid from FW Version 03.05.10(17)
76 Function Description WAGO-I/O-SYSTEM 750
750-8212 PFC200; G2; 2ETH RS
File size must not exceed the size of the internal drive!
Note that the amount of data in the media/sd/copy/ directory must not exceed the
total size of the internal drive.
Reset by restore
A reset is performed when the system or settings are restored by CODESYS!
Manual
Version 1.4.0, valid from FW Version 03.05.10(17)
WAGO-I/O-SYSTEM 750 Function Description 77
750-8212 PFC200; G2; 2ETH RS
During normal operation, the memory card is incorporated into the file system of
the controller as a drive.
No automatic copy procedures are triggered.
The LED above the memory card flashes yellow during the access.
The memory card is then ready for operation and available under /media/sd.
The LED above the memory card flashes yellow during the attempted access.
Manual
Version 1.4.0, valid from FW Version 03.05.10(17)
78 Function Description WAGO-I/O-SYSTEM 750
750-8212 PFC200; G2; 2ETH RS
You can use the WBM to move the home directory for the runtime system to the
memory card, e.g., to make more memory available for a large boot project or
other files.
• When moving the home directory to the memory card, insert a memory
card formatted to support file system. Only the first partition of a memory
card can be accessed at /media/sd and can be used as the home directory.
Only when the two conditions are met can the “Home directory on memory card
enabled” checkbox be selected from the WBM on the “PLC Runtime” page.
Press the [Submit] button to apply the settings, which take effect after the next
restart.
No files are applied from the old to the new home directory.
After moving the directory, a project must be loaded and a boot project created.
It should be noted that the memory card may not be removed under any
circumstances as long as the home directory is there. If an application is running,
system safety can be endangered by an uncontrolled controller crash.
Switching the home directory has no effect if the controller was botted from a
memory card. The configuration state is saved, but only takes effect if the content
of the memory card is copied to the internal memory.
Manual
Version 1.4.0, valid from FW Version 03.05.10(17)
WAGO-I/O-SYSTEM 750 Function Description 79
750-8212 PFC200; G2; 2ETH RS
Table 35: Loading a Boot Project
“Home
Boot Project Memory Card
Directory on
Stored in with Boot Boot Project is
Memory Card
Internal Flash Project Loaded ...
Enabled”
Memory Inserted
Checked
No No, no boot project exists
No
Yes No, no boot project exists
No No, no boot project exists in the
No
Yes internal flash memory
Yes Yes, from memory card
No Yes, from internal flash memory
No, invalid combination, since
no no boot project is allowed to
(Yes) invalid
exist in the internal flash
memory for this setting
Yes
No Yes, from internal flash memory
No, invalid combination, since
Yes no boot project is allowed to
(Yes) invalid
exist in the internal flash
memory for this setting
Manual
Version 1.4.0, valid from FW Version 03.05.10(17)
80 Function Description WAGO-I/O-SYSTEM 750
750-8212 PFC200; G2; 2ETH RS
The e!COCKPIT software can be used for licensing. You can find corresponding
instructions in the documentation of e!COCKPIT.
A license key is required for productive use without time restriction of a software
component that is subject to licensing. Full use of the software component is
possible even without a license key for 30 days. This trial period only includes the
days of actual use. Access without a license key is no longer possible after the
trial period.
The license status (“Evaluation period not yet expired” or “Evaluation period has
expired”) is displayed by the controller via the SYS LED.
Manual
Version 1.4.0, valid from FW Version 03.05.10(17)
WAGO-I/O-SYSTEM 750 Mounting 81
750-8212 PFC200; G2; 2ETH RS
6 Mounting
6.1 Installation Position
Along with horizontal and vertical installation, all other installation positions are
allowed.
Examples:
Exception:
The number of connected I/O modules also depends on the type of fieldbus
coupler/controller is used. For example, the maximum number of stackable I/O
modules on one PROFIBUS DP/V1 fieldbus coupler/controller is 63 with no
passive I/O modules and end module.
Manual
Version 1.4.0, valid from FW Version 03.05.10(17)
82 Mounting WAGO-I/O-SYSTEM 750
750-8212 PFC200; G2; 2ETH RS
Increase the total length using a coupler module for internal data bus
extension!
You can increase the total length of a fieldbus node by using a 750-628 I/O
Module (coupler module for internal data bus extension). For such a
configuration, attach a 750-627 I/O Module (end module for internal data bus
extension) after the last I/O module of a module assembly. Use an RJ-45 patch
cable to connect the I/O module to the coupler module for internal data bus
extension of another module block.
This allows you to segment a fieldbus node into a maximum of 11 blocks with
maximum of 10 I/O modules for internal data bus extension.
The maximum cable length between two blocks is five meters.
More information is available in the manuals for the 750-627 and 750-628 I/O
Modules.
Manual
Version 1.4.0, valid from FW Version 03.05.10(17)
WAGO-I/O-SYSTEM 750 Mounting 83
750-8212 PFC200; G2; 2ETH RS
Carrier rails have different mechanical and electrical properties. For the optimal
system setup on a carrier rail, certain guidelines must be observed:
• The carrier rail must optimally support the EMC measures integrated into
the system and the shielding of the I/O module connections.
• The geometry of the carrier rail must not be altered in order to secure the
safe hold of the components. In particular, when shortening or mounting the
carrier rail, it must not be crushed or bent.
• The base of the I/O components extends into the profile of the carrier rail.
For carrier rails with a height of 7.5 mm, mounting points are to be riveted
under the node in the carrier rail (slotted head captive screws or blind
rivets).
• The metal springs on the bottom of the housing must have low-impedance
contact with the DIN rail (wide contact surface is possible).
Manual
Version 1.4.0, valid from FW Version 03.05.10(17)
84 Mounting WAGO-I/O-SYSTEM 750
750-8212 PFC200; G2; 2ETH RS
Observe the mounting distance of the DIN rail when the load is increased!
With increased vibration and shock load, mount the DIN rail at a mounting
distance of max. 60 mm.
6.4 Spacing
The spacing between adjacent components, cable conduits, casing and frame
sides must be maintained for the complete fieldbus node.
The spacing creates room for heat transfer, installation or wiring. The spacing to
cable conduits also prevents conducted electromagnetic interferences from
influencing the operation.
Manual
Version 1.4.0, valid from FW Version 03.05.10(17)
WAGO-I/O-SYSTEM 750 Mounting 85
750-8212 PFC200; G2; 2ETH RS
The reliable positioning and connection is made using a tongue and groove
system. Due to the automatic locking, the individual devices are securely seated
on the rail after installation.
Starting with the fieldbus coupler or controller, the I/O modules are mounted
adjacent to each other according to the project design. Errors in the design of the
node in terms of the potential groups (connection via the power contacts) are
recognized, as the I/O modules with power contacts (blade contacts) cannot be
linked to I/O modules with fewer power contacts.
Manual
Version 1.4.0, valid from FW Version 03.05.10(17)
86 Mounting WAGO-I/O-SYSTEM 750
750-8212 PFC200; G2; 2ETH RS
3. Use a screwdriver blade to turn the locking disc until the nose of the locking
disc engages behind the carrier rail (see the following figure). This prevents
the controller from canting on the carrier rail.
With the controller snapped in place, the electrical connections for the data
contacts and power contacts (if any) to the possible subsequent I/O module are
established.
Manual
Version 1.4.0, valid from FW Version 03.05.10(17)
WAGO-I/O-SYSTEM 750 Connect Devices 87
750-8212 PFC200; G2; 2ETH RS
7 Connect Devices
7.1 Connecting a Conductor to the CAGE CLAMP®
The WAGO CAGE CLAMP® connection is appropriate for solid, stranded and
finely stranded conductors.
If more than one conductor must be routed to one connection, these must be
connected in an up-circuit wiring assembly, for example using WAGO feed-
through terminals.
1. To open the CAGE CLAMP® insert the actuating tool into the opening
above the connection.
3. To close the CAGE CLAMP® simply remove the tool - the conductor is then
clamped firmly in place.
Manual
Version 1.4.0, valid from FW Version 03.05.10(17)
88 Connect Devices WAGO-I/O-SYSTEM 750
750-8212 PFC200; G2; 2ETH RS
The system and field voltage of the WAGO-I/O-SYSTEMs 750 is supplied on the
head stations and bus supply modules.
For components that work with extra low voltage, only SELV/PELV voltage
sources should be used.
Manual
Version 1.4.0, valid from FW Version 03.05.10(17)
WAGO-I/O-SYSTEM 750 Connect Devices 89
750-8212 PFC200; G2; 2ETH RS
Filter modules for 24 V supply are required for the certified operation of the
system.
Therefore, the following power supply concept must be absolutely complied with.
Manual
Version 1.4.0, valid from FW Version 03.05.10(17)
90 Commissioning WAGO-I/O-SYSTEM 750
750-8212 PFC200; G2; 2ETH RS
8 Commissioning
8.1 Switching On the Controller
Before switching on the controller ensure that you
• have connected all required data cables (see section “Connections”) to the
corresponding interfaces and have secured the connectors by their
attached locking screws,
To switch on both the controller and the connected I/O modules, switch on your
power supply unit.
Starting of the controller is indicated by a brief orange flashing of all LEDs. After a
few seconds the SYS LED will indicate successful boot-up of the controller.
The CODESYS 2.3 runtime system or e!RUNTIME is started at the same time.
Once the entire system has been successfully started, the SYS and I/O LEDs
light up green.
Manual
Version 1.4.0, valid from FW Version 03.05.10(17)
WAGO-I/O-SYSTEM 750 Commissioning 91
750-8212 PFC200; G2; 2ETH RS
2. In the MS DOS prompt enter the command “ipconfig” and then press
[Enter].
Manual
Version 1.4.0, valid from FW Version 03.05.10(17)
92 Commissioning WAGO-I/O-SYSTEM 750
750-8212 PFC200; G2; 2ETH RS
Adapt IP addressing to your specific system structure to ensure that the PC and
the controller can communicate with one another using one of the available
configuration tools (WBM, WAGO ETHERNET Settings or CBM – see section
“Configuration”).
• The controller and host PC must be in the same subnet (regardless of the
IP address of the host PC).
• With a subnet mast of 255.255.255.0, the first three digits of the IP address
of the host PC and controller must match so that they are located in the
same subnet.
Manual
Version 1.4.0, valid from FW Version 03.05.10(17)
WAGO-I/O-SYSTEM 750 Commissioning 93
750-8212 PFC200; G2; 2ETH RS
In the example figure shown here, the corresponding output of “Open DHCP” is
presented.
In conjunction with the DNS server associated with DHCP, the device can be
reached using its host name.
This name consists of the prefix “PFCx00-“ and the last six places of the MAC
address (in the example shown here: “00:30:DE:FF:00:5A”). The MAC address of
the device can be printed on the label on the side of the device.
The host name of the device in the example shown here is thus “PFC200-
FF005A”.
Manual
Version 1.4.0, valid from FW Version 03.05.10(17)
94 Commissioning WAGO-I/O-SYSTEM 750
750-8212 PFC200; G2; 2ETH RS
3. Select “SSH” as the connection type, and enter the IP address of the
controller and port 22 as the connection parameters.
Alternatively, you can also connect the controller via a serial interface:
3. Select “Serial” as the connection type and enter a baud rate of 115200
bauds as the connection parameter. The settings for data bits, stop bits and
parity do not need to be adjusted.
5. Start the configuration tool by entering the command “cbm” (case sensitive)
on the command line and then press [Enter].
Manual
Version 1.4.0, valid from FW Version 03.05.10(17)
WAGO-I/O-SYSTEM 750 Commissioning 95
750-8212 PFC200; G2; 2ETH RS
6. In the Main menu use the keyboard (arrow keys or numeric keypad) to
move to and select Networking and then press [Enter].
Manual
Version 1.4.0, valid from FW Version 03.05.10(17)
96 Commissioning WAGO-I/O-SYSTEM 750
750-8212 PFC200; G2; 2ETH RS
9. In the menu TCP/IP Configuration select IP Address and press [Enter].
10. In the menu Change IP Address enter the new IP address and confirm by
clicking [OK]. If you want to return to the main menu without making
changes, click [Abort].
Manual
Version 1.4.0, valid from FW Version 03.05.10(17)
WAGO-I/O-SYSTEM 750 Commissioning 97
750-8212 PFC200; G2; 2ETH RS
You can use WAGO communication cables or WAGO radio adapters or even the
IP network for data communication.
Manual
Version 1.4.0, valid from FW Version 03.05.10(17)
98 Commissioning WAGO-I/O-SYSTEM 750
750-8212 PFC200; G2; 2ETH RS
6. Select the “Network” tab:
8. In the column “Input” enter the required IP address and, if applicable, the
address of the subnet mask and of the gateway.
10. You can now close “WAGO Ethernet Settings”, or make other changes
directly in the Web-based Management system as required. To do this,
click on [Run WBM] at the right in the window.
Manual
Version 1.4.0, valid from FW Version 03.05.10(17)
WAGO-I/O-SYSTEM 750 Commissioning 99
750-8212 PFC200; G2; 2ETH RS
</dg_
2. Press and hold the Reset button (RST) for longer than 8 seconds.
Manual
Version 1.4.0, valid from FW Version 03.05.10(17)
100 Commissioning WAGO-I/O-SYSTEM 750
750-8212 PFC200; G2; 2ETH RS
2. In the MS DOS window, enter the command “ping” and the IP address of
the controller (for example, ping 192.168.1.17)and then press [Enter].
3. Your PC sends out a query that is answered by the controller. This reply
appears in the MS DOS prompt window. If the error message “Timeout”
appears, the controller has not responded properly. You then need to check
your network settings.
Manual
Version 1.4.0, valid from FW Version 03.05.10(17)
WAGO-I/O-SYSTEM 750 Commissioning 101
750-8212 PFC200; G2; 2ETH RS
The table in the Section “Function Description” > ... > “Users and Passwords” >
“WBM Users Group” shows the standard passwords for the WBM users. Proceed
as follows to change these passwords:
1. Connect the controller to a PC via one of the network interfaces (X1, X2).
2. Start a web browser program on the PC and call up the WBM of the
controller.
4. Change the password for all users on the WBM “Configuration of the users
for the WBM” page.
5. Select each user and enter a new password and confirm it.
The table in the Section “Functional Description” > ... > “Users and Passwords” >
“Linux® Users Group” shows the standard passwords for the Linux® users.
Proceed as follows to change these passwords:
4. Change the password for all users with the “passwd root,” “passwd admin”
and “passwd user” commands.
Manual
Version 1.4.0, valid from FW Version 03.05.10(17)
102 Commissioning WAGO-I/O-SYSTEM 750
750-8212 PFC200; G2; 2ETH RS
</dg_
8.6 Shutdown/Restart
Switch off the power supply to shut down the controller.
Manual
Version 1.4.0, valid from FW Version 03.05.10(17)
WAGO-I/O-SYSTEM 750 Commissioning 103
750-8212 PFC200; G2; 2ETH RS
You can initiate various reset functions using the mode selector switch and the
Reset button (RST).
To perform a warm start reset, set the mode selector switch to "Reset" and hold it
there for two to seven seconds.
Execution of the reset is signaled by the red “RUN LED” briefly going out when
the mode selector switch is released.
All e!RUNTIME applications are reset with a warm start reset. All global data is
set to its initialization values. This corresponds to the e!COCKPIT IDE “Reset
warm” command.
</dg_
To perform a warm start reset, set the mode selector switch to "Reset" and hold it
there for two to seven seconds.
Execution of the reset is signaled by the red “RUN LED” briefly going out when
the mode selector switch is released.
On a cold start reset the CODESYS V2 application is reset and the memory
containing the retain variables is cleared.
This corresponds to the WAGO I/O PRO IDE “Reset (Cold)” command.
</dg_
To perform a cold start reset, set the mode selector switch to “Reset” and hold it
there for more than seven seconds.
Execution of the reset is signaled after seven seconds by the “RUN” LED going
out for an extended period. You can then release the mode selector switch.
Manual
Version 1.4.0, valid from FW Version 03.05.10(17)
104 Commissioning WAGO-I/O-SYSTEM 750
750-8212 PFC200; G2; 2ETH RS
All e!RUNTIME applications are reset with a cold start reset. All global data and
the retain variables are set to their initialization values.
This corresponds to the e!COCKPIT IDE “Reset Cold” command.
</dg_
To perform a cold start reset, set the mode selector switch to “Reset” and hold it
there for more than seven seconds.
Execution of the reset is signaled after seven seconds by the “RUN” LED going
out for an extended period. You can then release the mode selector switch.
To perform a software reset, set the mode selector switch to RUN or STOP and
then press the Reset button (RST) for one to eight seconds.
Reset completion is indicated by a brief orange flashing of all LEDs. After a few
seconds the SYS LED will indicate successful boot-up of the controller.
3. Press and hold both buttons until the “SYS” LED alternately flashes
red/green after approx. 8 seconds.
4. When the “SYS” LED flashes red/green alternately, release the mode
selector switch and Reset button.
Manual
Version 1.4.0, valid from FW Version 03.05.10(17)
WAGO-I/O-SYSTEM 750 Commissioning 105
750-8212 PFC200; G2; 2ETH RS
Manual
Version 1.4.0, valid from FW Version 03.05.10(17)
106 Commissioning WAGO-I/O-SYSTEM 750
750-8212 PFC200; G2; 2ETH RS
8.8 Configuration
• Access via the CODESYS PLC program using the CODESYS V2 library
WagoConfigToolLIB.lib (section “Appendix” > “WagoConfigToolLIB.lib”) or
the e!RUNTIME library “WagoAppConfigTool.lib”
The CBM is basically for the initial configuration and startup of the controller.
Therefore, it only provides a subset of the WBM parameters. For example,
parameters that cannot be displayed in a terminal window in a reasonable way
and are not necessary for initial startup are not displayed. You can find the
explanations of the parameters starting with the section “‘Information’ Page.”
Manual
Version 1.4.0, valid from FW Version 03.05.10(17)
WAGO-I/O-SYSTEM 750 Commissioning 107
750-8212 PFC200; G2; 2ETH RS
Manual
Version 1.4.0, valid from FW Version 03.05.10(17)
108 Commissioning WAGO-I/O-SYSTEM 750
750-8212 PFC200; G2; 2ETH RS
Depending on the user selected, the navigation bar and the tabs of the
WBM are displayed.
If you have disabled cookies in your web browser, you can continue to use the
WBM as long as you move directly inside it. However, if you fully reload the
website (e.g., with [F5]), you must log in again since the web browser is then not
able to store the data of your login session.
Manual
Version 1.4.0, valid from FW Version 03.05.10(17)
WAGO-I/O-SYSTEM 750 Commissioning 109
750-8212 PFC200; G2; 2ETH RS
Change passwords
Default passwords are documented in these instructions and therefore do not
offer adequate protection! Change the passwords to meet your particular needs.
If you do not change these passwords, a warning will appear each time you call
up a website after logging in.
Manual
Version 1.4.0, valid from FW Version 03.05.10(17)
110 Commissioning WAGO-I/O-SYSTEM 750
750-8212 PFC200; G2; 2ETH RS
Table 41: Access Rights for WBM Pages
Tab/Navigation WBM Page Title User
Device Status Device Status guest
Vendor Information Vendor Information guest
PLC Runtime PLC Runtime Information guest
Legal Information
WAGO Licenses WAGO Software License Agreement guest
Open Source Open Source Licenses user
Licenses
WBM Licenses WBM Third Party License Information user
WBM Version WBM Version Info guest
Configuration
PLC Runtime PLC Runtime Configuration user
Networking
TCP/IP TCP/IP Configuration user
Configuration
Ethernet Ethernet Configuration user
Configuration
Host/Domain Configuration of Host and Domain Name user
Name
Routing Routing user
Clock Clock Settings user
Administration
Serial Interface Configuration of Serial Interface admin
RS232/RS485
Service Interface Configuration of Service Interface admin
Create Image Create bootable Image admin
Package Server
Firmware Firmware Backup admin
Backup
Firmware Firmware Restore admin
Restore
Active System Active System admin
Mass Storage Mass Storage admin
Software Uploads Software Uploads admin
Ports and Services
Network Configuration of Network Services admin
Services
NTP Client Configuration of NTP Client admin
PLC Runtime PLC Runtime Services admin
Services
SSH SSH Server Settings admin
TFTP TFTP Server admin
DHCP Server DHCP Server Configuration admin
DNS Configuration of DNS Service user
Manual
Version 1.4.0, valid from FW Version 03.05.10(17)
WAGO-I/O-SYSTEM 750 Commissioning 111
750-8212 PFC200; G2; 2ETH RS
Table 41: Access Rights for WBM Pages
Tab/Navigation WBM Page Title User
Cloud Connectivity
Status Overview admin
Connection 1 Configuration admin
Connection 2 Configuration admin
SNMP
General Configuration of general SNMP parameters admin
Configuration
SNMP v1/v2c Configuration of SNMP v1/v2c parameters admin
SNMP v3 Configuration of SNMP v3 Users admin
Users WBM User Configuration admin
Fieldbus
OPC UA OPC UA Configuration admin
Modbus Modbus Services Configuration user
Security
OpenVPN / IPsec OpenVPN / IPsec Configuration admin
Firewall
General General Firewall Configuration admin
Configuration
Interface Interface Configuration admin
Configuration
MAC Address Configuration of MAC Address Filter admin
Filter
User Filter Configuration of User Filter admin
Certificates Certificates admin
TLS Security Settings admin
Integrity Advanced Intrusion Detection Environment admin
(AIDE)
Diagnostic Diagnostic Information guest
Manual
Version 1.4.0, valid from FW Version 03.05.10(17)
112 Commissioning WAGO-I/O-SYSTEM 750
750-8212 PFC200; G2; 2ETH RS
The IP address of the active device is displayed in the entry line of the browser
window.
The WBM pages are only displayed after logging in. To log in, enter your
username and password in the login window and click the [Login] button.
The tabs for the various WBM areas and the [Reboot] and [Logout] buttons are
displayed in the header of the browser window. The [Reboot] button only
appears if you are logged in as an administrator.
If not all tabs can be displayed in the selected width of the window, a tab with
ellipsis (...) is displayed instead of the tabs that cannot be displayed. This allows
you to select the tabs (not shown) using a pull-down menu.
Figure 41: WBM Header with Tabs that Cannot be Displayed (Example)
The navigation tree is shown on the left of the browser window. The content of
the navigation tree depends on the selected tab.
You can use this navigation tree to go to the individual pages and, where
provided, subpages included in these pages.
Manual
Version 1.4.0, valid from FW Version 03.05.10(17)
WAGO-I/O-SYSTEM 750 Commissioning 113
750-8212 PFC200; G2; 2ETH RS
• Date and Time - Local date and local time and on the device
A description of the WBM pages and the respective parameters can be found in
the appendix in Section “Configuration Dialogs” > “Web-Based Management
(WBM)”.
Manual
Version 1.4.0, valid from FW Version 03.05.10(17)
114 Commissioning WAGO-I/O-SYSTEM 750
750-8212 PFC200; G2; 2ETH RS
3. Select “SSH” as the connection type, and enter the IP address of the
controller and port 22 as the connection parameters.
Alternatively, you can also connect the controller via a serial interface:
3. Select “Serial” as the connection type and enter a baud rate of 115200
bauds as the connection parameter. The settings for data bits, stop bits and
parity do not need to be adjusted.
Manual
Version 1.4.0, valid from FW Version 03.05.10(17)
WAGO-I/O-SYSTEM 750 Commissioning 115
750-8212 PFC200; G2; 2ETH RS
5. Start the configuration tool by entering the command “cbm” (case sensitive)
on the command line and then press [Enter].
Manual
Version 1.4.0, valid from FW Version 03.05.10(17)
116 Commissioning WAGO-I/O-SYSTEM 750
750-8212 PFC200; G2; 2ETH RS
Manual
Version 1.4.0, valid from FW Version 03.05.10(17)
WAGO-I/O-SYSTEM 750 Commissioning 117
750-8212 PFC200; G2; 2ETH RS
Table 42: CBM Menu Structure
Menu Hierarchy
1. Users
2. Create Image
3. Owner of Serial Interface
4. Reboot Controller
7. Package Server
0. Back to Main Menu
1. Firmware Backup
2. Firmware Restore
3. System Partition
8. Mass Storage
0. Back to Main Menu
1. Internal Flash (active partition)
9. Software Uploads
0. Back to Main Menu
1. Update Script
10. Ports and Services
0. Back to Main Menu
1. Telnet
2. FTP
3. FTPS
4. HTTP
5. HTTPS
6. NTP
7. SSH
8. TFTP
9. DHCPD
10. DNS
11. IOCHECK PORT
12. Modbus TCP
13. Modbus UDP
14. PLC Runtime Services
11. SNMP
0. Back to Main Menu
1. General SNMP Configuration
2. SNMP v1/v2c Manager Configuration
3. SNMP v1/v2c Trap Receiver Configuration
4. SNMP v3 Configuration
5. SNMP firewalling
6. Secure SNMP firewalling
Manual
Version 1.4.0, valid from FW Version 03.05.10(17)
118 Commissioning WAGO-I/O-SYSTEM 750
750-8212 PFC200; G2; 2ETH RS
A description of the CBM menus and the respective parameters can be found in
the appendix in Section “Configuration Dialogs” > “Console-Based Management
(CBM)”.
Manual
Version 1.4.0, valid from FW Version 03.05.10(17)
WAGO-I/O-SYSTEM 750 Commissioning 119
750-8212 PFC200; G2; 2ETH RS
</dg_
You must select the correct COM port after starting “WAGO Ethernet Settings”.
In the “Communication settings” window that then opens, adapt the settings to
your needs.
Manual
Version 1.4.0, valid from FW Version 03.05.10(17)
120 Commissioning WAGO-I/O-SYSTEM 750
750-8212 PFC200; G2; 2ETH RS
Once you have configured “WAGO Ethernet Settings” and have clicked [Apply],
connection to the controller is established automatically.
If “WAGO Ethernet Settings” has already been started with the correct
parameters, you can establish connection to the controller by clicking [Read].
Manual
Version 1.4.0, valid from FW Version 03.05.10(17)
WAGO-I/O-SYSTEM 750 Commissioning 121
750-8212 PFC200; G2; 2ETH RS
Besides some fixed values — e.g., item No., MAC address and firmware version
— the currently used IP address and the configuration method are also shown
here.
Manual
Version 1.4.0, valid from FW Version 03.05.10(17)
122 Commissioning WAGO-I/O-SYSTEM 750
750-8212 PFC200; G2; 2ETH RS
Values can be changed in the “Input” column, while the parameters in use are
shown in the “Currently in use” column.
Address Source
Specify how the controller will determine its IP address: Static, via DHCP or via
BootP.
Time server
Specify the IP address for a time server if setting the controller's system time via
NTP.
Hostname
The host name of the controller is displayed here. In the controller's initial state,
this name is composed of the string “PFCx00” and the last three bytes of the
Manual
Version 1.4.0, valid from FW Version 03.05.10(17)
WAGO-I/O-SYSTEM 750 Commissioning 123
750-8212 PFC200; G2; 2ETH RS
MAC address.
This standard value is also used whenever the chosen name in the “Input”
column is deleted.
Domain name
The current domain name is displayed here. This setting can be automatically
overwritten with dynamic configurations, e.g., DHCP.
Manual
Version 1.4.0, valid from FW Version 03.05.10(17)
124 Commissioning WAGO-I/O-SYSTEM 750
750-8212 PFC200; G2; 2ETH RS
Manual
Version 1.4.0, valid from FW Version 03.05.10(17)
WAGO-I/O-SYSTEM 750 Commissioning 125
750-8212 PFC200; G2; 2ETH RS
Manual
Version 1.4.0, valid from FW Version 03.05.10(17)
126 Run-time System CODESYS 2.3 WAGO-I/O-SYSTEM 750
750-8212 PFC200; G2; 2ETH RS
Additional information
For a detailed description of the full range of functions, refer to the “Manual for
PLC Programming using CODESYS 2.3” manual available on the “WAGO-I/O-
PRO” (759-911) CD.
2. Open the selection box in the “Target system settings” window and select
the fieldbus controller you are using. In the example shown here this is the
PFC200 CS 2ETH RS “WAGO_750-8202”.
Manual
Version 1.4.0, valid from FW Version 03.05.10(17)
WAGO-I/O-SYSTEM 750 Run-time System CODESYS 2.3 127
750-8212 PFC200; G2; 2ETH RS
3. Click on [OK]. The “Target system settings” configuration window then
opens.
4. To accept the default configuration for the fieldbus controller click [OK].
The “New component” window opens.
Manual
Version 1.4.0, valid from FW Version 03.05.10(17)
128 Run-time System CODESYS 2.3 WAGO-I/O-SYSTEM 750
750-8212 PFC200; G2; 2ETH RS
5. In this “New component” window create a new program function block. In
the example shown here, the new function block “PLC_PRG” is created in
the “ST” programming language.
The PLC configuration is used to configure the fieldbus controller, along with the
connected I/O modules and to declare variables for accessing the inputs and
outputs of the I/O modules.
Manual
Version 1.4.0, valid from FW Version 03.05.10(17)
WAGO-I/O-SYSTEM 750 Run-time System CODESYS 2.3 129
750-8212 PFC200; G2; 2ETH RS
Manual
Version 1.4.0, valid from FW Version 03.05.10(17)
130 Run-time System CODESYS 2.3 WAGO-I/O-SYSTEM 750
750-8212 PFC200; G2; 2ETH RS
3. Right-click on the entry “K-Bus[FIX]” and then select “Edit” in the contextual
menu. The “configuration” dialog window then opens.
4. There are three options for accepting the topology for the I/O modules
connected to the fieldbus controller. The simplest way is to scan in the
topology using WAGO-I/O-CHECK.
To do this, click on the “Start WAGO-I/O-CHECK and scan” button.
Manual
Version 1.4.0, valid from FW Version 03.05.10(17)
WAGO-I/O-SYSTEM 750 Run-time System CODESYS 2.3 131
750-8212 PFC200; G2; 2ETH RS
5. WAGO-I/O-CHECK is started.
Manual
Version 1.4.0, valid from FW Version 03.05.10(17)
132 Run-time System CODESYS 2.3 WAGO-I/O-SYSTEM 750
750-8212 PFC200; G2; 2ETH RS
8. The detected I/O modules then appear in the configuration window.
9. You can use the [Add] button to add new I/O modules to manually define
or change the configuration.
Manual
Version 1.4.0, valid from FW Version 03.05.10(17)
WAGO-I/O-SYSTEM 750 Run-time System CODESYS 2.3 133
750-8212 PFC200; G2; 2ETH RS
10. You can select a module in the new “Module selection” window that then
appears.
11. You can change the position of an I/O module by marking it and then using
the arrow buttons at the right edge of the window to move it up or down.
Manual
Version 1.4.0, valid from FW Version 03.05.10(17)
134 Run-time System CODESYS 2.3 WAGO-I/O-SYSTEM 750
750-8212 PFC200; G2; 2ETH RS
13. To close the I/O Configurator, click [OK].
14. The individual inputs and outputs of the selected I/O module are displayed
in the right half of the configuration window.
Here, you can declare a dedicated variable in the “Name” column for each
input and output, e.g., “Output_1”, “Output_2”, “Input_1”, “Input_2”.
15. The added I/O modules appear in the control configuration under
“K-Bus[FIX]” with their associated fixed addresses and, where applicable,
their previously set variable name.
Figure 63: Control Configuration: I/O Modules with Their Associated Addresses
Manual
Version 1.4.0, valid from FW Version 03.05.10(17)
WAGO-I/O-SYSTEM 750 Run-time System CODESYS 2.3 135
750-8212 PFC200; G2; 2ETH RS
The following example illustrates the editing of the program function block. To do
this, an input is assigned to an output:
1. Press [F2] to open the Input assistant, or right click and select “Input
assistant” from the contextual menu.
Manual
Version 1.4.0, valid from FW Version 03.05.10(17)
136 Run-time System CODESYS 2.3 WAGO-I/O-SYSTEM 750
750-8212 PFC200; G2; 2ETH RS
4. Repeat Step 2 for the “Input_1” variable.
Manual
Version 1.4.0, valid from FW Version 03.05.10(17)
WAGO-I/O-SYSTEM 750 Run-time System CODESYS 2.3 137
750-8212 PFC200; G2; 2ETH RS
Proceed as follows:
Manual
Version 1.4.0, valid from FW Version 03.05.10(17)
138 Run-time System CODESYS 2.3 WAGO-I/O-SYSTEM 750
750-8212 PFC200; G2; 2ETH RS
3. In the “Name” field enter a designation for your fieldbus controller and then
click on “Tcp/Ip (Level 2 Route)”. Then click [OK].
5. Transfer the PLC program by clicking on Online in the menu bar and select
Login.
6. Ensure that the Run/Stop switch for the fieldbus controller is set to “Run”.
7. Start the PLC program by clicking on Online > Start in the menu bar.
Manual
Version 1.4.0, valid from FW Version 03.05.10(17)
WAGO-I/O-SYSTEM 750 Run-time System CODESYS 2.3 139
750-8212 PFC200; G2; 2ETH RS
If a PLC program is running in the fieldbus controller, a PLC task starts with the
reading of the fieldbus data (only with fieldbus controllers and fieldbus
connection), the integrated input and output data and the I/O modules. The
output data changed in the PLC program is updated after the PLC task is
processed. A change in operating mode (“Stop/Run”) is only carried out at the
end of a PLC task. The cycle time includes the time from the start of the PLC
program to the next start. If a larger loop is programmed within a PLC program,
the task time is prolonged accordingly. The inputs and outputs are updated
during processing. These updates only take place at the end of a PLC task.
Two examples:
Manual
Version 1.4.0, valid from FW Version 03.05.10(17)
140 Run-time System CODESYS 2.3 WAGO-I/O-SYSTEM 750
750-8212 PFC200; G2; 2ETH RS
Enter the character string of the absolute address without empty spaces. The first
bit of a word has an address of 0.
Watchdog
In an application program without task configuration, there is no watchdog that
monitors the cycle time of the application program (PLC_PRG).
Manual
Version 1.4.0, valid from FW Version 03.05.10(17)
WAGO-I/O-SYSTEM 750 Run-time System CODESYS 2.3 141
750-8212 PFC200; G2; 2ETH RS
3. To assign a new name to the task (e.g. PLC_Prog), click on “New Task”.
Then select the type of task. In this example, this is the “cyclic” type.
Manual
Version 1.4.0, valid from FW Version 03.05.10(17)
142 Run-time System CODESYS 2.3 WAGO-I/O-SYSTEM 750
750-8212 PFC200; G2; 2ETH RS
4. Add the program module PLC_PRG that you have just created (see
Section “Editing the Program Modules”). To do this, right-clock on the
“Clock” symbol and in the contextual menu select “Attach program call-up”.
Then, click the [...] button and [OK].
5. Compile the example program by selecting Project > Rebuild all in the
context menu.
Manual
Version 1.4.0, valid from FW Version 03.05.10(17)
WAGO-I/O-SYSTEM 750 Run-time System CODESYS 2.3 143
750-8212 PFC200; G2; 2ETH RS
Priority 0 … 5:
Important arithmetic operations and synchronized access to I/O module process
images are to be carried out as tasks with the highest priorities 0 … 5. These
tasks are processed fully according to priority and correspond to Linux® RT
priorities
-79 through -74.
Priority 6 … 20:
Real-time access, such as access to ETHERNET and the file system, to fieldbus
data and to the RS-232 interface (when available) are to be carried out as tasks
with average priorities 6 … 20. These tasks are processed fully according to
priority and correspond to Linux® RT priorities -40 through -26.
Priority 21 … 31:
Applications such as long-lasting arithmetic operations and non-real-time-
relevant access to ETHERNET and the file system, to fieldbus data and the RS-
232 interface (when provided) are to be carried out as tasks with the lowest
priorities 21 … 31. No prioritiy distinction is made between tasks of priorities 21
Manual
Version 1.4.0, valid from FW Version 03.05.10(17)
144 Run-time System CODESYS 2.3 WAGO-I/O-SYSTEM 750
750-8212 PFC200; G2; 2ETH RS
… 31. These tasks all receive the same computing time from the operating
system (“Completely Fair Scheduler” procedure).
Manual
Version 1.4.0, valid from FW Version 03.05.10(17)
WAGO-I/O-SYSTEM 750 Run-time System CODESYS 2.3 145
750-8212 PFC200; G2; 2ETH RS
Provided that a task is not located on a breakpoint, RUN and STOP from the user
interface (IDE) and from the mode selector switch (BAS) always have an effect
on all tasks (case 1 and case 2).
Manual
Version 1.4.0, valid from FW Version 03.05.10(17)
146 Run-time System CODESYS 2.3 WAGO-I/O-SYSTEM 750
750-8212 PFC200; G2; 2ETH RS
If the mode selector switch and the STOP function of the user interface are used
simultaneously, the mode selector switch has priority (case 3 and case 4).
Manual
Version 1.4.0, valid from FW Version 03.05.10(17)
WAGO-I/O-SYSTEM 750 Run-time System CODESYS 2.3 147
750-8212 PFC200; G2; 2ETH RS
As soon as a task is located at a breakpoint, only all other tasks can be controlled
with the mode selector switch.
Exception: If the mode selector switch is on STOP, the debug task is also no
longer processed.
Manual
Version 1.4.0, valid from FW Version 03.05.10(17)
148 Run-time System CODESYS 2.3 WAGO-I/O-SYSTEM 750
750-8212 PFC200; G2; 2ETH RS
If a task is at a breakpoint and the connection to the IDE is broken (e.g., by
logging out), all breakpoints are deleted.
The debug task stays at the current position until the next time the mode selector
switch is switched from STOP to RUN. In this case, the task continues to run
from the current position (case 7).
Manual
Version 1.4.0, valid from FW Version 03.05.10(17)
WAGO-I/O-SYSTEM 750 Run-time System CODESYS 2.3 149
750-8212 PFC200; G2; 2ETH RS
To activate events and define a program to be called up, open the window “Task
configuration” in the “Resources” tab in the CODESYS development
environment.
Manual
Version 1.4.0, valid from FW Version 03.05.10(17)
150 Run-time System CODESYS 2.3 WAGO-I/O-SYSTEM 750
750-8212 PFC200; G2; 2ETH RS
The following events can be activated:
Manual
Version 1.4.0, valid from FW Version 03.05.10(17)
WAGO-I/O-SYSTEM 750 Run-time System CODESYS 2.3 151
750-8212 PFC200; G2; 2ETH RS
A new function having the defined name then appears in the “Function blocks”
tab.
Manual
Version 1.4.0, valid from FW Version 03.05.10(17)
152 Run-time System CODESYS 2.3 WAGO-I/O-SYSTEM 750
750-8212 PFC200; G2; 2ETH RS
Handling for the event that has occurred is now programmed in this new function.
The newly created project is now supported and can be loaded to the controller.
After startup, the value of the “Events” variable changes only when counter “i”
reaches the value 0, meaning that division by 0 has been performed.
Manual
Version 1.4.0, valid from FW Version 03.05.10(17)
WAGO-I/O-SYSTEM 750 Run-time System CODESYS 2.3 153
750-8212 PFC200; G2; 2ETH RS
Figure 88: CODESYS – Variable Contents After Division by “0” and Call-up of the Event Handler
Manual
Version 1.4.0, valid from FW Version 03.05.10(17)
154 Run-time System CODESYS 2.3 WAGO-I/O-SYSTEM 750
750-8212 PFC200; G2; 2ETH RS
Manual
Version 1.4.0, valid from FW Version 03.05.10(17)
WAGO-I/O-SYSTEM 750 Run-time System CODESYS 2.3 155
750-8212 PFC200; G2; 2ETH RS
The size and structure of the process image for the I/O modules connected to the
system are described in the appendix.
Manual
Version 1.4.0, valid from FW Version 03.05.10(17)
156 Run-time System CODESYS 2.3 WAGO-I/O-SYSTEM 750
750-8212 PFC200; G2; 2ETH RS
No direct access from fieldbus to the process image for I/O modules!
Any data that is required from the I/O module process image must be explicitly
mapped in the CODESYS program to the data in the fieldbus process image and
vice versa! Direct access is not possible!
Table 45: Access to the Process Images of the Input and Output Data – Local Bus
Memory Area Description Access Logical Address Space
via PLC
Local bus input Map of the local input modules Read Word %IW0 to %IW999
process image (I/O module 1 to 64*) in the RAM
Byte %IB0 to %IB1999
Local bus output Map of the local output modules Read/ Word %QW0 to %QW999
process image (I/O module 1 to 64*) in the RAM Write
Byte %QB0 to %QB1999
* The use of up to 250 I/O modules is possible with the WAGO local bus extension modules.
Manual
Version 1.4.0, valid from FW Version 03.05.10(17)
WAGO-I/O-SYSTEM 750 Run-time System CODESYS 2.3 157
750-8212 PFC200; G2; 2ETH RS
Table 46: Access to the Process Images of the Input and Output Data – Modbus
Memory area Description Access via Logical Address Space
PLC
Word
Modbus input variables, %IW1000 to %IW1999
Read
addressed by word via Modbus Byte
Modbus input
%IB2000 to %IB3999
process image
Bit
Modbus input variables,
Read %IX1000.0 …%IX1000.15 to
addressed by bit via Modbus
%IX1384.0 … %IX1384.15
Word
Modbus output variables, Read/ %QW1000 to %QW1999
addressed by word via Modbus Write Byte
Modbus output %QB2000 to %QB3999
process image Bit
Modbus output variables, Read/ %QX1000.0 …
addressed by bit via Modbus Write %QX1000.15 to %QX1384.0
… %QX1384.15
Table 47: Access to the Process Images of the Input and Output Data – Flags
Memory Area Description Access via Logical Address Space
PLC
Total of 128 kB remanent Read/ %MW0 to
memory (65536 words). Write %MW65535
104 kB addressed by word via Read/ Word (Modbus)
Modbus (53248 words) Write %MW0 to %MW3327
Flag variables
Bit (Modbus)
6.5 kB addressed by bit via Read/ %MX0.0 … %MX0.15 to
Modbus (3328 words). Write %MX3327.0 …
%MX3327.15
Retain memory addressed by Read/ -
Retain variables
symbols in the NVRAM: 128 kB Write
* The use of up to 250 I/O modules is possible with the WAGO local bus extension modules.
The total size of the memory for flag and retain variables is 128 kB (131060
bytes). The size of these two sections can be customized as required, provided
the total (permissible) size is not exceeded.
If you are using bit-oriented addressing, remember that the basic address is
word-based. The bits are addressed from 0 to 15.
Table 48: Arrangement of the I/O Modules for the Addressing Example
Fieldbus controller 750- 750- 750- 750- 750- 750- 750- 750-
400 554 402 504 454 650 468 600
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
Manual
Version 1.4.0, valid from FW Version 03.05.10(17)
158 Run-time System CODESYS 2.3 WAGO-I/O-SYSTEM 750
750-8212 PFC200; G2; 2ETH RS
Type C*
2DI, 24 V, 3 ms:
1 %IX8.0 1. Digital input module with a data width of 2
bits. As the analog input modules already
750-400
occupy the first 8 words of the input process
2 %IX8.1 image, the 2 bits occupy the lowest-value bits
of the 8th word.
2AO, 4 – 20 mA:
1 %QW0
1. Analog output module with a data width of 2
750-554
words. This module occupies the first 2 words
2 %QW1
in the output process image.
1 %IX8.2 4DI, 24 V:
2. Digital input module with a data width of 4
2 %IX8.3
750-402 bits. These are added to the 2 bits of the 750-
3 %IX8.4 400 module and stored in the 8th word of the
4 %IX8.5 input process image.
1 %QX4.0 4DO, 24 V:
1. Digital output module with a data width of 4
2 %QX4.1 bits. As the analog output module already
750-504 occupies the first 4 words of the output
3 %QX4.2 process image, the 4 bits occupy the lowest-
value bits of the 4th word.
4 %QX4.3
2AI, 4 – 20 mA:
1 %IW0
1. Analog input module with a data width of 2
750-454
words. This module occupies the first 2 words
2 %IW1
in the input process image.
%IW2 RS-232, C 9600/8/N/1:
%IW3 The serial interface module is an analog input
750-650 1 and output module, which displays 2 words
%QW2 both in the input process image and in the
%QW3 output process image.
Manual
Version 1.4.0, valid from FW Version 03.05.10(17)
WAGO-I/O-SYSTEM 750 Run-time System CODESYS 2.3 159
750-8212 PFC200; G2; 2ETH RS
In this section, CODESYS task denotes only tasks within CODESYS that contain
an access to the local bus. Tasks that do not access the local bus are not
synchronized in the same way as described below. For this, see section
“Creating Tasks.”
9.9.1 Case 1: CODESYS Task Interval Set Smaller than the Local
Bus Cycle
Execution of the CODESYS tasks is synchronized with the local bus cycle time.
The CODESYS task is processed in parallel to the local bus cycle. The
CODESYS task interval is extended to the local bus cycle time. This is necessary
so that each CODESYS task is started with new input data from the local bus and
the output values are also set at the module after each CODESYS task.
Example:
CODESYS task interval (CTI): 100 µs
Local bus cycle (LBZ): 2000 µs
Result: Matching of the CODESYS task interval to the local bus cycle of 2000
µs.
Manual
Version 1.4.0, valid from FW Version 03.05.10(17)
160 Run-time System CODESYS 2.3 WAGO-I/O-SYSTEM 750
750-8212 PFC200; G2; 2ETH RS
At the end of the CODESYS task, the local bus cycle starts, which is processed
synchronously with the fastest CODESYS task. This ensures that when starting
each CODESYS Task, current input data are available from the local bus and the
output values of each CODESYS task are also output to the I/O modules.
Example:
CODESYS task interval (CTI): 2500 µs
Local bus cycle (LBZ): 2000 µs
Result: Execution of the local bus cycle every 2500 µs.
Manual
Version 1.4.0, valid from FW Version 03.05.10(17)
WAGO-I/O-SYSTEM 750 Run-time System CODESYS 2.3 161
750-8212 PFC200; G2; 2ETH RS
Prior to processing the CODESYS task, the local bus cycle is executed, which
provides the current input data for the CODESYS task. After execution of the
CODESYS task, an additional local bus cycle is started, which provides the
output data to the I/O modules.
This ensures that at the start of every CODESYS task, current input data are
available from the local bus and the output data from each CODESYS task are
quickly output to the I/O modules. This prevents processing of local bus cycles
that would unnecessarily use a great deal of computing time on the CPU.
Example:
CODESYS task interval (CTI): 5000 µs
Local bus cycle (LBZ): 2000 µs
Result: Execution of the local bus cycle 2000 µs prior to the CODESYS task and
once directly after the CODESYS task.
Manual
Version 1.4.0, valid from FW Version 03.05.10(17)
162 Run-time System CODESYS 2.3 WAGO-I/O-SYSTEM 750
750-8212 PFC200; G2; 2ETH RS
The I/O data from the local bus are refreshed once before the CODESYS task
and once after the CODESYS task and an additional local bus cycle is also
executed every 10 ms.
Example:
CODESYS task interval (CTI): 150000 µs
Local bus cycle (LBZ): 2000 µs
Result: Execution of the local bus cycle 2000 µs prior to the CODESYS task,
once directly after the CODESYS task and 10 ms after the previous local bus
cycle.
Manual
Version 1.4.0, valid from FW Version 03.05.10(17)
WAGO-I/O-SYSTEM 750 Run-time System CODESYS 2.3 163
750-8212 PFC200; G2; 2ETH RS
Manual
Version 1.4.0, valid from FW Version 03.05.10(17)
164 Run-time System CODESYS 2.3 WAGO-I/O-SYSTEM 750
750-8212 PFC200; G2; 2ETH RS
Table 50: Local Bus (KBus) Settings
Parameter Explanation
The update mode is used to configure how the local bus process
data is to be updated (refreshed).
In the asynchronous update mode process data
Asynchronous
Update mode are refreshed in cycles at a definable interval.
In the synchronous update mode the process
Synchronous* data are synchronized with the most rapid
CODESYS task that accesses the local bus.
The update interval for the local bus is set by the cycle time. This
setting is effective only in the asynchronous mode.
KBus cycle
1000 µs Minimum value 1 millisecond
time *
10000 µs Default value 10 milliseconds
50000 µs Maximum value 50 milliseconds
This value indicates the priority for the local bus thread. This
setting is effective only in the asynchronous mode.
KBus thread This priority is equivalent to the priority of the cyclic CODESYS
priority tasks (see section “Cyclic Tasks”).
0* Highest priority
15 Lowest priority
PLC stop Specifies the response of the local bus outputs when the PLC
behavior application stops.
Hold last value The output states are retained.
Set to zero* Outputs are set to zero.
*
Default setting
In the synchronous update mode the runtime behavior of CODESYS tasks can
be influenced by the local bus. The minimum task interval that can then be
Manual
Version 1.4.0, valid from FW Version 03.05.10(17)
WAGO-I/O-SYSTEM 750 Run-time System CODESYS 2.3 165
750-8212 PFC200; G2; 2ETH RS
achieved depends on the duration of a local bus cycle. The duration of a local
bus cycle, on the other hand, is based on the I/O modules connected to the bus.
As a rule of thumb: The shorter the local bus structure, the shorter the cycle time
and digital modules are faster than analog or complex ones.
In the event of a local bus error, the CODESYS tasks are blocked until the error
is rectified, i.e., when a local bus cycle has been successfully executed again.
No call-up of local bus status when local bus errors are present!
If a local bus error has occurred, it is not possible to call up the bus status using
KBUS_ERROR_INFORMATION (mod_com.lib) while in the synchronous update
mode.
Manual
Version 1.4.0, valid from FW Version 03.05.10(17)
166 Run-time System CODESYS 2.3 WAGO-I/O-SYSTEM 750
750-8212 PFC200; G2; 2ETH RS
Manual
Version 1.4.0, valid from FW Version 03.05.10(17)
WAGO-I/O-SYSTEM 750 Run-time System CODESYS 2.3 167
750-8212 PFC200; G2; 2ETH RS
This set value has already been requested in the system after a successful
program download and can be fully utilized.
Together with the data memory to be used by the application, memory is required
for the individual program function blocks in the system.
The size of the administration space is calculated from the function block
limitation * 12 (i.e., normally 4096 * 12).
The actual size of the main memory required in the system for data is the sum of
global data memory and function block limitation memory.
This value should not exceed the value specified for “Size of entire data
memory.”
Manual
Version 1.4.0, valid from FW Version 03.05.10(17)
168 Run-time System CODESYS 2.3 WAGO-I/O-SYSTEM 750
750-8212 PFC200; G2; 2ETH RS
The remanent section is subdivided into the flag area (memory) and the retain
area.
The breakdown of the flag and retain variables can be customized as required.
Manual
Version 1.4.0, valid from FW Version 03.05.10(17)
WAGO-I/O-SYSTEM 750 Run-time System CODESYS 2.3 169
750-8212 PFC200; G2; 2ETH RS
The “Update unused I/Os” box can be checked for initial startup. Enabling this
results in a higher CPU load and possibly a significant effect on task processing.
</dg_
You create all visualization types (HMI and Web visualization) with the same
CODESYS graphic editor. Select the visualization type in the “Target system
settings” window. A description file in XML format is generated from the
information for each of these pages. You can find these files in the subfolder
“visu” of the CODESYS installation path. The HTML home page “webvisu.htm”
and the Java archive “webvisu.jar” in the applet (webvisu.class) are also saved
there in a compressed format.
Once you have selected a visualization type, the following steps must be
performed to execute the technique:
1. Click the “Resources” tab and open the “Target system settings.” Specify
whether you wish to have visualization displayed as a “Web visualization”
using a web browser.
Manual
Version 1.4.0, valid from FW Version 03.05.10(17)
170 Run-time System CODESYS 2.3 WAGO-I/O-SYSTEM 750
750-8212 PFC200; G2; 2ETH RS
Figure 101: Selecting the Visualization Technique in the Target System Settings
Manual
Version 1.4.0, valid from FW Version 03.05.10(17)
WAGO-I/O-SYSTEM 750 Run-time System CODESYS 2.3 171
750-8212 PFC200; G2; 2ETH RS
2. Generate a start page for the visualization. Right-click the “Visualization”
folder in the “Visualization” tab. Select Add object ... from the contextual
menu. The “New visualization” dialog box opens.
3. In the “New visualization” dialog window, enter the name PLC_VISU for the
start visualization. This page is then displayed as the start page upon
system startup.
4. Activate the CODESYS Web server in the WBM on the “Ports and Services
– CODESYS Services” page in the “CODESYS Webserver” group.
5. Activate the http service in the WBM on the “Ports and Services – Network
Services” page in the “HTTP” group.
If you transfer the PLC program to the controller (Online > Login) and start the
program (Online > Start), enter one of the following lines in the address line of
the web browser for online visualization:
You can also have Web visualization displayed via the WBM (see Section
“`CODESYS - WebVisu´” Page).
Manual
Version 1.4.0, valid from FW Version 03.05.10(17)
172 Run-time System CODESYS 2.3 WAGO-I/O-SYSTEM 750
750-8212 PFC200; G2; 2ETH RS
The overall size of the PLC program, visualization files, bitmaps, log files,
configuration files, etc. must fit into the file system.
Web visualization uses its own protocol for exchanging process data between
applet and control.
The controller transfers process data with ASCII coding. The pipe symbol (“|”) is
used to separate two process values. Therefore, the space requirement for a
process data variable in the process data memory is dependent not only on the
data type, but also on the process value itself. Thus, a variable of the “WORD”
type occupies between one byte for the values 0 through 9 and five bytes for
values from 10000 and greater. The selected format (ASCII + |) only permits a
rough estimate of the space requirement for the individual process data in the
process data buffer. If the size of the ASCII coded process data is exceeded,
Web visualization no longer works as expected.
The controller is based on a real-time operating system. This means that high-
priority processes (e.g., PLC program) interrupt or block lower priority processes.
The Web server responsible for Web visualization is among these lower priority
processes.
Manual
Version 1.4.0, valid from FW Version 03.05.10(17)
WAGO-I/O-SYSTEM 750 Run-time System CODESYS 2.3 173
750-8212 PFC200; G2; 2ETH RS
Processor Time
Make sure when configuring tasks, that there is sufficient processor time
available for all processes.
Network Load
The controller's CPU processes both the PLC program and network traffic.
ETHERNET communication demands that each received telegram is processed,
regardless of whether it is intended for the controller or not.
Manual
Version 1.4.0, valid from FW Version 03.05.10(17)
174 Run-time System CODESYS 2.3 WAGO-I/O-SYSTEM 750
750-8212 PFC200; G2; 2ETH RS
Manual
Version 1.4.0, valid from FW Version 03.05.10(17)
WAGO-I/O-SYSTEM 750 Run-time System CODESYS 2.3 175
750-8212 PFC200; G2; 2ETH RS
In order to optimize the Web visualization for display on a device with a fixed
resolution, proceed as follows:
In the “Target system settings”, enter the pixel width and height in the tab
“Visualization”. When the visualization is created, the visible area is highlighted in
gray. However, the actual pixel width and height of the Web visualization is
defined by the attributes “Height” and “Width” of the HTML APPLET tag in the
“webvisu.htm” file. Do not forget to also adapt these parameters to the existing
resolution.
This depends on the situation. After a standard installation, the cache is enabled.
If the cache is enabled, the JRE uses it to store applets and Java archives. If the
Web visualization is called up a second time, it requires considerably less time to
start because the applet (approx. 250 kb) does not need to be reloaded via the
network, but is already available in the cache. This is especially useful when
network connections are slow.
Note:
The Java archives may not be completely transferred into the cache due to
network failures. In this case, the cache must be cleared manually or disabled.
Manual
Version 1.4.0, valid from FW Version 03.05.10(17)
176 Run-time System CODESYS 2.3 WAGO-I/O-SYSTEM 750
750-8212 PFC200; G2; 2ETH RS
Why does the visualization element “TREND” in the Web visualization only
work “Online”?
The following settings must be selected for visualization projects: Resources tab
> Target system settings.
Activate “Web visualization” and “Trend data recording within control”. Otherwise,
the trend data is stored on the hard drive of the CODESYS development PC.
This makes a permanent connection between the controller and the CODESYS
gateway necessary. If this connection is interrupted, this may lead to the
controller behaving unpredictably.
In the TREND configuration dialog, you can choose between “Online” and
“History” operating modes. The controller only supports the “Online” operating
mode for visualization projects since it is not possible to configure the maximum
size (quota) of the trend files (*.trd). Uncontrolled expansion of trend files can
lead to unpredictable controller behavior.
In most cases, the use of the “HISTOGRAM” visualization element is the better
choice, as this gives full control over the time and number of measurements and
thus the amount of memory required.
The status of this component is best described as “Add-On”, i.e., an extra that is
free of charge and not warrantied.
The following settings must be selected for visualization projects: Resources tab
> Target system settings.
Activate “Web visualization” (checkmark) and “Alarm handling within control”.
Otherwise, the alarm data is processed on the CODESYS development PC. This
makes a permanent connection between the controller and the CODESYS
gateway necessary. If this connection is interrupted, this may lead to the
controller behaving unpredictably.
Manual
Version 1.4.0, valid from FW Version 03.05.10(17)
WAGO-I/O-SYSTEM 750 e!RUNTIME Runtime Environment 177
750-8212 PFC200; G2; 2ETH RS
Additional Information
Information on the installation and startup of e!COCKPIT is provided in the
corresponding manual.
Information on programming is provided in the CODESYS 3 documentation.
Manual
Version 1.4.0, valid from FW Version 03.05.10(17)
178 e!RUNTIME Runtime Environment WAGO-I/O-SYSTEM 750
750-8212 PFC200; G2; 2ETH RS
Manual
Version 1.4.0, valid from FW Version 03.05.10(17)
WAGO-I/O-SYSTEM 750 e!RUNTIME Runtime Environment 179
750-8212 PFC200; G2; 2ETH RS
The size of the administration space is calculated from the function block
limitation * 12 (i.e., 4096 Byte * 12).
The actual size of the main memory required in the system for data is the sum of
global program and data memory and function block limitation memory.
Manual
Version 1.4.0, valid from FW Version 03.05.10(17)
180 Modbus – CODESYS V2 WAGO-I/O-SYSTEM 750
750-8212 PFC200; G2; 2ETH RS
11 Modbus – CODESYS V2
</dg_
11.1 General
Modbus is a non-vendor-specific, open fieldbus standard for a wide range of
applications in production and process automation. The Modbus communications
protocol is based on a master/slave or client/server architecture that uses
function codes for execution of individual Modbus services, which have reading
or writing access to individual or multiple elements of the Modbus data model
simultaneously.
11.2 Features
The Modbus slave implemented in the PFC200 has the following features:
• 3 modes: Modbus TCP, Modbus UDP and Modbus RTU, which can be run
independently of one another simultaneously
• Data exchange via 1000 registers in each of the local Modbus process
images
Manual
Version 1.4.0, valid from FW Version 03.05.10(17)
WAGO-I/O-SYSTEM 750 Modbus – CODESYS V2 181
750-8212 PFC200; G2; 2ETH RS
11.3 Configuration
All of the Modbus operating modes are configured using the CODESYS PLC
configuration.
• Modbus settings,
Manual
Version 1.4.0, valid from FW Version 03.05.10(17)
182 Modbus – CODESYS V2 WAGO-I/O-SYSTEM 750
750-8212 PFC200; G2; 2ETH RS
Manual
Version 1.4.0, valid from FW Version 03.05.10(17)
WAGO-I/O-SYSTEM 750 Modbus – CODESYS V2 183
750-8212 PFC200; G2; 2ETH RS
Manual
Version 1.4.0, valid from FW Version 03.05.10(17)
184 Modbus – CODESYS V2 WAGO-I/O-SYSTEM 750
750-8212 PFC200; G2; 2ETH RS
Table 56: Modbus RTU Settings
Parameters Explanation
RTU mode Enable for the Modbus RTU mode
Off* Operation not permitted
Active Operation possible
Device ID Device ID (device address) for the tty device
1* min. device ID
247 max. device ID
Maximum Response timeout for a request in [ms]
response time 2000 min. response time = 2 seconds. If this value is
set lower than 2 seconds, it will be corrected
internally to 2 seconds.
*
5000 Default = 5 seconds
4294967295 max. response time > 71 hours.
Interface Device name
“dev/…” Name of the tty in the string
“dev/ttyO0” *
Standard tty
Baud rate Communication baud rate
1200 baud 1200 baud min. transmission speed
2400 baud 2400 baud
4800 baud 4800 baud
9600 baud 9600 baud
19200 baud 19200 baud
38400 baud 38400 baud
57600 baud 57600 baud
*
115200 baud 115200 baud, max. transmission speed
Stop bits Number of stop bits
1 stop bit* 1 stop bit in the frame; must be used when even
or odd parity has been selected.
2 stop bits 2 stop bits in the frame; must be used when
“None” has been selected for parity.
Parity Parity check
None No parity check performed; 2 stop bits must be
selected in the configuration for this setting.
*
Even Even parity
Odd Odd parity
Manual
Version 1.4.0, valid from FW Version 03.05.10(17)
WAGO-I/O-SYSTEM 750 Modbus – CODESYS V2 185
750-8212 PFC200; G2; 2ETH RS
Table 56: Modbus RTU Settings
Parameters Explanation
Flow control Data flow control (Supported only for the setting “RS-232” for the
physical interface.)
None* No data flow control
RTS/CTS Hardware flow control
Physical Mode for the physical interface
interface RS-232* RS-232 is used as the physical interface.
RS-485 RS-485 is used as the physical interface.
*
Default setting
Manual
Version 1.4.0, valid from FW Version 03.05.10(17)
186 Modbus – CODESYS V2 WAGO-I/O-SYSTEM 750
750-8212 PFC200; G2; 2ETH RS
</dg_
• Modbus input process image (Modbus Input) – is an area in the PIO (PIO
= Output Process Image), in which data from the PLC is provided in cycles
exclusively for Modbus Read services.
• Modbus flag area – is an area, in which both Modbus Read and Write
services can be executed.
Manual
Version 1.4.0, valid from FW Version 03.05.10(17)
WAGO-I/O-SYSTEM 750 Modbus – CODESYS V2 187
750-8212 PFC200; G2; 2ETH RS
As no direct access to the I/O modules is provided by the fieldbus, data can be
exchanged via this interface between the PLC and Modbus for processing in the
control system (PLC). Using this data in the individual I/O modules connected to
the PLC can then be performed by the application.
Manual
Version 1.4.0, valid from FW Version 03.05.10(17)
188 Modbus – CODESYS V2 WAGO-I/O-SYSTEM 750
750-8212 PFC200; G2; 2ETH RS
The figure shows the maximum addressable flag area with a size of 104 kB.
The actual addressable flag area depends on the current memory arrangement in
the target system settings in CODESYS.
The default setting is 24 kB.
Manual
Version 1.4.0, valid from FW Version 03.05.10(17)
WAGO-I/O-SYSTEM 750 Modbus – CODESYS V2 189
750-8212 PFC200; G2; 2ETH RS
The Modbus address area reserved for these registers ranging from the Modbus
starting address of 4096 (0x1000) up to the Modbus end address of 12287
(0x2FFF), without any allocation to the IEC 61131 address area. These registers
can be queried using the register read services FC3, FC4 and FC23 and with the
register write services FC6, FC16 and FC23. A detailed description of the
individual registers is given in the section “WAGO Modbus Registers”.
The table below outlines the mapping for the Modbus-reading, bit-oriented
services:
Table 57: Modbus Mapping for Read Bit Services FC1, FC2
Modbus Address IEC 61131 Description
(hexadecimal values Address
in parentheses)
0 … 6143 %IX1000.0 … Modbus Output:
(0x0000 … 0x17FF) %IX1383.15 6144 PFC input bit variables in the first
384 registers/words (768 bytes) of the
2kB Modbus output process image in the
PII.
Note: In this area, the read bit services
return the content from the bit-addressed
PII.
6144 … 12287 %QX1000.0 … Modbus Input:
(0x1800 … 0x2FFF) %QX1383.15 6144 PFC output bit variables in the first
384 registers/words (768 bytes) of the 2
kB Modbus-input process image in the
PIO.
12288 … 65535 %MX0.0 … Maximum bit-addressable flag area:
(0x3000 … 0xFFFF) %MX3327.15 53248 bit flags (6.5 kB);
the actual addressable flag area
depends on the current memory
arrangement in CODESYS.
Manual
Version 1.4.0, valid from FW Version 03.05.10(17)
190 Modbus – CODESYS V2 WAGO-I/O-SYSTEM 750
750-8212 PFC200; G2; 2ETH RS
The table below outlines the mapping for the Modbus-writing, bit-oriented
services:
Table 58: Modbus Mapping for Write Bit Services FC5, FC15
Modbus Address IEC 61131 Description
(hexadecimal values Address
in parentheses)
0 … 6143 %IX1000.0 … Modbus Output:
(0x0000 … 0x17FF) %IX1383.15 6144 PFC input bit variables in the first
384 registers/words (768 bytes) of the
2kB Modbus output process image in the
PII.
6144 … 12287 %QX1000.0 … Modbus Output:
(0x1800 … 0x2FFF) %QX1383.15 Modbus-only area for bit-oriented write
access.
Bit-based write services for this area are
acknowledged by the Modbus slave with
the Modbus exception code “ILLEGAL
DATA ADDRESS” (0x02).
12288 … 65535 %MX0.0 … Maximum bit-addressable flag area:
(0x3000 … 0xFFFF) %MX3327.15 53248 bit flags (6.5 kB);
the actual addressable flag area
depends on the current memory
arrangement in CODESYS.
Manual
Version 1.4.0, valid from FW Version 03.05.10(17)
WAGO-I/O-SYSTEM 750 Modbus – CODESYS V2 191
750-8212 PFC200; G2; 2ETH RS
11.4.4.3 Modbus Mapping for Read Register Services FC3, FC4, FC23
The table below outlines the mapping for the Modbus-reading, register-oriented
services:
Table 59: Modbus Mapping for Read Register Services FC3, FC4, FC23
Modbus Address IEC 61131 Description
(hexadecimal values Address
in parentheses)
0 … 999 %IW1000 … Modbus Output:
(0x0000 … 0x03E7) %IW1999 1000 PFC input registers/words in the
2 kB Modbus output process image in
the PII.
Note: In this area, the read register
services return the content from the PII.
1000 … 1999 %QW1000 … Modbus Input:
(0x03E8 … 0x07CF) %QW1999 1000 PFC output registers/words in the
2 kB Modbus input process image in the
PIO.
Note on FC23:
Only the Read portion of this service can
be executed.
2000 … 4095 Inhibited to Modbus-only area for
(0x07D0 … 0x0FFF) register-oriented read access. Register-
based read services for this area are
acknowledged by the Modbus slave with
the Modbus exception code “ILLEGAL
DATA ADDRESS” (0x02).
4096 … 12287 No IEC 61131 Information and configuration registers:
(0x1000 … 0x2FFF) address Not all Modbus addresses in this range
are valid.
Valid Modbus addresses are described
in the Section “WAGO Modbus
Registers”.
Access to invalid addresses are
acknowledged by the Modbus slave with
the Modbus exception code “ILLEGAL
DATA ADDRESS” (0x02).
Note on FC23:
The Write portion of this service can only
be executed for registers that data can
be written to.
Manual
Version 1.4.0, valid from FW Version 03.05.10(17)
192 Modbus – CODESYS V2 WAGO-I/O-SYSTEM 750
750-8212 PFC200; G2; 2ETH RS
Table 59: Modbus Mapping for Read Register Services FC3, FC4, FC23
Modbus Address IEC 61131 Description
(hexadecimal values Address
in parentheses)
12288 … 65535 %MW0 … Maximum addressable flag area:
(0x3000 … 0xFFFF) %MW53247 53248 register/word flags (104 kB);
the actual addressable flag area
depends on the current memory
arrangement in CODESYS.
Manual
Version 1.4.0, valid from FW Version 03.05.10(17)
WAGO-I/O-SYSTEM 750 Modbus – CODESYS V2 193
750-8212 PFC200; G2; 2ETH RS
11.4.4.4 Modbus Mapping for Write Register Services FC6, FC16, FC22, FC23
• FC22 – Mask Write Register, not for information and configuration registers
Table 60: Modbus Mapping for Write Register Services FC6, FC16, FC22, FC23
Modbus Address IEC 61131 Description
(hexadecimal values Address
in parentheses)
0 … 999 %IW1000 … Modbus Output:
(0x0000 … 0x03E7) %IW1999 1000 PFC input registers/words in the
2 kB Modbus output process image in
the PII.
1000 … 1999 No access to: Modbus Output:
(0x03E8 … 0x07CF) %QW1000 … Inhibited Modbus area for register-
%QW1999 oriented write access.
Manual
Version 1.4.0, valid from FW Version 03.05.10(17)
194 Modbus – CODESYS V2 WAGO-I/O-SYSTEM 750
750-8212 PFC200; G2; 2ETH RS
Table 60: Modbus Mapping for Write Register Services FC6, FC16, FC22, FC23
Modbus Address IEC 61131 Description
(hexadecimal values Address
in parentheses)
12288 … 65535 %MW0 … Maximum addressable flag area:
(0x3000 … 0xFFFF) %MW53247 53248 register/word flags (104 kB);
the actual addressable flag area
depends on the current memory
arrangement in CODESYS.
Manual
Version 1.4.0, valid from FW Version 03.05.10(17)
WAGO-I/O-SYSTEM 750 Modbus – CODESYS V2 195
750-8212 PFC200; G2; 2ETH RS
Manual
Version 1.4.0, valid from FW Version 03.05.10(17)
196 Modbus – CODESYS V2 WAGO-I/O-SYSTEM 750
750-8212 PFC200; G2; 2ETH RS
Table 61: WAGO Modbus Registers
Modbus Address Data Length
Access Description
Dec. Hex. in Words
8197 0x2005 1 ro 0x7FFF (constant)
8198 0x2006 1 ro 0x8000 (constant)
8199 0x2007 1 ro 0x3FFF (constant)
8200 0x2008 1 ro 0x4000 (constant)
The WAGO Modbus registers are described in more details in the following
sections.
This register contains the number of registers available in the Modbus input
process image (Modbus input).
This register contains the number of registers available in the Modbus output
process image (Modbus output).
11.5.1.3 Register 0x1024 – Number of Bits in the Modbus Input Process Image
This register contains the number of bits available in the Modbus input process
image (Modbus input).
This register contains the number of bits available in the Modbus output process
image (Modbus output).
Manual
Version 1.4.0, valid from FW Version 03.05.10(17)
WAGO-I/O-SYSTEM 750 Modbus – CODESYS V2 197
750-8212 PFC200; G2; 2ETH RS
1 = BootP
2 = DHCP
4 = Fixed IP address
This register contains the timeout value for the TCP sockets.
This value is given in units of 100ms (ticks). A new value is accepted only for new
connections which have not yet been established. In the event of any changes,
the already established connections will continue to operate using the previously
set timeout value.
This register provides the MAC address for the first ETHERNET interface (eth0).
MAC may also provide a partial result.
Manual
Version 1.4.0, valid from FW Version 03.05.10(17)
198 Modbus – CODESYS V2 WAGO-I/O-SYSTEM 750
750-8212 PFC200; G2; 2ETH RS
If no trigger occurs during the watchdog within the timeout time set in the 0x1102
register (Watchdog Timeout), the “Watchdog Timeout” response is initiated. The
closing of all Modbus TCP connections can be configured as a response, see
register 0x1103 (Watchdog Config).
The following diagrams show the possible states of the Modbus watchdog and
status transitions for the particular operation mode.
Manual
Version 1.4.0, valid from FW Version 03.05.10(17)
WAGO-I/O-SYSTEM 750 Modbus – CODESYS V2 199
750-8212 PFC200; G2; 2ETH RS
The following diagram shows the possible state transitions when operation
modes are switched.
Manual
Version 1.4.0, valid from FW Version 03.05.10(17)
200 Modbus – CODESYS V2 WAGO-I/O-SYSTEM 750
750-8212 PFC200; G2; 2ETH RS
This register receives commands for the Modbus watchdog. It cannot be read,
i.e. it is not possible to read out the last command written.
The following commands are accepted depending on watchdog status:
Manual
Version 1.4.0, valid from FW Version 03.05.10(17)
WAGO-I/O-SYSTEM 750 Modbus – CODESYS V2 201
750-8212 PFC200; G2; 2ETH RS
Table 62: Watchdog Commands
Value Name Explanation
0x5555 WATCHDOG_ Starts the configured watchdog;
START in the WATCHDOG_UNCONFIGURED state if
no timeout is configured, the response is an
ILLEGAL_DATA_VALUE (0x03) exception. In
the WATCHDOG_EXPIRED state and the
STANDARD_WATCHDOG operation mode the
response is an ILLEGAL_FUNCTION (0x01)
exception. The watchdog must in this case be
reset first with the command
WATCHDOG_RESET to the
WATCHDOG_STOPPED state. In all other
cases the watchdog is restarted and the
WATCHDOG_RUNNING state is set.
0x55AA WATCHDOG_ Stops the running watchdog;
STOP in the WATCHDOG_UNCONFIGURED state,
the response is an ILLEGAL_DATA_
VALUE (0x03) exception if no timeout time is
set. In the WATCHDOG_EXPIRED state and
the STANDARD_WATCHDOG operation mode
the response is an ILLEGAL_FUNCTION (0x01)
exception. In this case the watchdog must first
be reset with the WATCHDOG_
RESET command to the WATCHDOG_
STOPPED state. In operation mode
ALTERNATIVE_WATCHDOG the response is
an ILLEGAL_DATA_
VALUE (0x03) exception. The command is not
generally permitted in this operation mode. In all
other cases, the watchdog is stopped
successfully and the WATCHDOG_
STOPPED state is set. In the
WATCHDOG_STOPPED state, a stop
command received several times in a row does
not have any impact on the behavior of the
watchdog and is therefore not acknowledged
with an error response.
0xAAAA WATCHDOG_ Resets the expired watchdog;
RESET the watchdog is reset in the
WATCHDOG_EXPIRED state and
STANDARD_WATCHDOG operation mode.
The watchdog is then in the
WATCHDOG_STOPPED state. In all other
cases the response is an ILLEGAL_
DATA_VALUE (0x03) exception.
Manual
Version 1.4.0, valid from FW Version 03.05.10(17)
202 Modbus – CODESYS V2 WAGO-I/O-SYSTEM 750
750-8212 PFC200; G2; 2ETH RS
This register contains the value for the watchdog timeout. The step width is
100 ms and the maximum value is 65535 (corresponds to 6553.5 s). The default
value is 0. In this case the watchdog cannot be started and will have the
WATCHDOG_UNCONFIGURED state.
This register contains the configuration parameters for the watchdog. The
register is organized in bits, see following table.
Manual
Version 1.4.0, valid from FW Version 03.05.10(17)
WAGO-I/O-SYSTEM 750 Modbus – CODESYS V2 203
750-8212 PFC200; G2; 2ETH RS
The register can be read and written in the states
WATCHDOG_UNCONFIGURED, WATCHDOG_STOPPED and
WATCHDOG_EXPIRED. However, if the watchdog is active
(WATCHDOG_RUNNING state), this register can only be read. The response to
a write operation is an ILLEGAL_FUNCTION (0x01) exception.
The individual options are activated when the specific bit, or bit combination, is
set.
This register contains the value for the watchdog operation mode.
The register can be both read and written irrespective of the watchdog status.
The following operation modes are possible:
Manual
Version 1.4.0, valid from FW Version 03.05.10(17)
204 Modbus – CODESYS V2 WAGO-I/O-SYSTEM 750
750-8212 PFC200; G2; 2ETH RS
Table 65: Watchdog Operation Modes
Value Name Explanation
0x0000 STANDARD_ “Standard Watchdog” operation mode;
WATCHDOG the watchdog must be controlled explicitly via
commands (see register 0x1100 Watchdog
Command).
0x0001 ALTERNATIVE_ “Alternative Watchdog” operation mode;
WATCHDOG the watchdog is activated immediately with a
timeout > 0 s in register 0x1102 (Watchdog
Timeout). Each trigger restarts both the running
as well as the expired watchdog. In this
operation mode the registers 0x1102
(Watchdog Timeout) and 0x1103 (Watchdog
Config) are also saved retentively with the
operation mode itself. After a device restart, the
“Alternative Watchdog” operation mode is
retained with the same configuration as before
and is therefore immediately active again when
the timeout is set.
This register provides the consecutive revision index (firmware index) for the
controller.
This register provides the designation (ID) for the WAGO series (Series Code) for
the controller.
This register provides the device ID (WAGO Item No.) of the controller.
Example: 8206.
Manual
Version 1.4.0, valid from FW Version 03.05.10(17)
WAGO-I/O-SYSTEM 750 Modbus – CODESYS V2 205
750-8212 PFC200; G2; 2ETH RS
This register provides the major part for the firmware version.
This register provides the minor part for the firmware version.
This register provides the version of the Modbus slave library. The high byte
contains the major version number and the low byte, the minor version number.
Example:
0x010A => Major version number = 1, Minor version number = 10.
Manual
Version 1.4.0, valid from FW Version 03.05.10(17)
206 Modbus – CODESYS V2 WAGO-I/O-SYSTEM 750
750-8212 PFC200; G2; 2ETH RS
11.6 Diagnostics
11.6.1 Diagnostics for the Modbus Master
The status of the PLC, or of the control system, can be queried by the Modbus
master by reading the WAGO specific register 0x1040 – “PLC Status” using
Modbus services FC3 (Read Holding Registers) or FC4 (Read Input Registers).
The WAGO specific register 0x1040 – “PLC Status” is explained in the Section
“PLC Status Registers”.
The status of the Modbus Watchdog can be requested using a register service
(FC3 or FC4) with a query to the WAGO specific register 0x1101 – “Watchdog
Status Register”. Information about this is given in the Section “Modbus
Watchdog”.
Manual
Version 1.4.0, valid from FW Version 03.05.10(17)
WAGO-I/O-SYSTEM 750 Modbus – CODESYS V2 207
750-8212 PFC200; G2; 2ETH RS
Table 66: Diagnostics for the Error Server
Diagnostics Diagnostic text Method of Explanation
ID saving
0x00090006 Modbus Slave Permanent Starting the Modbus slave in
UDP start failed UDP mode failed.
0x00090007 Modbus Slave Temporary Modbus slave UDP mode
UDP terminated successfully terminated.
0x00090008 Modbus Slave Temporary Modbus slave successfully
RTU started started in the RTU mode.
0x00090009 Modbus Slave Permanent Starting the Modbus slave in
RTU start failed RTU mode failed.
0x0009000A Modbus Slave Temporary Modbus slave RTU mode
RTU terminated successfully terminated.
0x0009000B Modbus Slave Temporary Modbus slave data exchange
data exchange started.
started by PLC
0x0009000C Modbus Slave Temporary Modbus slave data exchange
data exchange stopped.
stopped by PLC
0x0009000F Modbus Slave Permanent Monitoring time for controller
PLC watchdog (PLC) expired.
timer expired
0x00090100 Modbus Slave Permanent Modbus slave configuration
common failed.
configuration
failed.
0x00090101 Modbus Slave Temporary Modbus slave TCP
TCP configured configuration completed
successfully. successfully.
0x00090102 Modbus Slave Permanent Modbus slave TCP
TCP configuration configuration failed.
failed.
0x00090103 Modbus Slave Temporary Modbus slave UDP
UDP configured configuration completed
successfully successfully.
0x00090104 Modbus Slave Permanent Modbus slave UDP
UDP configuration configuration failed.
failed.
0x00090105 Modbus Slave Temporary Modbus slave RTU
RTU configured configuration completed
successfully. successfully.
0x00090106 Modbus Slave Permanent Modbus slave RTU
RTU configuration configuration failed.
failed
0x00090107 Port for Modbus Permanent Serial port for Modbus slave
Slave RTU RTU configuration already
operation not free. occupied.
Manual
Version 1.4.0, valid from FW Version 03.05.10(17)
208 Modbus – CODESYS V2 WAGO-I/O-SYSTEM 750
750-8212 PFC200; G2; 2ETH RS
Table 66: Diagnostics for the Error Server
Diagnostics Diagnostic text Method of Explanation
ID saving
0x00090108 Modbus Slave Permanent Modbus slave RTU
RTU configuration configuration for the RS-485
in RS-485 mode mode has failed.
failed.
0x00090200 Modbus Slave Temporary Modbus watchdog activated.
Watchdog
activated.
0x00090201 Modbus Slave Temporary Modbus watchdog
Watchdog deactivated.
deactivated.
0x00090202 Modbus Slave Permanent Modbus watchdog monitoring
Watchdog Timer time expired.
expired.
0x00090203 Modbus Slave has Permanent All Modbus TCP connections
terminated all terminated due to timeout.
established TCP
connections.
0x00090300 Modbus Slave: Permanent Request for system resources
obtaining system by the Modbus slave has
resource failed failed.
0x00090301 Modbus Slave: Permanent Access to system resources
processing system by the Modbus slave has
resource failed. failed.
Manual
Version 1.4.0, valid from FW Version 03.05.10(17)
WAGO-I/O-SYSTEM 750 Modbus – e!RUNTIME 209
750-8212 PFC200; G2; 2ETH RS
12 Modbus – e!RUNTIME
12.1 Modbus Address Overview
Manual
Version 1.4.0, valid from FW Version 03.05.10(17)
210 Modbus – e!RUNTIME WAGO-I/O-SYSTEM 750
750-8212 PFC200; G2; 2ETH RS
Manual
Version 1.4.0, valid from FW Version 03.05.10(17)
WAGO-I/O-SYSTEM 750 Modbus – e!RUNTIME 211
750-8212 PFC200; G2; 2ETH RS
Table 67: WAGO Modbus Registers
Modbus Address Data Length
Access Description
Dec. Hex. in Words
Constants Registers
64,160 0xFAA0 1 ro Constant 0x1234
64,161 0xFAA1 1 ro Constant 0xAAAA
64,162 0xFAA2 1 ro Constant 0x5555
64,250 0xFAFA 1 ro Live register
The WAGO Modbus registers are described in more details in the following
sections.
Manual
Version 1.4.0, valid from FW Version 03.05.10(17)
212 Modbus – e!RUNTIME WAGO-I/O-SYSTEM 750
750-8212 PFC200; G2; 2ETH RS
The following diagrams show the possible states of the Modbus watchdog and
status transitions for the particular operation mode.
Manual
Version 1.4.0, valid from FW Version 03.05.10(17)
WAGO-I/O-SYSTEM 750 Modbus – e!RUNTIME 213
750-8212 PFC200; G2; 2ETH RS
The state diagram for the SIMPLE_WATCHDOG operation mode shows that the
watchdog is always active as soon as a timeout > 0 is set in the register 0xFA01
(Watchdog Timeout). The writing of commands in the register 0xFA00 (Watchdog
Command) is restricted in this operation mode. Only the WATCHDOG_START
command is permitted as a possible trigger. The only possibility to deactivate and
stop the watchdog in operation mode SIMPLE_WATCHDOG, is the switching
back to the operation mode ADVANCED_WATCHDOG.
The following diagram shows the possible state transitions when operation
modes are switched.
Manual
Version 1.4.0, valid from FW Version 03.05.10(17)
214 Modbus – e!RUNTIME WAGO-I/O-SYSTEM 750
750-8212 PFC200; G2; 2ETH RS
This register receives commands for the Modbus watchdog. It cannot be read,
i.e. it is not possible to read out the last command written.
The following commands are accepted depending on watchdog status:
Manual
Version 1.4.0, valid from FW Version 03.05.10(17)
WAGO-I/O-SYSTEM 750 Modbus – e!RUNTIME 215
750-8212 PFC200; G2; 2ETH RS
This register contains the value for the watchdog timeout. The step width is 1 ms
and the maximum value is 65535 (corresponds to 65.535 s). The default value is
0. In this case the watchdog cannot be started and will have the
WATCHDOG_UNCONFIGURED state.
Manual
Version 1.4.0, valid from FW Version 03.05.10(17)
216 Modbus – e!RUNTIME WAGO-I/O-SYSTEM 750
750-8212 PFC200; G2; 2ETH RS
This register contains the configuration parameters for the watchdog. The
register is organized in bits, see following table.
The register can be read and written irrespective of the watchdog state in the
SIMPLE_WATCHDOG operation mode.
However, in the ADVANCED_WATCHDOG operation mode, the register can only
be read and written in the WATCHDOG_UNCONFIGURED and
WATCHDOG_STOPPED states.
If the watchdog is active (WATCHDOG_RUNNING or WATCHDOG_EXPIRED
state), only a read access is permissible. The response to a write request in this
case is an ILLEGAL_FUNCTION (0x01) exception.
The individual options are activated if the relevant bit or bit combination is set.
Manual
Version 1.4.0, valid from FW Version 03.05.10(17)
WAGO-I/O-SYSTEM 750 Modbus – e!RUNTIME 217
750-8212 PFC200; G2; 2ETH RS
The 0xFA04 register contains the time for the Modbus TCP connection
watchdog. Time base is 10 ms. This enables the time to be set up to 655350 ms.
If the register contains a value > 0 s when a new TCP connection from a Modbus
master is accepted, the watchdog for this connection is started. Later changes to
the register have no effect on the monitoring of existing connections. If the
watchdog is started and no telegram is received from the connected Modbus
master within the set time, this connection is closed from one side with a reset.
Manual
Version 1.4.0, valid from FW Version 03.05.10(17)
218 Modbus – e!RUNTIME WAGO-I/O-SYSTEM 750
750-8212 PFC200; G2; 2ETH RS
The registers 0xFA10–0xFA13 contain the WAGO order number of the controller.
Example: 0750-8202/0025-0001.
0xFA10 = 0750,
0xFA11 = 8202,
0xFA12 = 0025,
0xFA13 = 0001
The register 0xFA16 contains the firmware loader/boot loader version of the
controller.
Manual
Version 1.4.0, valid from FW Version 03.05.10(17)
WAGO-I/O-SYSTEM 750 Modbus – e!RUNTIME 219
750-8212 PFC200; G2; 2ETH RS
0xFAA0 = 0x1234,
0xFAA1 = 0xAAAA,
0xFAA2 = 0x5555
Manual
Version 1.4.0, valid from FW Version 03.05.10(17)
220 Modbus – e!RUNTIME WAGO-I/O-SYSTEM 750
750-8212 PFC200; G2; 2ETH RS
Manual
Version 1.4.0, valid from FW Version 03.05.10(17)
WAGO-I/O-SYSTEM 750 Diagnostics 221
750-8212 PFC200; G2; 2ETH RS
13 Diagnostics
13.1 Operating and Status Messages
The following tables contain descriptions of all operating and status messages for
the controller which are indicated by LEDs.
13.1.1.1 A LED
13.1.1.2 B LED
Manual
Version 1.4.0, valid from FW Version 03.05.10(17)
222 Diagnostics WAGO-I/O-SYSTEM 750
750-8212 PFC200; G2; 2ETH RS
The SYS LED indication depends on the runtime system enabled (CODESYS V2
or e!RUNTIME).
Manual
Version 1.4.0, valid from FW Version 03.05.10(17)
WAGO-I/O-SYSTEM 750 Diagnostics 223
750-8212 PFC200; G2; 2ETH RS
Table 73: Diagnostics via SYS LED
Status Explanation Remedy
Green Ready to operate - ---
System start
completed without
errors
Orange Device is in ---
startup/boot process
and the RST button is
not pressed.
Load above threshold Try to reduce the load on the system:
value 1 - Change the CODESYS program.
The system is at full - End any fieldbus communication that
capacity; real-time is not essential, or reconfigure the
response can no fieldbuses.
longer be guaranteed. - Remove any non-critical tasks from
the RT area.
- Select a longer cycle time for IEC
tasks.
Orange flashing “Fix IP Address” Connect to the device via the standard
mode, address (192.168.1.17) or restart the
temporary setting device to restore the original value set.
until the next reboot
Red Load above threshold Try to reduce the load on the system:
value 2 - Change the CODESYS program.
The system is - End any fieldbus communication that
overloaded; real-time is not essential, or reconfigure the
response can no fieldbuses.
longer be guaranteed. - Remove any non-critical tasks from
the RT area.
- Select a longer cycle time for IEC
tasks.
Green/red Firmware update ---
flashing mode
Manual
Version 1.4.0, valid from FW Version 03.05.10(17)
224 Diagnostics WAGO-I/O-SYSTEM 750
750-8212 PFC200; G2; 2ETH RS
Manual
Version 1.4.0, valid from FW Version 03.05.10(17)
WAGO-I/O-SYSTEM 750 Diagnostics 225
750-8212 PFC200; G2; 2ETH RS
The RUN LED indication depends on the runtime system enabled (CODESYS V2
or e!RUNTIME).
Manual
Version 1.4.0, valid from FW Version 03.05.10(17)
226 Diagnostics WAGO-I/O-SYSTEM 750
750-8212 PFC200; G2; 2ETH RS
Manual
Version 1.4.0, valid from FW Version 03.05.10(17)
WAGO-I/O-SYSTEM 750 Diagnostics 227
750-8212 PFC200; G2; 2ETH RS
Manual
Version 1.4.0, valid from FW Version 03.05.10(17)
228 Diagnostics WAGO-I/O-SYSTEM 750
750-8212 PFC200; G2; 2ETH RS
13.1.2.4 MS LED
Manual
Version 1.4.0, valid from FW Version 03.05.10(17)
WAGO-I/O-SYSTEM 750 Diagnostics 229
750-8212 PFC200; G2; 2ETH RS
Manual
Version 1.4.0, valid from FW Version 03.05.10(17)
230 Diagnostics WAGO-I/O-SYSTEM 750
750-8212 PFC200; G2; 2ETH RS
Manual
Version 1.4.0, valid from FW Version 03.05.10(17)
WAGO-I/O-SYSTEM 750 Diagnostics 231
750-8212 PFC200; G2; 2ETH RS
3. After a further break the third flashing sequence is initiated. The number of
blink pulses indicates the error argument, which provides an additional
description of the error, e.g., which of the I/O modules connected to the
controller exhibits an error.
Manual
Version 1.4.0, valid from FW Version 03.05.10(17)
232 Diagnostics WAGO-I/O-SYSTEM 750
750-8212 PFC200; G2; 2ETH RS
6. The blink code starts flickering when the start phase is initiated again. If
there is only one error, this process is repeated.
Manual
Version 1.4.0, valid from FW Version 03.05.10(17)
WAGO-I/O-SYSTEM 750 Diagnostics 233
750-8212 PFC200; G2; 2ETH RS
If the diagnostics cannot be cleared by the measured specified for them, contact
WAGO support. Be ready to explain to them the blink code that is displayed.
Manual
Version 1.4.0, valid from FW Version 03.05.10(17)
234 Diagnostics WAGO-I/O-SYSTEM 750
750-8212 PFC200; G2; 2ETH RS
Table 83: Error Code 1, Explanation of Blink Codes and Procedures for Troubleshooting
Error
Cause Remedy
Argument
Invalid parameter - Switch off the power to the controller
- checksum for local and replace it.
bus interface - Then switch the power back on.
Internal buffer
overflow (max. - Switch off the power to the
amount of data controller.
1
exceeded) during - Reduce the number of I/O modules.
inline code - Switch the power back on.
generation.
- Update the controller firmware. If this
error persists, there is an error in the
I/O module. Identify the error as
follows:
- Switch off the power supply.
- Place the end module in the middle
of the I/O modules connected to the
system.
- Switch the power back on.
- If the I/O flashes red switch off the
Data type of the I/O power supply again and place the
2 module(s) is not end module in the middle of the first
supported half of the I/O modules (toward the
controller).
- If the LED is no longer flashing,
switch off the power supply and
place the end module in the middle
of the second half of the I/O modules
(away from the controller).
- Switch the power back on.
- Repeat this procedure until you
establish which I/O module is
defective. Then replace that module.
Unknown module - Switch off the power to the controller
3 type of the flash and replace it.
program memory - Then switch the power back on.
Error occurred while - Switch off the power to the controller
4 writing to the flash and replace it.
memory - Then switch the power back on.
Error occurred while
5
erasing a flash sector
The I/O module - Restart the controller by first
configuration after a switching off the power supply and
6 local bus reset differs then switching it back on, or
from the one after the by pressing the Reset button on the
last controller startup. controller.
Manual
Version 1.4.0, valid from FW Version 03.05.10(17)
WAGO-I/O-SYSTEM 750 Diagnostics 235
750-8212 PFC200; G2; 2ETH RS
Table 83: Error Code 1, Explanation of Blink Codes and Procedures for Troubleshooting
Error
Cause Remedy
Argument
Error occurred while - Switch off the power to the controller
7 writing to the serial and replace it.
EEPROM - Then switch the power back on.
Invalid hardware/
8
firmware combination
Invalid checksum in
9
the serial EEPROM
Fault when initializing
10
the serial EEPROM.
- Switch off the power supply to the
Error occurred while
controller and reduce the number of
11 reading from the
I/O modules.
serial EEPROM
- Then switch the power back on.
Time to access the - Switch off the power to the controller
12 serial EEPROM and replace it.
exceeded - Then switch the power back on.
- Switch off the power to the
Maximum number of controller.
14 gateway or mailbox - Reduce the number of gateway or
modules exceeded. mailbox modules.
- Then switch the power back on.
- Switch off the power to the
Maximum number of
controller.
16 I/O modules
- Reduce the number of I/O modules.
exceeded
- Then switch the power back on.
Table 84: Error Code 2, Explanation of Blink Codes and Procedures for Troubleshooting
Error
Cause Remedy
Argument
- Switch off the power to the
Maximum size of the
controller.
2 process image
- Reduce the number of I/O modules.
exceeded
- Switch the power back on.
Manual
Version 1.4.0, valid from FW Version 03.05.10(17)
236 Diagnostics WAGO-I/O-SYSTEM 750
750-8212 PFC200; G2; 2ETH RS
Table 85: Error Code 3, Explanation of Blink Codes and Procedures for Troubleshooting
Error
Cause Solution
Argument
If a power supply module (e.g., 750-602)
is connected to the controller, ensure
that this module functions properly (see
Section “LED Signaling”). If the supply
module does not exhibit any errors/faults,
the I/O module is defective. Identify the
defective I/O module as follows:
Manual
Version 1.4.0, valid from FW Version 03.05.10(17)
WAGO-I/O-SYSTEM 750 Diagnostics 237
750-8212 PFC200; G2; 2ETH RS
Table 86: Error Code 4, Explanation of Blink Codes and Procedures for Troubleshooting
Error
Cause Solution
Argument
- Switch off the power to the controller.
Maximum permissible
- Reduce the number of I/O modules
-- number of I/O modules
to an acceptable value.
exceeded.
- Switch the power back on.
- Switch off the power to the controller.
- Replace the (n+1)th process data
module.
Local bus disruption after
- Switch the power back on.
n* the nth process data
module.
I/O modules that do not provide any data
are ignored (e.g., supply module without
diagnostics).
Table 87: Error Code 5, Explanation of Blink Codes and Procedures for Troubleshooting
Error
Cause Solution
Argument
- Switch off the power to the controller.
- Replace the (n+1)th process data
module.
Register communication
- Switch the power back on.
n* error during local bus
initialization
I/O modules that do not provide any data
are ignored (e.g., supply module without
diagnostics).
Table 88: Error Code 7, Explanation of Blink Codes and Procedures for Troubleshooting
Error
Cause Solution
Argument
- Switch off the power to the controller.
- Replace the nth I/O module
First unsupported I/O containing process data or reduce
n
module in place of n. the number of modules to the
number of n-1.
- Switch the power back on.
Manual
Version 1.4.0, valid from FW Version 03.05.10(17)
238 Diagnostics WAGO-I/O-SYSTEM 750
750-8212 PFC200; G2; 2ETH RS
Table 89: Error Code 9, Explanation of Blink Codes and Procedures for Troubleshooting
Error
Cause Remedy
Argument
Invalid program Malfunction of the program sequence:
1
statement - Contact WAGO Support.
Malfunction of the program sequence:
2 Stack overflow
- Contact WAGO Support.
Malfunction of the program sequence:
3 Stack underflow
- Contact WAGO Support.
Malfunction of the program sequence:
4 Invalid event (NMI)
- Contact WAGO Support.
For CODESYS applications:
Local bus watchdog - Contact WAGO Support.
5
has triggered. For C applications:
- Check the time monitoring settings.
Manual
Version 1.4.0, valid from FW Version 03.05.10(17)
WAGO-I/O-SYSTEM 750 Diagnostics 239
750-8212 PFC200; G2; 2ETH RS
If the diagnostics cannot be cleared by the measured specified for them, contact
WAGO support. Be ready to explain to them the blink code that is displayed.
Table 91: Error Code 1, Explanation of Blink Codes and Procedures for Troubleshooting
Error
Cause Remedy
Argument
- Check the information of the
Error when connected I/O modules in the
synchronizing the CODESYS controller configuration.
5 controller - Adjust this to match the I/O module
configuration with the that is actually inserted.
local bus - Recompile the project.
- Reload the project into the controller.
Manual
Version 1.4.0, valid from FW Version 03.05.10(17)
240 Service WAGO-I/O-SYSTEM 750
750-8212 PFC200; G2; 2ETH RS
14 Service
14.1 Inserting and Removing the Memory Card
</dg_
2. Hold the memory card so that the contacts are visible on the right and the
diagonal edge is at the top, as depicted in the figure below.
3. Insert the memory card in this position into the slot provided for it.
4. Push the memory card all the way in. When you let go, the memory card
will move back a little and then snap in place (push-push mechanism).
5. Close the cover flap by flipping it down and pushing it in until it snaps into
place.
6. You can seal the closed flap through the hole in the enclosure next to the
flap.
3. To remove the memory card you must first push it slightly into the slot
(push-push mechanism). This releases the mechanical locking mechanism.
4. As soon as you let go of the memory card, the memory card is pushed out
a bit and you can remove it.
Manual
Version 1.4.0, valid from FW Version 03.05.10(17)
WAGO-I/O-SYSTEM 750 Service 241
750-8212 PFC200; G2; 2ETH RS
6. Close the cover flap by flipping it down and pushing it in until it snaps into
place.
Manual
Version 1.4.0, valid from FW Version 03.05.10(17)
242 Service WAGO-I/O-SYSTEM 750
750-8212 PFC200; G2; 2ETH RS
Therefore, use only documentation appropriate for the target firmware after a
firmware change.
If you have any questions, feel free to contact our WAGO Support.
• e!COCKPIT
• WAGOupload
Manual
Version 1.4.0, valid from FW Version 03.05.10(17)
WAGO-I/O-SYSTEM 750 Service 243
750-8212 PFC200; G2; 2ETH RS
4. Select the displayed controller and click “Apply Selection” in the “SCAN”
tab.
9. Wait until the operation ends with a status message and only then click
[OK] to close the window.
Manual
Version 1.4.0, valid from FW Version 03.05.10(17)
244 Service WAGO-I/O-SYSTEM 750
750-8212 PFC200; G2; 2ETH RS
6. In the “Select Update File” dialog, select the *.wup firmware file for the
required firmware.
7. Click [Next].
9. Wait until the operation ends with a status message and only then click
[Exit] to close the window.
Manual
Version 1.4.0, valid from FW Version 03.05.10(17)
WAGO-I/O-SYSTEM 750 Service 245
750-8212 PFC200; G2; 2ETH RS
3. Insert the memory card with the new firmware image into the memory card
slot. Use a special downgrade image if necessary (see above).
5. After booting the controller, launch the WBM “Create Boot Image” page
(you may have to temporarily change the IP address).
The controller can now be started with the new firmware version.
Manual
Version 1.4.0, valid from FW Version 03.05.10(17)
246 Service WAGO-I/O-SYSTEM 750
750-8212 PFC200; G2; 2ETH RS
3. Transfer the file to the /etc/ssl/certs directory on the controller with an SFTP
or FTP client.
4. Restart the controller. To do so, use the reboot function in WBM or CBM.
Manual
Version 1.4.0, valid from FW Version 03.05.10(17)
WAGO-I/O-SYSTEM 750 Removal 247
750-8212 PFC200; G2; 2ETH RS
15 Removal
2. Remove the controller from the assembly by pulling the release tab.
Electrical connections for data or power contacts to adjacent I/O modules are
disconnected when removing the controller.
Manual
Version 1.4.0, valid from FW Version 03.05.10(17)
248 Disposal WAGO-I/O-SYSTEM 750
750-8212 PFC200; G2; 2ETH RS
16 Disposal
16.1 Electrical and electronic equipment
Electrical and electronic equipment may not be disposed of
with household waste. This also applies to products without
this symbol.
Electrical and electronic equipment contain materials and substances that can be
harmful to the environment and health. Electrical and electronic equipment must
be disposed of properly after use.
WEEE 2012/19/EU applies throughout Europe. Directives and laws may vary
nationally.
• Observe national and local regulations for the disposal of electrical and
electronic equipment.
16.2 Packaging
Packaging contains materials that can be reused.
PPWD 94/62/EU and 2004/12/EU packaging guidelines apply throughout
Europe. Directives and laws may vary nationally.
Manual
Version 1.4.0, valid from FW Version 03.05.10(17)
WAGO-I/O-SYSTEM 750 Disposal 249
750-8212 PFC200; G2; 2ETH RS
• Dispose of packaging of all types that allows a high level of recovery,
reuse and recycling.
Manual
Version 1.4.0, valid from FW Version 03.05.10(17)
250 Use in Hazardous Environments WAGO-I/O-SYSTEM 750
750-8212 PFC200; G2; 2ETH RS
Manual
Version 1.4.0, valid from FW Version 03.05.10(17)
WAGO-I/O-SYSTEM 750 Use in Hazardous Environments 251
750-8212 PFC200; G2; 2ETH RS
Figure 122: Text Detail – Marking Example According to ATEX and IECEx
Manual
Version 1.4.0, valid from FW Version 03.05.10(17)
252 Use in Hazardous Environments WAGO-I/O-SYSTEM 750
750-8212 PFC200; G2; 2ETH RS
Table 92: Description of Marking Example According to ATEX and IECEx
Marking Description
TUEV 07 ATEX 554086 X Approving authority resp. certificate numbers
IECEx TUN 09.0001 X
Dust
II Equipment group: All except mining
3D Category 3 (Zone 22)
Ex Explosion protection mark
tc Type of protection: Protection by enclosure
IIIC Explosion group of dust
T135°C Max. surface temperature of the enclosure
(without a dust layer)
Dc Equipment protection level (EPL)
Mining
I Equipment group: Mining
M2 Category: High level of protection
Ex Explosion protection mark
d Type of protection: Flameproof enclosure
I Explosion group for electrical equipment for
mines susceptible to firedamp
Mb Equipment protection level (EPL)
Gases
II Equipment group: All except mining
3G Category 3 (Zone 2)
Ex Explosion protection mark
nA Type of protection: Non-sparking equipment
IIC Explosion group of gas and vapours
T4 Temperature class: Max. surface temperature
135 °C
Gc Equipment protection level (EPL)
Manual
Version 1.4.0, valid from FW Version 03.05.10(17)
WAGO-I/O-SYSTEM 750 Use in Hazardous Environments 253
750-8212 PFC200; G2; 2ETH RS
Figure 123: Marking Example for Approved Ex i I/O Module According to ATEX and IECEx
Figure 124: Text Detail – Marking Example for Approved Ex i I/O Module According to ATEX and
IECEx
Manual
Version 1.4.0, valid from FW Version 03.05.10(17)
254 Use in Hazardous Environments WAGO-I/O-SYSTEM 750
750-8212 PFC200; G2; 2ETH RS
Table 93: Description of Marking Example for Approved Ex i I/O Module According to ATEX and
IECEx
Marking Description
TUEV 12 ATEX 106032 X Approving authority resp. certificate numbers
IECEx TUN 12 0039 X
Dust
II Equipment group: All except mining
3 (1) D Category 3 (Zone 22) equipment containing a safety
device for a category 1 (Zone 20) equipment
Ex Explosion protection mark
tc Type of protection: Protection by enclosure
[ia Da] Type of protection and equipment protection level
(EPL): Associated apparatus with intrinsic safety
circuits for use in Zone 20
IIIC Explosion group of dust
T135°C Max. surface temperature of the enclosure
(without a dust layer)
Dc Equipment protection level (EPL)
Mining
I Equipment Group: Mining
M2 (M1) Category: High level of protection with electrical
circuits which present a very high level of protection
Ex Explosion protection mark
d Type of protection: Flameproof enclosure
[ia Ma] Type of protection and equipment protection level
(EPL): Associated apparatus with intrinsic safety
electrical circuits
I Explosion group for electrical equipment for mines
susceptible to firedamp
Mb Equipment protection level (EPL)
Gases
II Equipment group: All except mining
3 (1) G Category 3 (Zone 2) equipment containing a safety
device for a category 1 (Zone 0) equipment
Ex Explosion protection mark
ec Equipment protection by increased safety “e”
[ia Ga] Type of protection and equipment protection level
(EPL): Associated apparatus with intrinsic safety
circuits for use in Zone 0
IIC Explosion group of gas and vapours
T4 Temperature class: Max. surface temperature
135 °C
Gc Equipment protection level (EPL)
Manual
Version 1.4.0, valid from FW Version 03.05.10(17)
WAGO-I/O-SYSTEM 750 Use in Hazardous Environments 255
750-8212 PFC200; G2; 2ETH RS
17.1.2 Marking for the United States of America (NEC) and Canada
(CEC)
Manual
Version 1.4.0, valid from FW Version 03.05.10(17)
256 Use in Hazardous Environments WAGO-I/O-SYSTEM 750
750-8212 PFC200; G2; 2ETH RS
Figure 127: Text Detail – Marking Example for Approved Ex i I/O Module According to NEC 505
Table 95: Description of Marking Example for Approved Ex i I/O Module According to NEC 505
Marking Description
CI I, Explosion protection group
Zn 2 Area of application
AEx Explosion protection mark
nA Type of protection
[ia Ga] Type of protection and equipment protection
level (EPL): Associated apparatus with intrinsic
safety circuits for use in Zone 20
IIC Group
T4 Temperature class
Gc Equipment protection level (EPL)
Figure 128: Text Detail – Marking Example for Approved Ex i I/O Module According to NEC 506
Table 96: Description of Marking Example for Approved Ex i I/O Modules According to NEC 506
Marking Description
CI I, Explosion protection group
Zn 2 Area of application
AEx Explosion protection mark
nA Type of protection
[ia IIIC] Type of protection and equipment protection
level (EPL): Associated apparatus with intrinsic
safety circuits for use in Zone 20
IIC Group
T4 Temperature class
Gc Equipment protection level (EPL)
Manual
Version 1.4.0, valid from FW Version 03.05.10(17)
WAGO-I/O-SYSTEM 750 Use in Hazardous Environments 257
750-8212 PFC200; G2; 2ETH RS
Figure 129: Text Detail – Marking Example for Approved Ex i I/O Modules According to CEC 18
attachment J
Table 97: Description of Marking Example for Approved Ex i I/O Modules According to CEC 18
attachment J
Marking Description
Dust
Ex Explosion protection mark
nA Type of protection
[ia IIIC] Type of protection and equipment protection
level (EPL): Associated apparatus with intrinsic
safety circuits for use in Zone 20
IIC Group
T4 Temperature class
Gc Equipment protection level (EPL)
X Symbol used to denote specific conditions of use
Gases
Ex Explosion protection mark
nA Type of protection
[ia Ga] Type of protection and equipment protection
level (EPL): Associated apparatus with intrinsic
safety circuits for use in Zone 0
IIC Group
T4 Temperature class
Gc Equipment protection level (EPL)
X Symbol used to denote specific conditions of use
Manual
Version 1.4.0, valid from FW Version 03.05.10(17)
258 Use in Hazardous Environments WAGO-I/O-SYSTEM 750
750-8212 PFC200; G2; 2ETH RS
The product is an open system. As such, the product must only be installed in
appropriate enclosures or electrical operation rooms to which the following
applies:
• For use in Zone 2 (Gc), compliance with the applicable requirements of the
standards EN/IEC/ABNT NBR IEC 60079-0, -7, -11, -15
• For use in mining (Mb), minimum degree of protection IP64 (acc. EN/IEC
60529) and adequate protection acc. EN/IEC/ABNT NBR IEC 60079-0 and
-1
Manual
Version 1.4.0, valid from FW Version 03.05.10(17)
WAGO-I/O-SYSTEM 750 Use in Hazardous Environments 259
750-8212 PFC200; G2; 2ETH RS
Explosive atmosphere occurring simultaneously with assembly, installation or
repair work must be ruled out. Among other things, these include the following
activities
• Replacing fuses
Outside the device, suitable measures must be taken so that the rated voltage is
not exceeded by more than 40 % due to transient faults (e.g., when powering the
field supply).
Manual
Version 1.4.0, valid from FW Version 03.05.10(17)
260 Use in Hazardous Environments WAGO-I/O-SYSTEM 750
750-8212 PFC200; G2; 2ETH RS
• WARNING – Product components with fuses must not be fitted into circuits
subject to overloads!
These include, e.g., motor circuits.
Additional Information
Proof of certification is available on request.
Also take note of the information given on the operating and assembly
instructions.
The manual, containing these special conditions for safe use, must be readily
available to the user.
Manual
Version 1.4.0, valid from FW Version 03.05.10(17)
WAGO-I/O-SYSTEM 750 Appendix 261
750-8212 PFC200; G2; 2ETH RS
18 Appendix
18.1 Configuration Dialogs
The “Device Status” page shows information about product identification and the
most important network properties.
Manual
Version 1.4.0, valid from FW Version 03.05.10(17)
262 Appendix WAGO-I/O-SYSTEM 750
750-8212 PFC200; G2; 2ETH RS
“Network TCP/IP Details” Group
The network and interface properties of the product are displayed in this group.
Table 99: WBM “Device Status” Page – “Network TCP/IP Details” Group
Parameter Meaning
Status of the address selection switch;
DIP Switch Status this area only appears if an address selection switch
is available.
Address Selection Switch
Off (0) IP address assignment via e.g., WBM
static Static IP address assignment via
DIP Switch Mode
(1 … 254) address selection switch
dhcp Dynamic IP address assignment via
(255) DHCP
DIP Switch Value Set value of the address selection switch
Bridge currently configured;
Bridge <n> the properties are displayed in a separate area for
each configured bridge.
MAC address used for product identification and
MAC Address
addressing
Current reference type of the IP address
None No IP allocation method is selected; this
occurs, for example, if a bridge was
added due to changes to the bridge
configuration.
Select a source in the Configuration tab
on the Networking > TCP/IP
Configuration page.
IP Source static IP Static IP address assignment
dhcp Dynamic IP address assignment via
DHCP
bootp Dynamic IP address assignment via
BootP (if BootP is supported)
external The IP address may be assigned by the
fieldbus application; this occurs e.g., if
the IP address is controlled by the
PROFINET application.
IP Address Current product IP address
Subnet Mask Current product subnet mask
Manual
Version 1.4.0, valid from FW Version 03.05.10(17)
WAGO-I/O-SYSTEM 750 Appendix 263
750-8212 PFC200; G2; 2ETH RS
You can find the manufacturer and address on the “Vendor Information” page.
Manual
Version 1.4.0, valid from FW Version 03.05.10(17)
264 Appendix WAGO-I/O-SYSTEM 750
750-8212 PFC200; G2; 2ETH RS
All information about the enabled runtime system and PLC program created in
the programming software is provided on the “PLC Runtime Information” page.
You will also find a link here to open WebVisu.
“Runtime” Group
“WebVisu” Group
You will find a link that you can use to open WebVisu.
Manual
Version 1.4.0, valid from FW Version 03.05.10(17)
WAGO-I/O-SYSTEM 750 Appendix 265
750-8212 PFC200; G2; 2ETH RS
“Project Details” Group
This group appears if the controller supports the CODESYS V2 runtime system
and CODESYS V2 is set as the runtime system.
Table 101: WBM “PLC Runtime Information” Page – “Project Details” Group
Parameter Explanation
Date The last save date of the project is displayed.
The project information that the programmer has
Title
entered in the PLC program is displayed here (in the
programming software under Project > Project
Version
Information ...).
The information only appears in an executed PLC
Author
program.
Descriptive texts up to 1024 characters long are
Description
given under “Description.”
Checksum The calculated checksum of the project is displayed.
One dedicated group is displayed for each task when the PLC program is
executed. As a rule, only the group title is displayed with the task number, the
task name and the task ID.
Manual
Version 1.4.0, valid from FW Version 03.05.10(17)
266 Appendix WAGO-I/O-SYSTEM 750
750-8212 PFC200; G2; 2ETH RS
The “WAGO Software License Agreement” page lists the license terms for the
WAGO software used in the product.
Manual
Version 1.4.0, valid from FW Version 03.05.10(17)
WAGO-I/O-SYSTEM 750 Appendix 267
750-8212 PFC200; G2; 2ETH RS
The license conditions for the open source software used for the product are
listed in alphabetical order on the “Open Source Licenses” page.
Manual
Version 1.4.0, valid from FW Version 03.05.10(17)
268 Appendix WAGO-I/O-SYSTEM 750
750-8212 PFC200; G2; 2ETH RS
On the “WBM Third Party License Information” page, you can find the license text
of the open source licenses that apply to the WBM itself.
Manual
Version 1.4.0, valid from FW Version 03.05.10(17)
WAGO-I/O-SYSTEM 750 Appendix 269
750-8212 PFC200; G2; 2ETH RS
On the “WBM Version” page, you can find the version information for the various
sections (“Plug-ins”) that the WBM contains. This information may be useful for
support if an error is found in the WBM.
Manual
Version 1.4.0, valid from FW Version 03.05.10(17)
270 Appendix WAGO-I/O-SYSTEM 750
750-8212 PFC200; G2; 2ETH RS
On the "PLC Runtime Configuration" page, you will find the settings for the boot
project created with the programming software and the settings for the web
visualization created in the runtime system.
Table 103: WBM “PLC Runtime Configuration” Page – “General PLC Runtime Configuration” Group
Parameter Meaning
Select here the PLC runtime system to be enabled.
Manual
Version 1.4.0, valid from FW Version 03.05.10(17)
WAGO-I/O-SYSTEM 750 Appendix 271
750-8212 PFC200; G2; 2ETH RS
Click [Submit] to apply the change. The runtime system change is effective
immediately.
The home directory change only takes effect after the product restarts. For this
purpose, use the WBM reboot function. Do not switch off the product too early!
Table 104: WBM “PLC Runtime Configuration” Page – “Webserver Configuration” Group
Parameter Meaning
This displays the status (enabled/disabled) of the
CODESYS V2 Webserver CODESYS V2 Webserver.
State This field only appears if the controller supports the
CODESYS V2 runtime system.
This indicates the status (enabled/disabled) of the
e!RUNTIME Webserver e!RUNTIME Webserver.
State This field only appears if the controller supports the
e!RUNTIME runtime system.
Choose here whether the Web-based Management
or web visualization of the runtime system should be
displayed when only entering the IP address of the
controller.
Default Webserver
Web-Based The Web-based Management is
Management displayed.
WebVisu The web visualization of the runtime
system is displayed.
Click [Submit] to apply the change. The change takes effect immediately.
In its default setting, the WBM is called up when only entering the IP address.
To update the display after switching, enter the IP address again in the address
line of the Web browser.
To display the web visualization, the Webserver must be enabled (in WBM under
“Ports and Services” -> “PLC Runtime Services”) and there must be a suitably
configured application.
Regardless of the default Webserver setting, the WBM can be called up at any
time with “https://<IP address>/wbm” and the Web visualization with “https://<IP
address>/webvisu”.
Manual
Version 1.4.0, valid from FW Version 03.05.10(17)
272 Appendix WAGO-I/O-SYSTEM 750
750-8212 PFC200; G2; 2ETH RS
Manual
Version 1.4.0, valid from FW Version 03.05.10(17)
WAGO-I/O-SYSTEM 750 Appendix 273
750-8212 PFC200; G2; 2ETH RS
The TCP/IP settings for the ETHERNET interfaces are shown on the “TCP/IP
configuration” page.
The properties are displayed in a separate area for each configured bridge.
Click the [Submit] button to apply a change. The change takes effect
immediately.
Manual
Version 1.4.0, valid from FW Version 03.05.10(17)
274 Appendix WAGO-I/O-SYSTEM 750
750-8212 PFC200; G2; 2ETH RS
“DNS Server” Group
Click the [Add] button to add the entered DNS server. The change takes effect
immediately.
Click the [Delete] button to delete the selected DNS server. The change takes
effect immediately.
Manual
Version 1.4.0, valid from FW Version 03.05.10(17)
WAGO-I/O-SYSTEM 750 Appendix 275
750-8212 PFC200; G2; 2ETH RS
The settings for ETHERNET are located on the “Ethernet Configuration” page.
Click the [Submit] button to apply the change. The change takes effect
immediately.
Manual
Version 1.4.0, valid from FW Version 03.05.10(17)
276 Appendix WAGO-I/O-SYSTEM 750
750-8212 PFC200; G2; 2ETH RS
“Switch Configuration” Group
Click [Submit] to apply the change. The change takes effect immediately.
Manual
Version 1.4.0, valid from FW Version 03.05.10(17)
WAGO-I/O-SYSTEM 750 Appendix 277
750-8212 PFC200; G2; 2ETH RS
“Ethernet Interface Configuration” Group
Table 109: WBM “Ethernet Configuration” Page – “Ethernet Interface Configuration” Group
Parameter Meaning
A separate area is displayed for each interface in
Interface X<n>
the controller.
Enabled You can enable or disable the interface.
When Autonegotiation is enabled, the connection
Autonegotiation on modalities are negotiated automatically with the peer
devices.
Select the transmission speed and the duplex
method:
10 Mbit half-duplex Information can only be
Speed/Duplex sent or received.
100 Mbit half-duplex
Manual
Version 1.4.0, valid from FW Version 03.05.10(17)
278 Appendix WAGO-I/O-SYSTEM 750
750-8212 PFC200; G2; 2ETH RS
The settings for the hostname and domain are displayed on the “Configuration of
Host/Domain Name” page.
“Hostname” Group
Table 110: WBM “Configuration of Host and Domain Name” Page – “Hostname” Group
Parameter Explanation
If you have selected dynamic assignment of an IP
Currently used address via DHCP, the name of the host currently
being used is displayed.
Enter the product hostname here; it is then used if
the network interface is changed to a static IP
Configured
address or if no hostname is assigned per DHCP
response.
Table 111: WBM “Configuration of Host and Domain Name” Page – “Domain Name” Group
Parameter Explanation
If you have selected dynamic assignment of an IP
Currently used address via DHCP, the name of the domain
currently being used is displayed.
Enter the product domain name here; it is then used
if the network interface is changed to a static IP
Configured
address or if no domain name is assigned per
DHCP response.
If a domain name is supplied via a DHCP response, this is enabled in the system.
If there are several server network interfaces with DHCP, the last received
domain name is always valid.
Manual
Version 1.4.0, valid from FW Version 03.05.10(17)
WAGO-I/O-SYSTEM 750 Appendix 279
750-8212 PFC200; G2; 2ETH RS
If only the domain name configured here is to be valid, the configuration of the
DHCP server must be adapted so that no domain names are transferred in the
DHCP response.
Manual
Version 1.4.0, valid from FW Version 03.05.10(17)
280 Appendix WAGO-I/O-SYSTEM 750
750-8212 PFC200; G2; 2ETH RS
On the “Routing” page you can find settings and information on the routing
between the network interfaces.
Table 112: WBM “Routing” Page – “IP Forwarding through multiple interfaces” Group
Parameter Explanation
Specify whether forwarding of IP data packets is
allowed between different network interfaces.
If the box is not checked, the settings under “Static
Routes” are used, without allowing IP data packets
that arrive at the controller on one network interface
Enabled
to leave the controller on different network interface.
If the box is checked, IP packets can be forwarded
between the interfaces.
Other settings may be necessary on this WBM
page.
Click the [Submit] button to apply the change. The changes take effect
immediately.
Manual
Version 1.4.0, valid from FW Version 03.05.10(17)
WAGO-I/O-SYSTEM 750 Appendix 281
750-8212 PFC200; G2; 2ETH RS
“Default Static Routs” Group
Each configured static route has its own area in the display.
Click the [Submit] button to apply the changes. The changes take effect
immediately.
To add a new route, click the [Add] button. The change takes effect immediately.
Click the [Delete] button to delete an existing route. The change takes effect
immediately.
Manual
Version 1.4.0, valid from FW Version 03.05.10(17)
282 Appendix WAGO-I/O-SYSTEM 750
750-8212 PFC200; G2; 2ETH RS
Each dynamic route has its own area in the display. If no dynamic routes are
received via DHCP, “(no dynamic route)” appears.
“IP-Masquerading” Group
Click the [Submit] button to apply the changes. The changes take effect
immediately.
Click the [Add] button to add a new entry. The change takes effect immediately.
Click the [Delete] button to delete an existing entry. The change takes effect
immediately.
Manual
Version 1.4.0, valid from FW Version 03.05.10(17)
WAGO-I/O-SYSTEM 750 Appendix 283
750-8212 PFC200; G2; 2ETH RS
“Port-Forwarding” Group
Click the [Submit] button to apply the changes. The changes take effect
immediately.
Click the [Add] button to add a new entry. The change takes effect immediately.
Click the [Delete] button to delete an existing entry. The change takes effect
immediately.
Manual
Version 1.4.0, valid from FW Version 03.05.10(17)
284 Appendix WAGO-I/O-SYSTEM 750
750-8212 PFC200; G2; 2ETH RS
The date and time settings are displayed on the “Clock Settings” page.
Table 116: WBM “Clock Settings” Page – “Timezone and Format” Group
Parameter Explanation
Select the appropriate time zone for your location.
Default setting:
AST/ADT “Atlantic Standard Time,” Halifax
“Eastern Standard Time,” New York,
EST/EDT
Toronto
“Central Standard Time,” Chicago,
CST/CDT
Winnipeg
“Mountain Standard Time,” Denver,
MST/MDT
Edmonton
Timezone “Pacific Standard Time”, Los Angeles,
PST/PDT
Whitehouse
“Greenwich Mean Time”, GB, P, IRL,
GMT/BST
IS, …
“Central European Time,” B, DK, D,
CET/CEST
F, I, CRO, NL, …
“Eastern European Time,” BUL, FI,
EET/EEST
GR, TR, …
CST “China Standard Time”
JST “Japan/Korea Standard Time”
For time zones that cannot be selected with the
“Time Zone” parameter, enter the name of the time
zone or the country or city applicable to you.
TZ string
You can determine a valid name for the time zone
here:
http://www.timeanddate.com/time/map/
For switching between 12-hour and 24-hour time
Time Format
display
Click the [Submit] button to apply a change. The change takes effect
immediately.
Table 117: WBM “Clock Settings” Page – “UTC Time and Date” Group
Parameter Explanation
UTC Date Set the date.
UTC Time Set GMT time.
Click the [Submit] button to apply a change. The change takes effect
immediately.
Manual
Version 1.4.0, valid from FW Version 03.05.10(17)
WAGO-I/O-SYSTEM 750 Appendix 285
750-8212 PFC200; G2; 2ETH RS
“Local Time and Date” Group
Table 118: WBM “Clock Settings” Page – “Local Time and Date” Group
Parameter Explanation
Local Date Set the date.
Local Time Set the local time.
Click the [Submit] button to apply a change. The change takes effect
immediately.
Manual
Version 1.4.0, valid from FW Version 03.05.10(17)
286 Appendix WAGO-I/O-SYSTEM 750
750-8212 PFC200; G2; 2ETH RS
The settings for the serial interface are shown on the “Configuration of Serial
Interface RS232/485” page.
You can specify the application that the serial interface is to assigned after the
next controller reboot.
Table 119: WBM “Configuration of Serial Interface RS232” Page – “Assign Owner of Serial Interface”
Group
Parameters Explanation
Specify that the serial interface is assigned to the
Linux® Console
Linux® console.
Specify that the serial interface is not to be assigned
Unassigned (usage by
to any application and is available, so that the
applications, libraries,
CODESYS program, for example, can access it via
CODESYS)
function blocks.
Click [Change Owner] to apply the change. The change only takes effect once
the controller restarts. For this purpose, use the WBM reboot function. Do not
shut down the controller too early!
Manual
Version 1.4.0, valid from FW Version 03.05.10(17)
WAGO-I/O-SYSTEM 750 Appendix 287
750-8212 PFC200; G2; 2ETH RS
The settings for the service interface are shown on the “Configuration of the
Service Interface” page.
You can specify the application to which the service interface is assigned after
the next controller reboot.
Table 120: WBM “Configuration of Service Interface” Page – “Assign Owner of Service Interface”
Group
Parameters Explanation
Specify that the service interface is used for the
WAGO Service
WAGO Service communication or runtime system
Communication
communication.
Specify that the service interface is assigned to the
Linux Console
Linux® console.
Specify that the service interface is not to be
Unassigned (usage by
assigned to any application and is available, so that
applications, libraries,
the CODESYS program, for example, can access it
CODESYS)
via function blocks.
Click [Submit] to apply the change. The change only takes effect once the
controller restarts. For this purpose, use the WBM reboot function. Do not shut
down the controller too early!
Manual
Version 1.4.0, valid from FW Version 03.05.10(17)
288 Appendix WAGO-I/O-SYSTEM 750
750-8212 PFC200; G2; 2ETH RS
You can create a bootable image on the “Create Bootable Image” page.
Once the destination has been determined and output, it is then checked and the
results of this check are displayed below the settings:
Table 121: WBM “Create Bootable Image” Page – “Create bootable image from active partition”
Group
Parameters Meaning
The medium from which the boot was made is
Boot Device
displayed.
Depending on which medium has been booted, the
following destination is available for selection after
boot-up for the image to be generated:
Destination System was booted Target partition for
from “bootable image”
Memory Card Internal Flash
Internal memory Memory Card
Click [Start Copy] to start the copying procedure. If the outcome of the test is
positive, copying begins immediately. If errors have been detected, a
corresponding message is displayed and copying is not started. If warnings have
been issued, these are displayed again and you must then confirm that you still
wish to continue.
Manual
Version 1.4.0, valid from FW Version 03.05.10(17)
WAGO-I/O-SYSTEM 750 Appendix 289
750-8212 PFC200; G2; 2ETH RS
You can find the controller data backup settings on the “Firmware Backup” page.
Manual
Version 1.4.0, valid from FW Version 03.05.10(17)
290 Appendix WAGO-I/O-SYSTEM 750
750-8212 PFC200; G2; 2ETH RS
Manual
Version 1.4.0, valid from FW Version 03.05.10(17)
WAGO-I/O-SYSTEM 750 Appendix 291
750-8212 PFC200; G2; 2ETH RS
The settings for restoring the controller data are shown on the “Firmware
Restore” page.
Manual
Version 1.4.0, valid from FW Version 03.05.10(17)
292 Appendix WAGO-I/O-SYSTEM 750
750-8212 PFC200; G2; 2ETH RS
Reset by restore
A reset is performed when the system or settings are restored by CODESYS!
Manual
Version 1.4.0, valid from FW Version 03.05.10(17)
WAGO-I/O-SYSTEM 750 Appendix 293
750-8212 PFC200; G2; 2ETH RS
The settings for specifying the partition from which the system is started are
shown on the “Active System” page.
Table 125: WBM “Active System” Page – “System <n> (Internal Flash)” Group
Parameter Explanation
Active This shows whether the system is active.
This shows whether the system should be active
Configured
after the next reboot.
The system status is displayed here.
good The system is valid and can be used.
State
The system is not valid and cannot be
bad
used.
Click the respective [Activate] button to start the required system at the next
reboot.
Manual
Version 1.4.0, valid from FW Version 03.05.10(17)
294 Appendix WAGO-I/O-SYSTEM 750
750-8212 PFC200; G2; 2ETH RS
The “Mass Storage” page displays information and settings for the storage
media.
The group title contains the designation for the storage media (“Memory Card” or
“Internal Flash”) and, if this storage medium is also the active partition, the text
“Active Partition”.
“Devices” Group
An area with information on the storage medium is displayed for each storage
medium found.
Table 127: WBM “Mass Storage” Page – “Create new Filesystem on Memory Card” Group
Parameter Meaning
You can select the format in which the filesystem
should be created on the memory card.
Filesystem type The filesystem is created in Ext4 format.
Ext4
The files are not readable under Windows!
FAT The filesystem is created in FAT format.
Specify the name for the storage medium when
Label
formatted.
Data is deleted!
Any data stored in the storage medium is deleted during formatting!
Manual
Version 1.4.0, valid from FW Version 03.05.10(17)
WAGO-I/O-SYSTEM 750 Appendix 295
750-8212 PFC200; G2; 2ETH RS
On “Software Upload” page, you can install software packages on the product
from your PC.
Table 128: WBM “Software Uploads” Page – “Upload New Software” Group
Parameters Explanation
Software file The file name of your selected software package is
displayed, as long as you have not yet transferred it
to the product.
If you have not yet selected a package, “Choose ipk
file...” appears. Click the input field and select a file
with a software package on your PC.
The file with the software package is deleted from the device again after the
installation process. If this is not possible due to a processing error, it is deleted
no later than the next time the product restarts.
Manual
Version 1.4.0, valid from FW Version 03.05.10(17)
296 Appendix WAGO-I/O-SYSTEM 750
750-8212 PFC200; G2; 2ETH RS
The settings for various services are shown on the “Configuration of Network
Services” page.
“Telnet” Group
Click the [Submit] button to apply a change. The change takes effect
immediately.
“FTP” Group
Click the [Submit] button to apply a change. The change takes effect
immediately.
“FTPS” Group
Click the [Submit] button to apply a change. The change takes effect
immediately.
“HTTP” Group
Manual
Version 1.4.0, valid from FW Version 03.05.10(17)
WAGO-I/O-SYSTEM 750 Appendix 297
750-8212 PFC200; G2; 2ETH RS
Table 132: WBM “Configuration of Network Services” Page – “HTTP” Group
Parameters Explanation
Enable/disable the HTTP service.
HTTP
This service is disabled by default.
Click the [Submit] button to apply a change. The change takes effect
immediately.
“HTTPS” Group
Click the [Submit] button to apply a change. The change takes effect
immediately.
“I/O-CHECK” Group
Click the [Submit] button to apply a change. The change takes effect
immediately.
Manual
Version 1.4.0, valid from FW Version 03.05.10(17)
298 Appendix WAGO-I/O-SYSTEM 750
750-8212 PFC200; G2; 2ETH RS
The settings for the NTP service are shown on the “Configuration of NTP Client”
page.
Table 135: WBM “Configuration of NTP Client” Page – “NTP Client Configuration” Group
Parameters Explanation
Service enabled Enable/disabled time update.
Update interval (sec) Specify the update interval of the time server.
Enter here the IP addresses of up to 4 time servers.
Time server No. 1 is queried first. If no data is
Time Server <n>
accessible via this server, time server No. 2 is
queried, etc.
The NTP servers assigned if necessary by DHCP
Additionally assigned (or BootP) are displayed. If no NTP server has been
(DHCP) assigned by DHCP (or BootP), “(No additional
servers assigned)” is displayed.
To update the time regardless of interval, click the [Update Time] button.
Click the [Submit] button to apply the changes. The changes take effect
immediately.
Manual
Version 1.4.0, valid from FW Version 03.05.10(17)
WAGO-I/O-SYSTEM 750 Appendix 299
750-8212 PFC200; G2; 2ETH RS
The settings for various services of the enabled runtime system are displayed on
the “PLC Runtime Services” page.
Table 136: WBM “PLC Runtime Services” Page – “General Configuration” Group
Parameter Explanation
Port Authentication
Specify the new password for port authentication.
Password
Confirm Password Enter the new password again for confirmation.
Click the [Set Password] button to apply the change. The change takes effect
immediately.
This group only appears if the controller supports the CODESYS V2 runtime
system.
Table 137: WBM “PLC Runtime Services” Page – “CODESYS V2” Group
Parameter Explanation
This displays the status (enabled/disabled) of the
CODESYS 2 State
CODESYS V2 runtime system.
Enable or disable the CODESYS V2 Webserver for
Webserver enabled
the CODESYS web visualization.
Enable or disable the communication between the
Communication enabled CODESYS V2 runtime system and the
CODESYS V2 programming system.
Enter here the port number for communication with
Communication Port
the CODESYS V2 programming system. The default
Number
value is 2455.
Define here whether port authentication is enabled.
If this is enabled, the password specified under
Port authentication enabled
“General Configuration” must be entered when
logging in via CODESYS V2 IDE.
Manual
Version 1.4.0, valid from FW Version 03.05.10(17)
300 Appendix WAGO-I/O-SYSTEM 750
750-8212 PFC200; G2; 2ETH RS
“e!RUNTIME” Group
This group only appears if the controller supports the e!RUNTIME runtime
system.
Manual
Version 1.4.0, valid from FW Version 03.05.10(17)
WAGO-I/O-SYSTEM 750 Appendix 301
750-8212 PFC200; G2; 2ETH RS
The settings for the SSH service are shown on the “SSH Server Settings” page.
Table 139: WBM “SSH Server Settings” Page – “SSH Server” Group
Parameters Explanation
Service active You can enable/disable the SSH server.
Port Number Enter the port number.
Allow root login You can enable or inhibit root access.
Allow password login Enable or disable the password query function.
Click the [Submit] button to apply the changes. The changes take effect
immediately.
Manual
Version 1.4.0, valid from FW Version 03.05.10(17)
302 Appendix WAGO-I/O-SYSTEM 750
750-8212 PFC200; G2; 2ETH RS
The settings for the TFTP service are shown on the “TFTP Server” page.
Click the [Submit] button to apply the changes. The changes take effect
immediately.
Manual
Version 1.4.0, valid from FW Version 03.05.10(17)
WAGO-I/O-SYSTEM 750 Appendix 303
750-8212 PFC200; G2; 2ETH RS
The “DHCP Server Configuration” page displays the DHCP service settings.
Table 141: WBM “DHCP Server Configuration” Page – “DHCP Configuration Bridge <n>” Group
Parameter Explanation
Enable or disable the DHCP service for the interface
Service active
Xn.
Enter the start value of the available IP address
Start IP for Range
range.
Enter the end value of the available IP address
End IP for Range
range.
Specify the lease time here in seconds. 120 minutes
Lease time (min)
are entered by default.
This displays the static assignments of MAC IDs to
Static Hosts IP addresses. If no assignment was defined, “No
static hosts configured” is displayed.
You can add static MAC addresses or host names
Add Static Host
and IP addresses.
Enter a new static assignment, e.g.,
“01:02:03:04:05:06=192.168.1.20” or
MAC Address or Hostname
“hostname=192.168.1.20”.
You can enter 10 assignments or host names.
Enter the IP address.
Ip Address
You can enter 10 IP addresses.
Click the [Submit] button to apply the changes. The changes take effect
immediately.
To accept a new assignment click the [Add] button. The change takes effect
immediately.
Manual
Version 1.4.0, valid from FW Version 03.05.10(17)
304 Appendix WAGO-I/O-SYSTEM 750
750-8212 PFC200; G2; 2ETH RS
The “Configuration of DNS Server” page displays the DNS service settings.
Table 142: WBM “Configuration of DNS Server” Page – “DNS Server” Group
Parameter Explanation
Service active You can enable/disable the DNS server service.
Select the operating mode of the DNS server.
Requests are buffered to optimize
Mode Proxy
throughput.
Relay All requests are routed directly.
This displays the names for IP addresses. If no
Static Hosts assignment was defined, “No static hosts
configured” is displayed.
You can add static IP addresses and host names
Add Static Host
below.
Enter a new static assignment,
IP Address e.g., “192.168.1.20:hostname”.
You can enter 10 assignments.
Hostname Enter a host name.
Click the [Submit] button to apply the changes. The changes take effect
immediately.
To accept a new assignment click the [Add] button. The change takes effect
immediately.
Manual
Version 1.4.0, valid from FW Version 03.05.10(17)
WAGO-I/O-SYSTEM 750 Appendix 305
750-8212 PFC200; G2; 2ETH RS
On the “Status overview” page, you can find information about cloud access.
“Service” Group
Manual
Version 1.4.0, valid from FW Version 03.05.10(17)
306 Appendix WAGO-I/O-SYSTEM 750
750-8212 PFC200; G2; 2ETH RS
You can find settings and information for cloud access on the “Configuration of
Connection <n>” page.
“Configuration” Group
The parameters indicated depend on the cloud platform setting and, if applicable,
on other settings in this group.
The dependencies are shown in a separate table.
Manual
Version 1.4.0, valid from FW Version 03.05.10(17)
WAGO-I/O-SYSTEM 750 Appendix 307
750-8212 PFC200; G2; 2ETH RS
Table 145: WBM “Configuration of Connection <n>” Page – “Configuration” Group
Parameter Explanation
Enter the path here to the file encoded in PEM
Certification file
format that is used for cloud service authentication.
Enter the path to the file encoded in PEM format that
Key file contains the private key for cloud service
authentication.
Here, you can specify whether the connection to the
cloud platform is to be set up using the Websocket
protocol via Port 443.
Use websockets
If this checkbox is not selected, the connection to
the cloud platform is set up using the MQTT protocol
via Port 8883.
Here, you can set whether the data is to be
Use compression
compressed using GZIP compression.
Data Protocol Here you can select the data protocol.
Specify in which memory the cache for the data
telegrams should be created.
Cache mode This selection field is only enabled if a correctly
formatted SD card is inserted (more information is
available in Application Note A500920).
You can specify whether a last will message should
Last Will
be enabled/disabled.
You can specify the topic under which the last will
(Last Will) Topic
messages should be sent.
You can enter the message you wish to use as the
(Last Will) Message
last will message.
You can specify the “Quality of Service” (QoS) of the
(Last Will) QoS
last will message.
Here, you can set whether the previous last-will
(Last Will) Retain message sent under a topic from the broker is to be
handled as a retained message.
Specify whether a device info message should be
generated that informs the cloud service of the basic
Device info
configuration of the controller (more information is
available in the Application Note A500920).
Specify whether device state messages should be
generated that inform the cloud service about
Device status changes in the mode selector switch and the LEDs
(more information is available in the Application
Note A500920).
Specify whether the integrated standard commands
should be supported (list of standard commands is
Standard commands available in the Application Note A500920).
If the checkbox is disabled, only the commands
defined in the IEC program are supported.
Manual
Version 1.4.0, valid from FW Version 03.05.10(17)
308 Appendix WAGO-I/O-SYSTEM 750
750-8212 PFC200; G2; 2ETH RS
Table 145: WBM “Configuration of Connection <n>” Page – “Configuration” Group
Parameter Explanation
You have the option of creating your own property
for the individual MQTT messages to the Azure
cloud.
This parameter is optional; i.e., if the field is left
blank, this property is not sent.
The following placeholders are available to create
Application property this property:
template • <m>: Message type
• <p>: Protocol version
• <d>: Device ID
Examples:
• MyKey=HelloWorld_<m>
• TestKey=<m>/<p>/<d>
• DeviceId=<d>
The changes only take effect after the controller restarts. For this purpose, use
the WBM reboot function. Do not shut down the controller too early!
The following table shows the dependencies of the selection and input fields for
the selected cloud platform.
Table 146: Dependencies of the Selection and Input Fields for the Selected Cloud Platform
Authen
Cloud Platform Data Protocol
tication
Amazon Web Services
Sparkplug payload B
Shared Access Key
X.509 Certificate
WAGO Protocol
Last Will
WAGO Cloud
Native MQTT
IBM Cloud
Enabled X X X X X X
Cloud platform X X X X X X
Hostname X X X X X X
Port number X X (X) X
Device ID X X
Client ID > > > X X X X
Authentication X
Activation Key X > X
Clean Session X (X) (X) X
TLS X X (X) X
CA file X X X X
User X X
Manual
Version 1.4.0, valid from FW Version 03.05.10(17)
WAGO-I/O-SYSTEM 750 Appendix 309
750-8212 PFC200; G2; 2ETH RS
Table 146: Dependencies of the Selection and Input Fields for the Selected Cloud Platform
Authen
Cloud Platform Data Protocol
tication
Sparkplug payload B
Shared Access Key
X.509 Certificate
WAGO Protocol
Last Will
WAGO Cloud
Native MQTT
IBM Cloud
Selection or Input Field
Azure
Password X X
Certification file > X X X X
Key file > X X X X
Use websockets X X
Use compression X X > X X X
Data Protocol X X X (X)
• WAGO Protocol X X X
• WAGO Protocol 1.5 X X X
• Native MQTT X X X (X)
• Sparkplug payload B X X
Cache mode X X X X X X
Last Will X X X X
• Last Will Topic > > > > X
• Last Will Message > > > > X
• Last Will QoS > > > > X
• Last Will Retain > > (>) > X
Device info X > > > X X
Device status X > > > X X
Standard commands X > > X X
Application property
X
template
X: Visible and active
(X): Visible, but not active
>: Visible and active; dependent on other settings
(>): Visible, but not active; dependent on other settings
Manual
Version 1.4.0, valid from FW Version 03.05.10(17)
310 Appendix WAGO-I/O-SYSTEM 750
750-8212 PFC200; G2; 2ETH RS
The general settings for SNMP are given on the “Configuration of General SNMP
Parameters” page.
Table 147: WBM “Configuration of General SNMP Parameters” Page – “General SNMP
Configuration” Group
Parameter Explanation
Service active Activate/deactivate the SNMP service.
Name of device Enter here the device name (sysName).
Description Enter here the device description (sysDescription).
Physical location Enter here the location of the device (sysLocation).
Contact Enter here the email contact address (sysContact).
Object ID Enter here the object ID (sysOID).
Click the [Submit] button to apply the changes. The changes only take effect
after restarting the controller. For this purpose, use the WBM reboot function. Do
not shut down the controller too early!
Manual
Version 1.4.0, valid from FW Version 03.05.10(17)
WAGO-I/O-SYSTEM 750 Appendix 311
750-8212 PFC200; G2; 2ETH RS
The general settings for SNMP v1/v2c are shown on the “Configuration of SNMP
v1/v2c Parameters” page.
Table 148: WBM “Configuration of SNMP v1/v2c Parameters” Page – “SNMP v1/v2c Manager
Configuration” Group
Parameters Explanation
It is displayed the SNMP protocol for v1/v2c is
Protocol enabled enabled. The local community name is deleted when
the protocol is disabled.
Specify the community name for the SNMP
manager configuration. The community name can
establish relationships between SNMP managers
and agents who are respectively referred to as
“Community” and who control identification and
Local Community Name access between SNMP participants.
The community name can be up to 32 characters
long and must not include spaces.
To use the SNMP protocol, a valid community name
must always be specified. The default community
name is “public.”
Click the [Submit] button to apply the changes. The changes only take effect
after the controller restarts. For this purpose, use the WBM reboot function. Do
not shut down the controller too early!
Manual
Version 1.4.0, valid from FW Version 03.05.10(17)
312 Appendix WAGO-I/O-SYSTEM 750
750-8212 PFC200; G2; 2ETH RS
“Actually configured Trap Receivers” Group
Table 149: WBM “Configuration of SNMP v1/v2c Parameters” Page – “Actually Configured Trap
Receivers” Group
Parameters Meaning
Each configured trap receiver has its own area in the display. If no trap receiver
has been configured, “(no trap receivers configured)” is displayed.
The IP address for the trap receiver (management
IP Address
station) is displayed.
This displays the community name for the trap
Community Name receiver configuration. The community name can be
evaluated by the trap receiver.
This displays the SNMP version, via which the traps
Version are sent: v1 or v2c (traps higher than v3 are
displayed in a separate form).
Add new Trap Receiver In this area, you can enter a new trap receiver.
Specify the IP address for the new trap receiver
IP Address
(management station).
Specify the community name for the new trap
receiver configuration. The community name can be
Community Name evaluated by the trap receiver.
The community name can be up to 32 characters
long and must not include spaces.
Specify the SNMP version that will send the traps:
Version v1 or v2c (traps higher than v3 are configured in a
separate form).
The changes only take effect after the controller restarts. For this purpose, use
the WBM reboot function. Do not shut down the controller too early!
Manual
Version 1.4.0, valid from FW Version 03.05.10(17)
WAGO-I/O-SYSTEM 750 Appendix 313
750-8212 PFC200; G2; 2ETH RS
The general settings for SNMP v3 are shown on the “Configuration of SNMP v3
Users” page.
Table 150: WBM “Configuration of SNMP v3” Page – “Actually configured v3 Users” Group
Parameters Meaning
Each configured v3 user has its own area in the
User <n> display. If no v3 user has been configured, “(no trap
receivers configured)” is displayed.
Security Authentication
The user name is displayed.
Name
The authentication type for the SNMP v3 packets is
displayed.
Authentication Type
Possible values:
- Use no authentication (“None”)
- Message Digest 5 (“MD5”)
- Secure Hash Algorithm (“SHA”)
Authentication Key The authentication key is displayed.
The encryption algorithm for the SNMP message is
displayed.
Privacy
Possible values:
- No encryption (“None”)
- Data Encryption Standard (“DES”)
- Advanced Encryption Standard (“AES”)
The key for encryption of the SNMP message is
Privacy Key displayed. If nothing is displayed, the “authentication
key” is automatically used.
The IP address of a trap receiver for v3 traps is
Notification Receiver IP displayed. If no v3 traps are to be sent for this user,
this field remains blank.
In this area, you can enter a new v3 user. You can
Add new v3 User
create up to 10 users.
Enter the user name. This name must be unique; a
pre-existing user name is not accepted when
Security Authentication entered. The name must be min. 8 and max. 32
Name characters long and contain lower case letters
(a … z), upper case letters (A … Z), numbers
(0 … 9), special characters !()*~'.-_ but no spaces.
Manual
Version 1.4.0, valid from FW Version 03.05.10(17)
314 Appendix WAGO-I/O-SYSTEM 750
750-8212 PFC200; G2; 2ETH RS
Table 150: WBM “Configuration of SNMP v3” Page – “Actually configured v3 Users” Group
Parameters Meaning
Specify the authentication type for the SNMP v3
packets.
Authentication Type
Possible values:
- Use no authentication (“None”)
- Message Digest 5 (“MD5”)
- Secure Hash Algorithm (“SHA”)
Specify the authentication key. The key must be
min. 8 and max. 32 characters long and contain
Authentication Key (min. 8
lower case letters (a … z), upper case letters
char.)
(A … Z), numbers (0 … 9), special characters !()*~'.-
_ but no spaces.
Specify the encryption algorithm for the SNMP
message.
Privacy
Possible values:
- No encryption (“None”)
- Data Encryption Standard (“DES”)
- Advanced Encryption Standard (“AES”)
Enter the key for encryption of the SNMP message.
If nothing is specified here, the “authentication key”
is automatically used. The key must be min. 8 and
Privacy Key (min. 8 char.)
max. 32 characters long and contain lower case
letters (a … z), upper case letters (A … Z), numbers
(0 … 9), special characters !()*~'.-_ but no spaces.
Specify an IP address for a trap receiver for v3
Notification Receiver IP traps. If no v3 traps are to be sent for this user, this
field remains blank.
The changes only take effect after the controller restarts. For this purpose, use
the WBM reboot function. Do not shut down the controller too early!
Manual
Version 1.4.0, valid from FW Version 03.05.10(17)
WAGO-I/O-SYSTEM 750 Appendix 315
750-8212 PFC200; G2; 2ETH RS
The settings for user administration are displayed on the “WBM User
Configuration” page.
Changing Passwords
The initial passwords as delivered are documented in this manual and therefore
do not provide sufficient protection. Change the passwords to meet your
particular needs!
Table 151: WBM “WBM User Configuration” Page – “Change Passwords” Group
Parameter Explanation
Select the user (“User” or “Admin”) to whom you
Select User
want to assign a new password.
Old Password Enter the current password here for authentication.
Enter the new password here for the user selected
under “Select User.”
Permitted characters for the password are the
New Password
following ASCII characters: a … z, A … Z, 0 … 9,
blank spaces and special characters:
!?%+=()_ #"-/`<>*;,:.
Confirm Password Enter the new password again here for confirmation.
Click the [Submit] button to apply a change. The change takes effect
immediately.
Manual
Version 1.4.0, valid from FW Version 03.05.10(17)
316 Appendix WAGO-I/O-SYSTEM 750
750-8212 PFC200; G2; 2ETH RS
The settings for the OPC UA service are shown on the “OPC UA Configuration”
page.
Table 153: WBM “OPC UA Configuration” Page – “General OPC UA Server Configuration” Group
Parameter Explanation
Activate or deactivate the WAGO OPC UA Server
Service enabled
here.
Enter the configuration names the controller
CTRL configuration name
contains in the PLC Open Device Set here.
Select the log level here. The following values can
be set: Info / Debug / Warning / Error.
With log level “Error,” only error messages are read
Log level out; with log level “Info,” status messages are read
out too. The specific log level selection affects
server reaction time. Therefore, select the lowest
level necessary; e.g., “Debug” for in-depth analyses.
Access rights to the data provided by the server are
set here.
Unlimited anonymous An unregistered user can view, read
Enabled
access and write all variables.
Complete access to the data requires
Disabled
user logon with the appropriate rights.
Manual
Version 1.4.0, valid from FW Version 03.05.10(17)
WAGO-I/O-SYSTEM 750 Appendix 317
750-8212 PFC200; G2; 2ETH RS
“OPC UA Endpoints” Group
Manual
Version 1.4.0, valid from FW Version 03.05.10(17)
318 Appendix WAGO-I/O-SYSTEM 750
750-8212 PFC200; G2; 2ETH RS
“OPC UA Security Settings” Group
Table 155: WBM “OPC UA Configuration” Page – “OPC UA Security Settings” Group
Parameter Explanation
The verification is activated or deactivated here.
A connection to all clients is
Enabled
Trust all clients permitted. No security!
Connection is only allowed to clients
Disabled
with secure certificates.
The URI check can be activated or deactivated here.
A deactivated URI check enables connection to an
URI Check Application
OPC server even if the URI on the server URI is
different from the URI in the certificates.
The time can be activated or deactivated here.
Certificates may have an expiration date. This date
Error Certificate Time is checked against the current usage time on the
device. The check cannot be run successfully if the
time is incorrectly set on the device.
The time stamp check can be activated or
deactivated here.
CA certificates contain a validity time stamp from the
Certificate Issuer Time
manufacturer. This stamp is used when checking
Invalid
the time on the server hardware. If the time setting
on the server hardware is incorrect or is missing
entirely, the certificate may be indicated as invalid.
The accessibility check of the saving location for
withdrawn certificates can be activated or
deactivated here.
Certificate Revocation
Each certificate can have a location for withdrawn
Unknown
certificates. If network problems or other causes
prevent access to the specified location, the
certificate is not accepted.
The accessibility check of the storage location for
withdrawn certificates can be activated or
deactivated here.
Certificate Issuer
Each certificate of a certification location (CA
Revocation Unknown
certificate) can contain an entry for the withdrawn
certificate saving location. If this location cannot be
reached, the server will refuse the certificate.
Manual
Version 1.4.0, valid from FW Version 03.05.10(17)
WAGO-I/O-SYSTEM 750 Appendix 319
750-8212 PFC200; G2; 2ETH RS
The “Modbus Services Configuration” page displays the settings for various
Modbus® services. The groups only appear if the e!RUNTIME system is
enabled. Otherwise an information text is displayed.
Table 156: WBM “Modbus Services Configuration” Page – “Modbus TCP” Group
Parameters Explanation
Service active Disable or enable the Modbus/TCP service.
Click the [Submit] button to apply the changes. The change takes effect
immediately.
Table 157: WBM “Modbus Services Configuration” Page – “Modbus UDP” Group
Parameters Explanation
Service active Disable/enable the Modbus UDP service.
Click the [Submit] button to apply the changes. The change takes effect
immediately.
Manual
Version 1.4.0, valid from FW Version 03.05.10(17)
320 Appendix WAGO-I/O-SYSTEM 750
750-8212 PFC200; G2; 2ETH RS
The “OpenVPN / IPsec Configuration” page displays the settings for OpenVPN
and IPsec.
“OpenVPN” Group
To select a file on the PC, click the Choose file … selection field.
To transfer the selected file from the PC to the product, click [Upload] button.
The changes only take effect after the product restarts. For this purpose, use the
WBM reboot function. Do not switch off the product too early!
Manual
Version 1.4.0, valid from FW Version 03.05.10(17)
WAGO-I/O-SYSTEM 750 Appendix 321
750-8212 PFC200; G2; 2ETH RS
“IPsec” Group
To select a file on the PC, click the Choose file … selection field.
To transfer the selected file from the PC to the product, click [Upload] button.
The changes only take effect after the product restarts. For this purpose, use the
WBM reboot function. Do not switch off the product too early!
Manual
Version 1.4.0, valid from FW Version 03.05.10(17)
322 Appendix WAGO-I/O-SYSTEM 750
750-8212 PFC200; G2; 2ETH RS
The “General Firewall Configuration” page displays the global firewall settings.
Table 160: WBM “General Firewall Configuration” Page – “Global Firewall Parameter” Group
Parameter Explanation
Enables/disables the complete functionality of the
firewall. This setting has the highest priority. If the
firewall is disabled, all other settings have no direct
Firewall enabled entirely effect. The configuration of the other parameters is
possible nevertheless so that you can set the
firewall parameters correctly before you enable the
firewall.
ICMP echo broadcast Enable or disable the “ICMP echo broadcast”
protection protection.
Max. UDP connections per You can specify the maximum number of UDP
second connections per second.
Max. TCP connections per You can specify the maximum number of TCP
second connections per second.
Click [Submit] to apply the change. The change takes effect immediately.
Manual
Version 1.4.0, valid from FW Version 03.05.10(17)
WAGO-I/O-SYSTEM 750 Appendix 323
750-8212 PFC200; G2; 2ETH RS
The individual interfaces for the firewall settings are displayed on the “Interface
Configuration” page.
Table 161: WBM “Interface Configuration” Page – “Firewall Configuration Bridge <n> / VPN” Group
Parameter Explanation
Firewall enabled for Enable or disable the firewall for the respective
Interface bridge.
Enable or disable the “ICMP echo” protection for the
ICMP echo protection
respective bridge.
You can specify the maximum number of “ICMP
ICMP echo limit per second pings” per second.
“0” = “Disabled”
You can specify the maximum number of “ICMP
ICMP burst limit
echo bursts” per second.
(0 = disabled)
“0” = “Disabled”
Telnet:
This button is only
displayed if Telnet is
supported.
FTP
FTPS
HTTP
HTTPS
Enable or disable the
I/O-CHECK
firewall for the respective
PLC Runtime service.
Service enabled PLC WebVisu – The services themselves
direct link (port 8080) must be enabled or
SSH disabled separately on the
TFTP “Ports and Services” page.
BootP/DHCP
DNS
Modbus TCP
Modbus UDP
SNMP
OPC UA
PROFINET IO
Click the [Submit] button to apply the change. The change takes effect
immediately.
Manual
Version 1.4.0, valid from FW Version 03.05.10(17)
324 Appendix WAGO-I/O-SYSTEM 750
750-8212 PFC200; G2; 2ETH RS
The firewall ports listed in the following table are open by default on controllers
with telecontrol functionality. The corresponding telecontrol services can be
executed via these ports without the firewall blocking their communication.
Manual
Version 1.4.0, valid from FW Version 03.05.10(17)
WAGO-I/O-SYSTEM 750 Appendix 325
750-8212 PFC200; G2; 2ETH RS
The “Configuration of MAC address filter” page displays the firewall configuration
on the ETHERNET level.
The “MAC Address Filter Whitelist” contains a default entry with the following
values:
If you enable the default entry, this already allows communication between
different WAGO devices in the network.
Table 163: WBM “Configuration of MAC Address Filter” Page – “Global MAC address filter state”
Group
Parameters Explanation
Filter enabled Enable or disable the global MAC address filter.
Click the [Submit] button to apply the change. The change takes effect
immediately.
Manual
Version 1.4.0, valid from FW Version 03.05.10(17)
326 Appendix WAGO-I/O-SYSTEM 750
750-8212 PFC200; G2; 2ETH RS
“MAC address filter state Bridge <n>” Group
Table 164: WBM “Configuration of MAC Address Filter” Page – “MAC address filter state Bridge <n>”
Group
Parameter Explanation
Enable or disable here the MAC address filter for the
Filter enabled
specific bridge.
Click the [Submit] button to apply the change. The change takes effect
immediately.
Table 165: WBM “Configuration of MAC Address Filter” Page – “MAC address filter whitelist” Group
Parameters Explanation
MAC address Displays the MAC address of the relevant list entry.
This displays the MAC mask of the relevant list
MAC mask
entry.
Filter enabled Enable or disable the filter for the relevant list entry.
Add filter to whitelist Create a new list entry.
Enter here the MAC address for a new list entry.
MAC address
You can enter 10 filters.
MAC mask Enter the MAC mask for the new list entry.
Filter enabled Enable or disable the filter for the new list entry.
Click the [Submit] button to apply the change. The change takes effect
immediately.
Click the appropriate [Delete] button to remove an existing list entry. The change
takes effect immediately.
Click [Add] to accept a new list entry. You can enter 10 filters. The change takes
effect immediately.
Manual
Version 1.4.0, valid from FW Version 03.05.10(17)
WAGO-I/O-SYSTEM 750 Appendix 327
750-8212 PFC200; G2; 2ETH RS
The “Configuration of User Filter” page displays the settings for custom firewall
filters.
Table 166: WBM “Configuration of User Filter” Page – “User Filter” Group
Parameters Meaning
This displays whether the network participant is
Policy
permitted or excluded by the filter.
The source IP address for the respective filter is
Source IP address
displayed.
This displays the source netmask for the respective
Source Netmask
filter.
The source port number for the respective filter is
Source Port
displayed.
The destination IP address for the respective filter is
Destination IP address
displayed.
The destination netmask for the respective filter is
Destination Netmask
displayed.
The destination port number for the respective filter
Destination Port
is displayed.
The permitted protocols for the respective filter is
Protocol
displayed.
The permitted interfaces for the respective filter are
Input interface
displayed.
You can create up to 10 filters.
You only have to enter values in the fields that are to
Add new user filter
be set for the filter. At least one value must be
entered, all other fields can remain empty.
Select here whether the network devices is to be
allowed or excluded by the filter.
Policy
Allow The network device is permitted.
Drop The network device is excluded.
Source IP address Enter here the source IP address for the new filter.
Enter here the source network mask for the new
Source netmask
filter.
Source port Enter here the source port address for the new filter.
Enter here the destination IP address for the new
Destination IP address
filter.
Enter here the destination network mask for the new
Destination subnet mask
filter.
Enter here the destination port address for the new
Destination port
filter.
Manual
Version 1.4.0, valid from FW Version 03.05.10(17)
328 Appendix WAGO-I/O-SYSTEM 750
750-8212 PFC200; G2; 2ETH RS
Table 166: WBM “Configuration of User Filter” Page – “User Filter” Group
Parameters Meaning
Enter here the protocols for the new filter.
TCP/ The TCP service and UDP service are
Protocol UDP filtered.
TCP The TCP service is filtered.
UDP The UDP service is filtered.
Enter here the interfaces for the new filter.
Any All interfaces are filtered.
The interfaces assigned for bridge <n> are
Input interface Bridge
filtered. Only the configured bridges are
<n>
displayed.
VPN The VPN interface is filtered.
Click [Add] to apply the new filter. The change takes effect immediately.
Click the [Delete] button to delete an existing filter. The change takes effect
immediately.
Manual
Version 1.4.0, valid from FW Version 03.05.10(17)
WAGO-I/O-SYSTEM 750 Appendix 329
750-8212 PFC200; G2; 2ETH RS
On the “Certificates” page, you will find options to install or delete certificates and
keys.
Table 167: WBM “Configuration of OpenVPN and IPsec” Page – “Certificate List” Group
Parameters Explanation
The loaded certificates are displayed. If no
<certificate name> certificate has been loaded. “No certificates existing”
is displayed.
To select a file on the PC, click the Choose file … selection field.
To transfer the selected file PC to the product, click the [Upload] button. The
changes take effect immediately.
The certificates are stored in the directory “/etc/certificates/” and the keys in the
directory “/etc/certificates/keys/”.
Table 168: WBM “Configuration of OpenVPN and IPsec” Page – “Private Key List” Group
Parameters Meaning
The loaded keys are displayed. If no key has been
<private key name>
loaded, “No private keys existing” is displayed.
To select a file on the PC, click the Choose file … selection field.
To transfer the selected file PC to the product, click the [Upload] button. The
changes take effect immediately.
The certificates are stored in the directory “/etc/certificates/” and the keys in the
directory “/etc/certificates/keys/”.
Manual
Version 1.4.0, valid from FW Version 03.05.10(17)
330 Appendix WAGO-I/O-SYSTEM 750
750-8212 PFC200; G2; 2ETH RS
The network security settings are found on the “Security Settings” page.
Click the [Submit] button to apply a change. The change takes effect
immediately.
Manual
Version 1.4.0, valid from FW Version 03.05.10(17)
WAGO-I/O-SYSTEM 750 Appendix 331
750-8212 PFC200; G2; 2ETH RS
The network security settings are available on the “Advanced Intrusion Detection
Environment (AIDE)” page.
Table 170: WBM “Advanced Intrusion Detection Environment (AIDE)” Page – “Run AIDE check at
startup” Group
Parameter Explanation
Here, you can activate/deactivate the “AIDE check”
Service active
when the controller is started.
Click the [Submit] button to apply the changes. The changes only take effect
when the controller restarts.
Table 171: WBM “Advanced Intrusion Detection Environment (AIDE)” Page – “Control AIDE and
show log” Group
Parameter Explanation
Select here the action to be executed.
readlog The log data are displayed.
The database is initialized and filled with
init
the current values.
Select Action The current values are compared against
check
the values stored in the database.
The current values are compared with the
update values stored in the database and the
database then updated.
Activate display of only the last n messages. You
Read only the last n also specify the number of messages to be
displayed.
Select the checkbox to enable cyclic refresh.
Enter the cycle time in seconds in which a cyclic
Automatic refresh interval
refresh is performed. The label of the button
(sec)
(“Refresh”/“Start“/“Stop”) changes depending on
status.
Click [Refresh] to update the display. The button is only displayed if the cyclic
refresh is not enabled.
To enable cyclic refresh, click the [Start] button. The button is only displayed if
cyclic refresh is enabled and has not yet started.
To stop cyclic refresh again, click the [Stop] button. The button only appears if
cyclic refresh is enabled.
Manual
Version 1.4.0, valid from FW Version 03.05.10(17)
332 Appendix WAGO-I/O-SYSTEM 750
750-8212 PFC200; G2; 2ETH RS
update is stopped until you call up the “Advanced Intrusion Detection
Environment (AIDE)” page again.
Manual
Version 1.4.0, valid from FW Version 03.05.10(17)
WAGO-I/O-SYSTEM 750 Appendix 333
750-8212 PFC200; G2; 2ETH RS
The settings for displaying diagnostic messages are shown on the “Diagnostic
Information” page.
To refresh the display or to enable cyclic refresh, click the [Refresh] button. This
button is only displayed if the cyclic refresh is not enabled.
To enable cyclic refresh, click the [Start] button. The button is only displayed if
cyclic refresh is enabled and has not yet started.
To stop cyclic refresh again, click the [Stop] button. The button only appears if
cyclic refresh is enabled.
The cyclical refresh is performed for as long as the “Diagnostic Information” page
is open. If you change the WBM page, the refresh is stopped until you call up the
“Diagnostic Information” page again.
Manual
Version 1.4.0, valid from FW Version 03.05.10(17)
334 Appendix WAGO-I/O-SYSTEM 750
750-8212 PFC200; G2; 2ETH RS
This menu contains other submenus with information on the controller and
network.
Manual
Version 1.4.0, valid from FW Version 03.05.10(17)
WAGO-I/O-SYSTEM 750 Appendix 335
750-8212 PFC200; G2; 2ETH RS
In this submenu, the network and interface properties of the controller are
displayed.
Manual
Version 1.4.0, valid from FW Version 03.05.10(17)
336 Appendix WAGO-I/O-SYSTEM 750
750-8212 PFC200; G2; 2ETH RS
This menu contains other submenus with information and settings for the runtime
system.
This submenu contains other submenus with information on the runtime system
and PLC program.
Menu items 2 … 6 only appear if CODESYS V2 is set as the runtime system.
Manual
Version 1.4.0, valid from FW Version 03.05.10(17)
WAGO-I/O-SYSTEM 750 Appendix 337
750-8212 PFC200; G2; 2ETH RS
Table 178: “PLC Runtime” > “Information” > “Runtime Version” Submenu
Parameters Explanation
The version of the currently enabled runtime system
Version is shown. If the runtime system is disabled, “None”
is displayed.
Table 179: “PLC Runtime” > “Information” > “Webserver Version” Submenu
Parameters Explanation
Version The Webserver version is displayed.
Manual
Version 1.4.0, valid from FW Version 03.05.10(17)
338 Appendix WAGO-I/O-SYSTEM 750
750-8212 PFC200; G2; 2ETH RS
In this submenu, the number of tasks in the PLC program are displayed.
The submenu only appears when CODESYS V2 is enabled as the runtime
system.
Table 181: “PLC Runtime” > “Information” > “Number of Tasks” Submenu
Parameters Explanation
Number of Tasks The number of tasks in the PLC program is shown.
Table 182: “PLC Runtime” > “Information” > “Project Details” Submenu
Parameters Explanation
Date Display of project information that the programmer
Title entered in the PLC program (in the programming
software under Project > Project Information ...)
Version
Descriptive text with up to 1024 characters is
Author displayed under “Description”.
Description
In this submenu, tasks from the PLC program are displayed. An entry is
generated for each task.
The submenu only appears when CODESYS V2 is enabled as the runtime
system.
Manual
Version 1.4.0, valid from FW Version 03.05.10(17)
WAGO-I/O-SYSTEM 750 Appendix 339
750-8212 PFC200; G2; 2ETH RS
Table 184: “PLC Runtime” > “Information” > “Tasks” > “Task n” Submenu
Parameters Explanation
Cycle count Number of task cycles since the system start
Cycle time (µsec) Currently measured task cycle time for the task
Minimum task cycle time for the task since the
Cycle time min (µsec)
system start
Maximum task cycle time for the task since the
Cycle time max (µsec)
system start
Cycle time avg (µsec) Average task cycle time since the system start
Status Task status (e.g., RUN, STOP)
Mode Task execution mode (e.g., in cycles)
Priority Set task priority
Interval (msec) Set task interval
This submenu contains other submenus with general settings for the runtime
system.
Manual
Version 1.4.0, valid from FW Version 03.05.10(17)
340 Appendix WAGO-I/O-SYSTEM 750
750-8212 PFC200; G2; 2ETH RS
Table 186: “PLC Runtime” > “General Configuration” > “PLC Runtime Version” Submenu
Menu Item Explanation
0. Back to … Back to the higher-level menu
1. None No runtime system is enabled.
2. CODESYS 2 The CODESYS V2 runtime system is enabled.
3. e!RUNTIME The e!RUNTIME runtime system is enabled.
In this submenu, define if the home directory for the runtime system should be
moved to the memory card.
Table 187: “PLC Runtime” > “General Configuration” > “Home Dir On SD Card” Submenu
Menu Item Explanation
0. Back to … Back to the higher-level menu
1. Enable The home directory is moved to the memory card.
2. Disable The home directory is stored in the internal memory.
Manual
Version 1.4.0, valid from FW Version 03.05.10(17)
WAGO-I/O-SYSTEM 750 Appendix 341
750-8212 PFC200; G2; 2ETH RS
This submenu contains information and settings for the Web visualization.
Manual
Version 1.4.0, valid from FW Version 03.05.10(17)
342 Appendix WAGO-I/O-SYSTEM 750
750-8212 PFC200; G2; 2ETH RS
This menu contains other submenus with settings for the network configuration.
This submenu contains the “Hostname” and “Domain Name” submenu with
setting options for the general TCP/IP parameters.
Manual
Version 1.4.0, valid from FW Version 03.05.10(17)
WAGO-I/O-SYSTEM 750 Appendix 343
750-8212 PFC200; G2; 2ETH RS
In this submenu, you can set the domain name of the controller.
Table 192: “Networking” > “Host/Domain Name” > “Domain Name” Submenu
Parameters Explanation
Enter the domain name.
Enter new Domain Name
The default entry is “localdomain.lan”.
This submenu contains other submenus with the TCP/IP settings for the
ETHERNET interfaces.
Manual
Version 1.4.0, valid from FW Version 03.05.10(17)
344 Appendix WAGO-I/O-SYSTEM 750
750-8212 PFC200; G2; 2ETH RS
This submenu contains other submenus with settings for the ETHERNET
interfaces.
Table 195: “Networking” > “TCP/IP” > “IP Address” Submenu > “Xn”
Menu Item Submenu Item / Explanation
0. Back to … Back to the higher-level menu
Select a static or dynamic IP address.
0. Back to … Back to the higher-level menu
Static IP addressing
1. Type of IP Address When selecting static addressing, the
1. Static IP
Configuration IP address and subnet mask are then
retrieved.
2. DHCP Dynamic IP addressing
3. BootP Dynamic IP addressing
2. IP Address Enter here a static IP address.
3. Subnet Mask Enter the subnet mask.
Manual
Version 1.4.0, valid from FW Version 03.05.10(17)
WAGO-I/O-SYSTEM 750 Appendix 345
750-8212 PFC200; G2; 2ETH RS
This submenu contains other submenus with settings for the default gateway.
Table 197: “Networking” > “TCP/IP” > “Default Gateway” > “Default Gateway n” Submenu
Menu Item Submenu Item / Explanation
0. Back to … Back to the higher-level menu
Set here whether the selected default gateway is to
be used.
1. State 0. Back to … Back to the higher-level menu
1. Disabled The default gateway is not used.
2. Enabled The default gateway is used.
2. Gateway IP Address Enter the address of the default gateway.
Set here a number as the metric.
3. Gateway Metric The default value for the metric is 20, the lowest
value is 0, the highest value is 4.294.967.295.
Manual
Version 1.4.0, valid from FW Version 03.05.10(17)
346 Appendix WAGO-I/O-SYSTEM 750
750-8212 PFC200; G2; 2ETH RS
This submenu contains other submenus with settings for the ETHERNET
configuration.
Manual
Version 1.4.0, valid from FW Version 03.05.10(17)
WAGO-I/O-SYSTEM 750 Appendix 347
750-8212 PFC200; G2; 2ETH RS
This submenu contains other submenus with settings for the ETHERNET
interfaces.
Manual
Version 1.4.0, valid from FW Version 03.05.10(17)
348 Appendix WAGO-I/O-SYSTEM 750
750-8212 PFC200; G2; 2ETH RS
This submenu contains the settings for the selected ETHERNET interface.
Table 202: “Networking” > “Ethernet” > “Ethernet Ports” > “Interface Xn” Submenu
Submenu Submenu Item / Explanation
0. Back to … Back to the higher-level menu
Set here whether the selected port is to be used.
0. Back to … Back to the higher-level menu
1. Port
1. Disabled The port is not used.
2. Enabled The port is used.
Set here whether the Autonegotiation function is
enabled for the selected port.
2. Autonegotiation 0. Back to … Back to the higher-level menu
1. Disabled Autonegotiation is disabled.
2. Enabled Autonegotiation is enabled.
Manual
Version 1.4.0, valid from FW Version 03.05.10(17)
WAGO-I/O-SYSTEM 750 Appendix 349
750-8212 PFC200; G2; 2ETH RS
This menu contains other submenus for the firewall functionality settings.
Manual
Version 1.4.0, valid from FW Version 03.05.10(17)
350 Appendix WAGO-I/O-SYSTEM 750
750-8212 PFC200; G2; 2ETH RS
Manual
Version 1.4.0, valid from FW Version 03.05.10(17)
WAGO-I/O-SYSTEM 750 Appendix 351
750-8212 PFC200; G2; 2ETH RS
This submenu contains the firewall settings on the IP level for the selected
interface.
Table 205: “Firewall” > “General Configuration” > “Interface xxx” Submenu
Menu Item Submenu Item / Explanation
0. Back to … Back to the higher-level menu
Enable or disable the firewall for the selected
interface.
0. Back to … Back to the higher-level menu
1. Interface state The firewall for the selected interface
1. Open
is disabled.
The firewall for the selected interface
2. Filtered
is enabled.
Enable or disable the “ICMP echo” protection for the
respective interface.
0. Back to … Back to the higher-level menu
2. ICMP Policy The “ICMP echo” protection is
1. Accept
disabled.
The “ICMP echo” protection is
2. Drop
enabled.
You can specify the maximum number of “ICMP
3. ICMP Limit pings” per second.
“0” = “Disabled”
You can specify the maximum number of “ICMP
4. ICMP Burst echo bursts” per second.
“0” = “Disabled”
5. Telnet
6. FTP
7. FTPS
8. HTTP
9. HTTPS
10. I/O-CHECK
11. PLC Runtime Enable or disable the firewall for the respective
service.
12. PLC WebVisu –
The services themselves must be enabled or
direct link (port 8080)
disabled separately on the “Ports and Services”
13. SSH page.
14. TFTP
15. BootP/DHCP
16. DNS
17. Modbus TCP
18. Modbus UDP
19. SNMP
Manual
Version 1.4.0, valid from FW Version 03.05.10(17)
352 Appendix WAGO-I/O-SYSTEM 750
750-8212 PFC200; G2; 2ETH RS
Click [<OK>] to apply the entry.
Click [<Abort>] to discard the entry.
The firewall ports listed in the following table are open by default on controllers
with telecontrol functionality. The corresponding telecontrol services can be
executed via these ports without the firewall blocking their communication.
Manual
Version 1.4.0, valid from FW Version 03.05.10(17)
WAGO-I/O-SYSTEM 750 Appendix 353
750-8212 PFC200; G2; 2ETH RS
This submenu contains the settings for the MAC address filter.
Manual
Version 1.4.0, valid from FW Version 03.05.10(17)
354 Appendix WAGO-I/O-SYSTEM 750
750-8212 PFC200; G2; 2ETH RS
18.1.2.4.4 “MAC Address Filter” > “MAC address filter whitelist” Submenu
Table 208: “Firewall” > “MAC Address Filter” > “MAC address filter whitelist” Submenu
Menu Item Explanation
0. Back to … Back to the higher-level menu
Opens a submenu to add a new filter entry
1. Add new
You can enter 10 filters.
Displays the previous page of the list (if more than
2. Previous page
one page is filled)
Displays the next page of the list (if more than one
3. Next Page
page is filled)
(n + 3.) No (n): Opens a submenu to edit an existing filter entry
18.1.2.4.5 “MAC address filter whitelist” > “Add new / No (n)” Submenu
Table 209: “Firewall” > “MAC Address Filter” > “MAC address filter whitelist” > “Add new / No (n)”
Submenu
Menu Item Submenu Item / Explanation
0. Back to … Back to the higher-level menu
1. MAC address Enter the MAC address.
2. MAC mask Enter the MAC mask.
Enable or disable the filter.
0. Back to … Back to the higher-level menu
3. Filter state
1. on The filter is enabled.
2. off The filter is disabled.
To apply the changes for the selected filter entry,
4. accept
choose this menu item.
To delete the selected filter entry, choose this menu
5. delete
item.
Manual
Version 1.4.0, valid from FW Version 03.05.10(17)
WAGO-I/O-SYSTEM 750 Appendix 355
750-8212 PFC200; G2; 2ETH RS
Manual
Version 1.4.0, valid from FW Version 03.05.10(17)
356 Appendix WAGO-I/O-SYSTEM 750
750-8212 PFC200; G2; 2ETH RS
Table 211: “Firewall” > “User Filter” > “Add New / No (n)” Submenu
Menu Item Submenu Item / Explanation
0. Back to … Back to the higher-level menu
Select here whether the network devices is to be
allowed or excluded by the filter.
1. Policy 0. Back to … Back to the higher-level menu
1. Allow The network device is permitted.
2. Drop The network device is excluded.
2. Source IP address Enter the source IP address.
3. Source netmask Enter the source network mask.
4. Source port Enter the source port number.
5. Destination IP address Enter the destination IP address.
6. Destination netmask Enter here the destination netmask.
7. destination port Enter the destination port number.
Select the permitted protocols.
0. Back to … Back to the higher-level menu
8. protocol 1. tcp The TCP protocol is permitted.
2. udp The UDP protocol is permitted.
3. tcp & udp Both protocols are permitted.
Select the permitted interfaces.
0. Back to … Back to the higher-level menu
1. all All interfaces are permitted.
9. interface 2. VPN The VPN interface is permitted.
3. WAN The WAN interface is permitted.
4. X1 The X1 interface is permitted.
5. X2 The X2 interface is permitted.
Enable or disable the filter.
0. Back to … Back to the higher-level menu
10. state
1. on The filter is enabled.
2. off The filter is disabled.
To apply the changes for the selected filter entry,
11. accept
choose this menu item.
To delete the selected filter entry, choose this menu
12. delete
item.
Manual
Version 1.4.0, valid from FW Version 03.05.10(17)
WAGO-I/O-SYSTEM 750 Appendix 357
750-8212 PFC200; G2; 2ETH RS
This menu contains other submenus for the date and time settings.
Manual
Version 1.4.0, valid from FW Version 03.05.10(17)
358 Appendix WAGO-I/O-SYSTEM 750
750-8212 PFC200; G2; 2ETH RS
Manual
Version 1.4.0, valid from FW Version 03.05.10(17)
WAGO-I/O-SYSTEM 750 Appendix 359
750-8212 PFC200; G2; 2ETH RS
In addition to the menu item for the enabled storage medium, the current status is
displayed.
Manual
Version 1.4.0, valid from FW Version 03.05.10(17)
360 Appendix WAGO-I/O-SYSTEM 750
750-8212 PFC200; G2; 2ETH RS
This menu contains other submenus with functions for firmware backup and
restore, as well as information and setting options for the current system partition.
The submenu only appears if a memory card is inserted that does not contain a
bootable system. Otherwise, a message is displayed.
You are taken to the following submenu after making the selection.
Manual
Version 1.4.0, valid from FW Version 03.05.10(17)
WAGO-I/O-SYSTEM 750 Appendix 361
750-8212 PFC200; G2; 2ETH RS
This submenu contains a setting option for the Auto Update function.
The submenu only appears if the data for the firmware backup has been
selected.
Table 218: “Package Server” > “Firmware Backup” > “Auto Update Feature” Menu
Menu Item Explanation
0. Back to … Back to the higher-level menu
The Auto Update function is OFF for the selected
1. No
data.
The Auto Update function is ON for the selected
2. Yes
data.
You are taken to the following submenu after making the selection.
This submenu contains a selection option for the backup destination drive.
Table 219: “Package Server” > “Firmware Backup” > “Auto Update Feature” Menu
Menu Item Explanation
0. Back to … Back to the higher-level menu
1. SD Card The selected data is copied to the memory card.
Manual
Version 1.4.0, valid from FW Version 03.05.10(17)
362 Appendix WAGO-I/O-SYSTEM 750
750-8212 PFC200; G2; 2ETH RS
This submenu contains a selection option for the restore source drive.
You are taken to the following submenu after making the selection.
Table 221: “Package Server” > “Firmware Restore” > “Select Package” Menu
Menu Item Explanation
0. Back to … Back to the higher-level menu
1. PLC Runtime project The PLC runtime project is loaded.
2. Settings The controller settings are loaded.
3. System The controller operating system is loaded.
The controller operating system and settings are
4. System + Setting
loaded.
5. All All data is loaded.
Manual
Version 1.4.0, valid from FW Version 03.05.10(17)
WAGO-I/O-SYSTEM 750 Appendix 363
750-8212 PFC200; G2; 2ETH RS
This submenu contains information and setting options for the current system
partition.
Manual
Version 1.4.0, valid from FW Version 03.05.10(17)
364 Appendix WAGO-I/O-SYSTEM 750
750-8212 PFC200; G2; 2ETH RS
This menu contains information on the internal flash memory and, if inserted, on
the external memory card.
In addition to the menu item, the status is displayed for the enabled partition.
This submenu contains information on the external memory card and its
formatting.
Manual
Version 1.4.0, valid from FW Version 03.05.10(17)
WAGO-I/O-SYSTEM 750 Appendix 365
750-8212 PFC200; G2; 2ETH RS
This menu contains choices and settings for the device update.
You can select fieldbus software, program licenses and update scripts, for
example, for transfer from a PC to the controller.
You can also enable transmitted packages or delete from the controller.
Manual
Version 1.4.0, valid from FW Version 03.05.10(17)
366 Appendix WAGO-I/O-SYSTEM 750
750-8212 PFC200; G2; 2ETH RS
This submenu contains other submenus with settings for the respective services.
Manual
Version 1.4.0, valid from FW Version 03.05.10(17)
WAGO-I/O-SYSTEM 750 Appendix 367
750-8212 PFC200; G2; 2ETH RS
Manual
Version 1.4.0, valid from FW Version 03.05.10(17)
368 Appendix WAGO-I/O-SYSTEM 750
750-8212 PFC200; G2; 2ETH RS
Manual
Version 1.4.0, valid from FW Version 03.05.10(17)
WAGO-I/O-SYSTEM 750 Appendix 369
750-8212 PFC200; G2; 2ETH RS
Manual
Version 1.4.0, valid from FW Version 03.05.10(17)
370 Appendix WAGO-I/O-SYSTEM 750
750-8212 PFC200; G2; 2ETH RS
Manual
Version 1.4.0, valid from FW Version 03.05.10(17)
WAGO-I/O-SYSTEM 750 Appendix 371
750-8212 PFC200; G2; 2ETH RS
This submenu contains the settings for the DHCPD service for the selected
interface.
Table 235: “Ports and Services” > “DHCPD” > “Xn” Submenu
Menu Item Submenu Item / Explanation
0. Back to … Back to the higher-level menu
Enable/disable the DHCPD service for the Xn
interface.
1. State 0. Back to … Back to the higher-level menu
1. Enable The DHCPD service is enabled.
2. Disable The DHCPD service is disabled.
2. Range Enter a range of available IP addresses.
Specify the lease time here in seconds. 120
3. Lease Time (min)
seconds are entered by default.
Enter a new static assignment of MAC ID to IP
address,
4. Add static hostname e.g., “01:02:03:04:05:06=192.168.1.20” or
“hostname=192.168.1.20”.
You can enter 10 assignments.
This displays the static assignments.
0. Back to … Back to the higher-level menu
(5 + n). Static Host (n) Opens a submenu to change the
1. Edit
selected assignment
2. Delete Deletes the selected assignment
Manual
Version 1.4.0, valid from FW Version 03.05.10(17)
372 Appendix WAGO-I/O-SYSTEM 750
750-8212 PFC200; G2; 2ETH RS
Manual
Version 1.4.0, valid from FW Version 03.05.10(17)
WAGO-I/O-SYSTEM 750 Appendix 373
750-8212 PFC200; G2; 2ETH RS
This submenu contains the settings for the Modbus TCP service.
Manual
Version 1.4.0, valid from FW Version 03.05.10(17)
374 Appendix WAGO-I/O-SYSTEM 750
750-8212 PFC200; G2; 2ETH RS
This submenu contains the settings for the Modbus UDP service.
Manual
Version 1.4.0, valid from FW Version 03.05.10(17)
WAGO-I/O-SYSTEM 750 Appendix 375
750-8212 PFC200; G2; 2ETH RS
Manual
Version 1.4.0, valid from FW Version 03.05.10(17)
376 Appendix WAGO-I/O-SYSTEM 750
750-8212 PFC200; G2; 2ETH RS
This submenu contains the settings for the PLC runtime system services.
Table 242: “Ports and Services” > “PLC Runtime Services” Submenu
Menu Item Explanation
0. Back to … Back to the higher-level menu
1. General Configuration Enter the password for port authentication.
Opens a submenu with service settings for
2. CODESYS 2
CODESYS V2
Opens a submenu with service settings for
3. e!RUNTIME
e!RUNTIME
4. Change CODESYS
Opens a submenu with firewall settings for the this
Runtime firewalling
service for the interfaces
settings
5. Change CODESYS
Opens a submenu with firewall settings for the this
WebVisu firewalling
service for the interfaces
settings
Manual
Version 1.4.0, valid from FW Version 03.05.10(17)
WAGO-I/O-SYSTEM 750 Appendix 377
750-8212 PFC200; G2; 2ETH RS
Table 243: “Ports and Services” > “PLC Runtime Services” > “CODESYS 2” Submenu
Menu Item Submenu Item / Explanation
0. Back to … Back to the higher-level menu
Enable or disable the Webserver for the CODESYS
web visualization.
1. Webserver
0. Back to … Back to the higher-level menu
enable/disable
1. Enable The Webserver is enabled.
2. Disable The Webserver is disabled.
Enable or disable the communication between the
CODESYS V2 runtime system and the
2. Communication CODESYS V2 programming system.
enable/disable 0. Back to … Back to the higher-level menu
1. Enable Communication is enabled.
2. Disable Communication is disabled.
Enter here the port number for communication with
3. Communication Port
the CODESYS V2 programming system. The default
Number
value is 2455.
Enter here whether a login is required for connecting
to the device.
4. Port Authentication
0. Back to … Back to the higher-level menu
enable/disable
1. Enable Authentication via login is required.
2. Disable Authentication is not required.
Manual
Version 1.4.0, valid from FW Version 03.05.10(17)
378 Appendix WAGO-I/O-SYSTEM 750
750-8212 PFC200; G2; 2ETH RS
Table 244: “Ports and Services” > “PLC Runtime Services” > “e!RUNTIME” Submenu
Menu Item Submenu Item / Explanation
0. Back to … Back to the higher-level menu
Enable or disable the Webserver for the
e!RUNTIME web visualization.
1. Webserver
0. Back to … Back to the higher-level menu
enable/disable
1. Enable The Webserver is enabled.
2. Disable The Webserver is disabled.
Enter here whether a login is required for connecting
to the device.
2. Port Authentication
0. Back to … Back to the higher-level menu
enable/disable
1. Enable Authentication via login is required.
2. Disable Authentication is not required.
Manual
Version 1.4.0, valid from FW Version 03.05.10(17)
WAGO-I/O-SYSTEM 750 Appendix 379
750-8212 PFC200; G2; 2ETH RS
Manual
Version 1.4.0, valid from FW Version 03.05.10(17)
380 Appendix WAGO-I/O-SYSTEM 750
750-8212 PFC200; G2; 2ETH RS
Table 248: “SNMP” > “SNMP v1/v2c Trap Receiver Configuration” Submenu
Parameters Explanation
0. Back to … Back to the higher-level menu
Opens a submenu with information on the selected
(n). Trap Receiver (n)
v1/v2c trap receiver to delete the trap receiver
Opens a series of submenus to create a new v1/v2c
trap receiver
You can enter 10 trap receivers.
The following entries/selections are possible:
(n + 1). Add new Trap • IP address of the new trap receiver
Receiver (management station)
• Community name for the new trap receiver
configuration (max. 32 characters, no spaces)
• SNMP version via which the traps are sent
(v1/v2c)
Manual
Version 1.4.0, valid from FW Version 03.05.10(17)
WAGO-I/O-SYSTEM 750 Appendix 381
750-8212 PFC200; G2; 2ETH RS
Manual
Version 1.4.0, valid from FW Version 03.05.10(17)
382 Appendix WAGO-I/O-SYSTEM 750
750-8212 PFC200; G2; 2ETH RS
Manual
Version 1.4.0, valid from FW Version 03.05.10(17)
WAGO-I/O-SYSTEM 750 Appendix 383
750-8212 PFC200; G2; 2ETH RS
The following section describes the representation for WAGO-I/O SYSTEM 750
(750 and 753 Series) I/O modules in the process image, as well as the
configuration of the process values.
No direct access from fieldbus to the process image for I/O modules!
Any data that is required from the I/O module process image must be explicitly
mapped in the CODESYS program to the data in the fieldbus process image and
vice versa! Direct access is not possible!
Manual
Version 1.4.0, valid from FW Version 03.05.10(17)
384 Appendix WAGO-I/O-SYSTEM 750
750-8212 PFC200; G2; 2ETH RS
Some digital modules have an additional diagnostic bit per channel in the Input
Process Image. The diagnostic bit is used for detecting faults that occur (e.g.,
wire breaks and/or short circuits).
When analog input modules are also present in the node, the digital data is
always appended after the analog data in the Input Process Image, grouped into
bytes.
750-435
750-400, -401, -405, -406, -407, -410, -411, -412, -427, -438, (and all variations),
753-400, -401, -405, -406, -410, -411, -412, -427, -429
Manual
Version 1.4.0, valid from FW Version 03.05.10(17)
WAGO-I/O-SYSTEM 750 Appendix 385
750-8212 PFC200; G2; 2ETH RS
18.2.1.4 2 Channel Digital Input Module with Diagnostics and Output Process
Data
750-418,
753-418
The digital input module supplies a diagnostic and acknowledge bit for each input
channel. If a fault condition occurs, the diagnostic bit is set. After the fault
condition is cleared, an acknowledge bit must be set to re-activate the input. The
diagnostic data and input data bit is mapped in the Input Process Image, while
the acknowledge bit is in the Output Process Image.
Table 254: 2 Channel Digital Input Module with Diagnostics and Output Process Data
Input Process Image
Bit 7 Bit 6 Bit 5 Bit 4 Bit 3 Bit 2 Bit 1 Bit 0
Diagnostic bit Diagnostic bit Data bit Data bit
S2 S1 DI 2 DI 1
Channel 2 Channel 1 Channel 2 Channel 1
750-402, -403, -408, -409, -414, -415, -422, -423, -428, -432, -433, -1420, -1421,
-1422, -1423
753-402, -403, -408, -409, -415, -422, -423, -428, -432, -433, -440
Manual
Version 1.4.0, valid from FW Version 03.05.10(17)
386 Appendix WAGO-I/O-SYSTEM 750
750-8212 PFC200; G2; 2ETH RS
18.2.1.7 8 Channel Digital Input Module NAMUR with Diagnostics and Output
Process Data
750-439
The digital input module NAMUR provides via one logical channel 2 byte for the
input and output process image.
The signal state of NAMUR inputs DI1 … DI8 is transmitted to the fieldbus
coupler/controller via input data byte D0.
The fault conditions are transmitted via input data byte D1.
The channels 1 … 8 are switched on or off via the output data byte D1.
The output data byte D0 is reserved and always has the value “0“.
Table 257: 8 Channel Digital Input Module NAMUR with Diagnostics and Output Process Data
Input Process Image
Input byte D0
Bit 7 Bit 6 Bit 5 Bit 4 Bit 3 Bit 2 Bit 1 Bit 0
Signal Signal Signal Signal Signal Signal Signal Signal
status status status status status status status status
DI 8 DI 7 DI 6 DI 5 DI 4 DI 3 DI 2 DI 1
Channel 8 Channel 7 Channel 6 Channel 5 Channel 4 Channel 3 Channel 2 Channel 1
Input byte D1
Bit 7 Bit 6 Bit 5 Bit 4 Bit 3 Bit 2 Bit 1 Bit 0
Wire break Wire break Wire break Wire break Wire break Wire break Wire break Wire break
/short /short /short /short /short /short /short /short
circuit circuit circuit circuit circuit circuit circuit circuit
Data bit Data bit Data bit Data bit Data bit Data bit Data bit Data bit
DI 8 DI 7 DI 6 DI 5 DI 4 DI 3 DI 2 DI 1
Channel 8 Channel 7 Channel 6 Channel 5 Channel 4 Channel 3 Channel 2 Channel 1
Manual
Version 1.4.0, valid from FW Version 03.05.10(17)
WAGO-I/O-SYSTEM 750 Appendix 387
750-8212 PFC200; G2; 2ETH RS
18.2.1.8 8 Channel Digital Input Module PTC with Diagnostics and Output
Process Data
750-1425
The digital input module PTC provides via one logical channel 2 byte for the input
and output process image.
The signal state of PTC inputs DI1 … DI8 is transmitted to the fieldbus
coupler/controller via input data byte D0.
The fault conditions are transmitted via input data byte D1.
The channels 1 … 8 are switched on or off via the output data byte D1.
The output data byte D0 is reserved and always has the value “0“.
Table 258: 8 Channel Digital Input Module PTC with Diagnostics and Output Process Data
Input Process Image
Input Byte D0
Bit 7 Bit 6 Bit 5 Bit 4 Bit 3 Bit 2 Bit 1 Bit 0
Signal Signal Signal Signal Signal Signal Signal Signal
status status status status status status status status
DI 8 DI 7 DI 6 DI 5 DI 4 DI 3 DI 2 DI 1
Channel 8 Channel 7 Channel 6 Channel 5 Channel 4 Channel 3 Channel 2 Channel 1
Input Byte D1
Bit 7 Bit 6 Bit 5 Bit 4 Bit 3 Bit 2 Bit 1 Bit 0
Wire break Wire break Wire break Wire break Wire break Wire break Wire break Wire break
/short /short /short /short /short /short /short /short
circuit circuit circuit circuit circuit circuit circuit circuit
Data bit Data bit Data bit Data bit Data bit Data bit Data bit Data bit
DI 8 DI 7 DI 6 DI 5 DI 4 DI 3 DI 2 DI 1
Channel 8 Channel 7 Channel 6 Channel 5 Channel 4 Channel 3 Channel 2 Channel 1
Manual
Version 1.4.0, valid from FW Version 03.05.10(17)
388 Appendix WAGO-I/O-SYSTEM 750
750-8212 PFC200; G2; 2ETH RS
Manual
Version 1.4.0, valid from FW Version 03.05.10(17)
WAGO-I/O-SYSTEM 750 Appendix 389
750-8212 PFC200; G2; 2ETH RS
Some digital modules have an additional diagnostic bit per channel in the Input
Process Image. The diagnostic bit is used for detecting faults that occur (e.g.,
wire breaks and/or short circuits). For modules with diagnostic bit is set, also the
data bits have to be evaluated.
When analog output modules are also present in the node, the digital image data
is always appended after the analog data in the Output Process Image, grouped
into bytes.
750-523
The digital output module delivers 1 bit via a process value Bit in the output
process image, which is illustrated in the input process image. This status image
shows "manual mode".
Table 260: 1 Channel Digital Output Module with Input Process Data
Input Process Image
Bit 7 Bit 6 Bit 5 Bit 4 Bit 3 Bit 2 Bit 1 Bit 0
Status bit
not used “Manual
Operation“
750-501, -502, -509, -512, -513, -514, -517, -535, -538, (and all variations),
753-501, -502, -509, -512, -513, -514, -517
Manual
Version 1.4.0, valid from FW Version 03.05.10(17)
390 Appendix WAGO-I/O-SYSTEM 750
750-8212 PFC200; G2; 2ETH RS
18.2.2.3 2 Channel Digital Input Modules with Diagnostics and Input Process
Data
The digital output modules have a diagnostic bit for each output channel. When
an output fault condition occurs (i.e., overload, short circuit, or broken wire), a
diagnostic bit is set. The diagnostic data is mapped into the Input Process Image,
while the output control bits are in the Output Process Image.
Table 262: 2 Channel Digital Input Modules with Diagnostics and Input Process Data
Input Process Image
Bit 7 Bit 6 Bit 5 Bit 4 Bit 3 Bit 2 Bit 1 Bit 0
Diagnostic Diagnostic
bit S 2 bit S 1
Channel 2 Channel 1
750-506,
753-506
The digital output module has 2-bits of diagnostic information for each output
channel. The 2-bit diagnostic information can then be decoded to determine the
exact fault condition of the module (i.e., overload, a short circuit, or a broken
wire). The 4-bits of diagnostic data are mapped into the Input Process Image,
while the output control bits are in the Output Process Image.
Table 263: 2 Channel Digital Input Modules with Diagnostics and Input Process Data 75x-506
Input Process Image
Bit 7 Bit 6 Bit 5 Bit 4 Bit 3 Bit 2 Bit 1 Bit 0
Diagnostic Diagnostic Diagnostic Diagnostic
bit S 3 bit S 2 bit S 1 bit S 0
Channel 2 Channel 2 Channel 1 Channel 1
Diagnostic bits S1/S0, S3/S2: = ‘00’ standard mode
Diagnostic bits S1/S0, S3/S2: = ‘01’ no connected load/short circuit against +24 V
Diagnostic bits S1/S0, S3/S2: = ‘10’ Short circuit to ground/overload
Manual
Version 1.4.0, valid from FW Version 03.05.10(17)
WAGO-I/O-SYSTEM 750 Appendix 391
750-8212 PFC200; G2; 2ETH RS
750-532, -539
The digital output modules have a diagnostic bit for each output channel. When
an output fault condition occurs (i.e., overload, short circuit, or broken wire), a
diagnostic bit is set. The diagnostic data is mapped into the Input Process Image,
while the output control bits are in the Output Process Image.
Table 265: 4 Channel Digital Output Modules with Diagnostics and Input Process Data
Input Process Image
Bit 7 Bit 6 Bit 5 Bit 4 Bit 3 Bit 2 Bit 1 Bit 0
Diagnostic Diagnostic Diagnostic
Diagnostic bit
bit bit bit
S1
S4 S3 S2
Channel 1
Channel 4 Channel 3 Channel 2
Diagnostic bit S = ‘0’ no Error
Diagnostic bit S = ‘1’ overload, short circuit, or broken wire
Manual
Version 1.4.0, valid from FW Version 03.05.10(17)
392 Appendix WAGO-I/O-SYSTEM 750
750-8212 PFC200; G2; 2ETH RS
750-537,
753-537
The digital output modules have a diagnostic bit for each output channel. When
an output fault condition occurs (i.e., overload, short circuit, or broken wire), a
diagnostic bit is set. The diagnostic data is mapped into the Input Process Image,
while the output control bits are in the Output Process Image.
Table 267: 8 Channel Digital Output Modules with Diagnostics and Input Process Data
Input Process Image
Bit 7 Bit 6 Bit 5 Bit 4 Bit 3 Bit 2 Bit 1 Bit 0
Diagnostic Diagnostic Diagnostic Diagnostic Diagnostic Diagnostic Diagnostic Diagnostic
bit bit bit bit bit bit bit bit
S8 S7 S6 S5 S4 S3 S2 S1
Channel 8 Channel 7 Channel 6 Channel 5 Channel 4 Channel 3 Channel 2 Channel 1
Diagnostic bit S = ‘0’ no Error
Diagnostic bit S = ‘1’ overload, short circuit, or broken wire
Manual
Version 1.4.0, valid from FW Version 03.05.10(17)
WAGO-I/O-SYSTEM 750 Appendix 393
750-8212 PFC200; G2; 2ETH RS
750-1502, -1506
Manual
Version 1.4.0, valid from FW Version 03.05.10(17)
394 Appendix WAGO-I/O-SYSTEM 750
750-8212 PFC200; G2; 2ETH RS
Therefore, only the 16-bit measurement values for each channel are in Intel
format and are mapped by word in the input process image for the controller.
When digital input modules are also present in the node, the analog input data is
always mapped into the Input Process Image in front of the digital data.
750-452, -454, -456, -461, -462, -464 (2-Channel Operation) -465, -466, -467,
-469, -470, -472, -473, -474, -475, 476, -477, -478, -479, -480, -481, -483, -485,
-487, -492, (and all variations),
753-452, -454, -456, -461, -465, -466, -467, -469, -472, -474, -475, -476, -477,
-478, -479, -483, -492, (and all variations)
Manual
Version 1.4.0, valid from FW Version 03.05.10(17)
WAGO-I/O-SYSTEM 750 Appendix 395
750-8212 PFC200; G2; 2ETH RS
The HART I/O module provides two different process images depending on the
set operating mode.
For the pure analog values 4 mA ... 20 mA, the HART I/O module transmits 16 bit
measured values per channel as an analog input module, which are mapped by
word.
In operating mode "6 Byte Mailbox", the HART I/O module provides the fieldbus
coupler / controller with a 12-byte input and output process image via a logical
channel. For the control/status byte and the dummy byte, an acyclic channel
(mailbox) for the process value communication is embedded in the process
image, which occupies 6 bytes of data. This is followed by the measured values
for channels 1 and 2.
HART commands are executed via the WAGO-IEC function blocks of the
"WagoLibHart_0x.lib" library. The data is tunneled to the application via the
mailbox and decoded by means of the library, so that the evaluation and
processing takes place directly at the application level.
The operating mode is set using the WAGO-I / O-CHECK commissioning tool.
Manual
Version 1.4.0, valid from FW Version 03.05.10(17)
396 Appendix WAGO-I/O-SYSTEM 750
750-8212 PFC200; G2; 2ETH RS
Table 272: 2-Channel Analog Input Modules HART
Input Process Image
Byte Destination
Offset Description
High Byte Low Byte
0 D1 D0 Measured Value Channel 1
1 D3 D2 Measured Value Channel 2
750-450, -453, -455, -457, -459, -460, -463, -464 (4-Channel Operation), -468,
-471, -468, (and all variations),
753-453, -455, -457, -459
Manual
Version 1.4.0, valid from FW Version 03.05.10(17)
WAGO-I/O-SYSTEM 750 Appendix 397
750-8212 PFC200; G2; 2ETH RS
Manual
Version 1.4.0, valid from FW Version 03.05.10(17)
398 Appendix WAGO-I/O-SYSTEM 750
750-8212 PFC200; G2; 2ETH RS
750-493
The above Analog Input Modules have a total of 9 bytes of user data in both the
Input and Output Process Image (6 bytes of data and 3 bytes of control/status).
The following tables illustrate the Input and Output Process Image, which has a
total of 6 words mapped into each image.
Word alignment is applied.
Manual
Version 1.4.0, valid from FW Version 03.05.10(17)
WAGO-I/O-SYSTEM 750 Appendix 399
750-8212 PFC200; G2; 2ETH RS
750-494, -495, (and all variations)
The 3-Phase Power Measurement Modules 750-494, -495, (and all variations)
have a total of 24 bytes of user data in both the Input and Output Process Image
(16 bytes of data and 8 bytes of control/status).
Table 277: 3-Phase Power Measurement Modules 750-494, -495, (and all variations)
Input Process Image
Byte Destination
Offset Description
High Byte Low Byte
0 S1 S0 Status word
1 S3 S2 Extended status word 1
2 S5 S4 Extended status word 2
3 S7 S6 Extended status word 3
4 D1 D0
Process value 1
5 D3 D2
6 D5 D4
Process value 2
7 D7 D6
8 D9 D8
Process value 3
9 D11 D10
10 D13 D12
Process value 4
11 D15 D14
Manual
Version 1.4.0, valid from FW Version 03.05.10(17)
400 Appendix WAGO-I/O-SYSTEM 750
750-8212 PFC200; G2; 2ETH RS
Therefore, only the 16-bit measurement values for each channel are in Intel
format and are mapped by word in the output process image for the controller.
When digital output modules are also present in the node, the analog output data
is always mapped into the Output Process Image in front of the digital data.
750-550, -552, -554, -556, -560, -562, 563, -585, -586, (and all variations),
753-550, -552, -554, -556
Manual
Version 1.4.0, valid from FW Version 03.05.10(17)
WAGO-I/O-SYSTEM 750 Appendix 401
750-8212 PFC200; G2; 2ETH RS
The control/status byte is required for the bidirectional data exchange of the
module with the higher-ranking control system. The control byte is transmitted
from the control system to the module and the status byte from the module to the
control system.
This allows, for example, setting of a counter with the control byte or displaying of
overshooting or undershooting of the range with the status byte.
The control/status byte always is in the process image in the Low byte.
The above Counter Modules have a total of 5 bytes of user data in both the Input
and Output Process Image (4 bytes of counter data and 1 byte of control/status).
The counter value is supplied as 32 bits. The following tables illustrate the Input
and Output Process Image, which has a total of 3 words mapped into each
image. Word alignment is applied.
Table 280: Counter Modules 750-404, (and all variations except of /000-005),
753-404, -404/000-003
Input Process Image
Byte Designation
Offset Description
High Byte Low Byte
0 - S Status byte
1 D1 D0
Counter value
2 D3 D2
Manual
Version 1.4.0, valid from FW Version 03.05.10(17)
402 Appendix WAGO-I/O-SYSTEM 750
750-8212 PFC200; G2; 2ETH RS
750-404/000-005,
753-404/000-005
The above Counter Modules have a total of 5 bytes of user data in both the Input
and Output Process Image (4 bytes of counter data and 1 byte of control/ status).
The two counter values are supplied as 32 bits. The following tables illustrate the
Input and Output Process Image, which has a total of 3 words mapped into each
image. Word alignment is applied.
Manual
Version 1.4.0, valid from FW Version 03.05.10(17)
WAGO-I/O-SYSTEM 750 Appendix 403
750-8212 PFC200; G2; 2ETH RS
750-633
The above Counter Module has a total of 5 bytes of user data in both the Input
and Output Process Image (4 bytes of counter data and 1 byte of control/ status).
The following tables illustrate the Input and Output Process Image, which has a
total of 3 words mapped into each image. Word alignment is applied.
The meaning of the output data depends on the set operating mode:
1 Up counter with enable input
2 Up/down counter with U/D input
3 Frequency counter
4 Gate time counter
750-638,
753-638
The above Counter Modules have a total of 6 bytes of user data in both the Input
and Output Process Image (4 bytes of counter data and 2 bytes of
control/status). The two counter values are supplied as 16 bits. The following
tables illustrate the Input and Output Process Image, which has a total of 4 words
mapped into each image. Word alignment is applied.
Manual
Version 1.4.0, valid from FW Version 03.05.10(17)
404 Appendix WAGO-I/O-SYSTEM 750
750-8212 PFC200; G2; 2ETH RS
Output Process Image
Byte Designation
Offset Description
High Byte Low Byte
0 - C0 Control byte of Counter 1
1 D1 D0 Counter Setting Value of Counter 1
2 - C1 Control byte of Counter 2
3 D3 D2 Counter Setting Value of Counter 2
The above Pulse Width modules have a total of 6 bytes of user data in both the
Input and Output Process Image (4 bytes of channel data and 2 bytes of control/
status). The two channel values are supplied as 16 bits. Each channel has its
own control/status byte. The following table illustrates the Input and Output
Process Image, which has a total of 4 words mapped into each image. Word
alignment is applied.
750-650, (and the variations /000-002, -004, -006, -009, -010, -011, -012, -013),
750-651, (and the variations /000-001, -002, -003),
750-653, (and the variations /000-002, -007),
753-650, -653
The above Serial Interface Modules with alternative data format have a total of 4
bytes of user data in both the Input and Output Process Image (3 bytes of serial
data and 1 byte of control/status). The following table illustrates the Input and
Manual
Version 1.4.0, valid from FW Version 03.05.10(17)
WAGO-I/O-SYSTEM 750 Appendix 405
750-8212 PFC200; G2; 2ETH RS
Output Process Image, which have a total of 2 words mapped into each image.
Word alignment is applied.
The above Serial Interface Modules with Standard Data Format have a total of 6
bytes of user data in both the Input and Output Process Image (5 bytes of serial
data and 1 byte of control/status). The following table illustrates the Input and
Output Process Image, which have a total of 3 words mapped into each image.
Word alignment is applied.
750-652,
753-652
The size of the process image for the Serial Interface Module can be adjusted to
12, 24 or 48 bytes.
It consists of two status bytes (input) or control bytes (output) and the process
data with a size of 6 to 46 bytes.
Thus, each Serial Interface Module uses between 8 and 48 bytes in the process
image. The sizes of the input and output process images are always the same.
The process image sizes are set with the startup tool WAGO-I/O-CHECK.
Manual
Version 1.4.0, valid from FW Version 03.05.10(17)
406 Appendix WAGO-I/O-SYSTEM 750
750-8212 PFC200; G2; 2ETH RS
Table 287: Serial Interface Modules 750-652, 753-652
Input and Output Process Image
Process Byte Designation
image Offset Description
High Byte Low Byte
size
Control/Status byte Control/Status byte
0 C1/S1 C0/S0
C1/S1 C0/S0
8 bytes 1 D1 D0
2 D3 D2
3 D5 D4
4 D7 D6
24 bytes* … Prozess data (6-46 bytes)
11 D21 D20
12 D23 D22
48 bytes …
23 D45 D44
*) Factory setting
750-654, -654/000-001
The Data Exchange modules have a total of 4 bytes of user data in both the Input
and Output Process Image. The following tables illustrate the Input and Output
Process Image, which has a total of 2 words mapped into each image.
Word alignment is applied.
750-630, and the variations /000-001, -002, -006, -008, -009, -011, -012, -013
The above SSI Transmitter Interface modules have a total of 4 bytes of user data
in the Input Process Image, which has 2 words mapped into the image.
Word alignment is applied.
Manual
Version 1.4.0, valid from FW Version 03.05.10(17)
WAGO-I/O-SYSTEM 750 Appendix 407
750-8212 PFC200; G2; 2ETH RS
Table 289: SSI Transmitter Interface Modules
Input Process Image
Byte Designation
Offset Description
High Byte Low Byte
0 D1 D0
Data bytes
1 D3 D2
In the input process image, SSI transmitter interface modules with status occupy
5 usable bytes, 4 data bytes, and 1 additional status byte. A total of 3 words are
assigned in the process image via word alignment.
Table 290: SSI Transmitter Interface I/O Modules with an Alternative Data Format (/000-004, -005, -
007)
Input Process Image
Byte Destination
Offset Description
High Byte High Byte
0 - S not used Status byte
1 D1 D0
Data bytes
2 D3 D2
The above Incremental Encoder Interface modules have 5 bytes of input data
and 3 bytes of output data. The following tables illustrate the Input and Output
Process Image, which have 4 words into each image. Word alignment is applied.
Manual
Version 1.4.0, valid from FW Version 03.05.10(17)
408 Appendix WAGO-I/O-SYSTEM 750
750-8212 PFC200; G2; 2ETH RS
750-634
The above Incremental Encoder Interface module has 5 bytes of input data (6
bytes in cycle duration measurement mode) and 3 bytes of output data. The
following tables illustrate the Input and Output Process Image, which has 4 words
mapped into each image. Word alignment is applied.
The above Incremental Encoder Interface Module has a total of 6 bytes of user
data in both the Input and Output Process Image (4 bytes of encoder data and 2
bytes of control/status). The following table illustrates the Input and Output
Process Image, which have 4 words mapped into each image. Word alignment is
applied.
Table 293: Incremental Encoder Interface Modules 750-637, (and all variations)
Input and Output Process Image
Byte Designation
Offset Description
High Byte Low Byte
0 - C0/S0 Control/Status byte of Channel 1
1 D1 D0 Data Value of Channel 1
2 - C1/S1 Control/Status byte of Channel 2
3 D3 D2 Data Value of Channel 2
Manual
Version 1.4.0, valid from FW Version 03.05.10(17)
WAGO-I/O-SYSTEM 750 Appendix 409
750-8212 PFC200; G2; 2ETH RS
Digital Pulse Interface module
750-635,
753-635
The above Digital Pulse Interface module has a total of 4 bytes of user data in
both the Input and Output Process Image (3 bytes of module data and 1 byte of
control/status). The following table illustrates the Input and Output Process
Image, which have 2 words mapped into each image. Word alignment is applied.
The DC-Drive Controller maps 6 bytes into both the input and output process
image. The data sent and received are stored in up to 4 input and output bytes
(D0 ... D3). Two control bytes (C0, C1) and two status bytes (S0/S1) are used to
control the I/O module and the drive.
In addition to the position data in the input process image (D0 … D3), it is
possible to display extended status information (S2 … S5). Then the three control
bytes (C1 … C3) and status bytes (S1 … S3) are used to control the data flow.
Bit 3 of control byte C1 (C1.3) is used to switch between the process data and
the extended status bytes in the input process image (Extended Info_ON). Bit 3
of status byte S1 (S1.3) is used to acknowledge the switching process.
Manual
Version 1.4.0, valid from FW Version 03.05.10(17)
410 Appendix WAGO-I/O-SYSTEM 750
750-8212 PFC200; G2; 2ETH RS
Output Process Image
Byte Designation
Offset Description
High Byte Low Byte
0 C1 C0 Control byte C1 Control byte C0
Setpoint position Setpoint position
1 D1 D0
(LSB)
Setpoint position Setpoint position
2 D3 D2
(MSB)
The Stepper controller provides the fieldbus coupler/controller 12 bytes input and
output process image via 1 logical channel. The data to be sent and received are
stored in up to 7 output bytes (D0 … D6) and 7 input bytes (D0 … D6),
depending on the operating mode.
Output byte D0 and input byte D0 are reserved and have no function assigned.
One I/O module control and status byte (C0, S0) and 3 application control and
status bytes (C1 ... C3, S1 ... S3) provide the control of the data flow.
Switching between the two process images is conducted through bit 5 in the
control byte (C0 (C0.5). Activation of the mailbox is acknowledged by bit 5 of the
status byte S0 (S0.5).
Manual
Version 1.4.0, valid from FW Version 03.05.10(17)
WAGO-I/O-SYSTEM 750 Appendix 411
750-8212 PFC200; G2; 2ETH RS
750-640
The RTC Module has a total of 6 bytes of user data in both the Input and Output
Process Image (4 bytes of module data and 1 byte of control/status and 1 byte ID
for command). The following table illustrates the Input and Output Process
Image, which have 3 words mapped into each image. Word alignment is applied.
750-641
The DALI/DSI Master module has a total of 6 bytes of user data in both the Input
and Output Process Image (5 bytes of module data and 1 byte of control/status).
The following tables illustrate the Input and Output Process Image, which have 3
words mapped into each image. Word alignment is applied.
Manual
Version 1.4.0, valid from FW Version 03.05.10(17)
412 Appendix WAGO-I/O-SYSTEM 750
750-8212 PFC200; G2; 2ETH RS
753-647
The DALI Multi-Master module occupies a total of 24 bytes in the input and
output range of the process image.
The DALI Multi-Master module can be operated in "Easy" mode (default) and
"Full" mode. "Easy" mode is used to transmit simply binary signals for lighting
control. Configuration or programming via DALI master module is unnecessary in
"Easy" mode.
Changes to individual bits of the process image are converted directly into DALI
commands for a pre-configured DALI network. 22 bytes of the 24-byte process
image can be used directly for switching of electronic ballasts (ECG), groups or
scenes in "Easy" mode. Switching commands are transmitted via DALI and group
addresses, where each DALI and each group address is represented by a 2-bit
pair.
In full mode, the 24 bytes of the process image are used to tunnel a protocol
using a mailbox interface. The process image consists of 1 byte for control /
status and 23 bytes for the acyclic data.
The structure of the process data is described in detail in the following tables.
Manual
Version 1.4.0, valid from FW Version 03.05.10(17)
WAGO-I/O-SYSTEM 750 Appendix 413
750-8212 PFC200; G2; 2ETH RS
Output Process Image
Byte Designation
Offset Note
High Byte Low Byte
res. Bit 0: Broadcast ON
Bit 1: Broadcast OFF
Bit 2: (1 button operation):
- short: Broadcast ON/OFF
- long: Broadcast dimming
brighter/darker
Bit 2: (2 buttons operation):
- short: Broadcast ON/OFF
- long: Broadcast dimming brighter
0 - S
Bit 3: (1 button operation):
Broadcast ON/OFF
Bit 3: (2 buttons operation):
- short: Broadcast ON/OFF
- long: Broadcast dimming darker
Bit 4: Watchdog toggling (starting
from FW06 of the DALI Multi-
Master)
Bit 5…7: reserved
1 DA4…DA7 DA0…DA3 Bit pair for DALI address:
2 DA12…DA15 DA8…DA11 Bit 1 (1 button operation):
3 DA20…DA23 DA16…DA19 - short: DA switch ON/OFF
- long: dimming brighter/darker
4 DA28…DA31 DA24…DA27
Bit 1 (2 buttons operation):
5 DA36…DA39 DA32…DA35 - short: DA switch ON
6 DA44…DA47 DA40…DA43 - long: dimming brighter
7 DA52…DA55 DA48…DA51 Bit 2 (1 button operation):
DA switch ON/OFF
Bit 2 (2 buttons operation):
8 DA60…DA63 DA56…DA59
- short: DA switch OFF
- long: dimming darker
9 GA4…GA7 GA0…GA3 Bit pair for DALI group address:
Bit 1 (1 button operation):
- short: GA switch ON/OFF
- long: dimming brighter/darker
Bit 1 (2 buttons operation):
- short: GA switch ON
10 GA12…GA15 GA8…GA11 - long: dimming brighter
Bit 2 (1 button operation):
GA switch ON/OFF
Bit 2 (2 buttons operation):
- short: GA switch OFF
- long: dimming darker
11 Bit 8…15 Bit 0…7 Switch scene 0…15
DA = DALI address
GA = Group address
Manual
Version 1.4.0, valid from FW Version 03.05.10(17)
414 Appendix WAGO-I/O-SYSTEM 750
750-8212 PFC200; G2; 2ETH RS
Table 300: DALI Multi-Master Module 753-647 in the "Full" Mode
Input and Output Process Image
Byte Designation
Offset Note
High Byte Low Byte
0 MBX_C/S C0/S0 Mailbox control/status byte control/status byte
1 MBX1 MBX0
2 MBX3 MBX2
3 MBX5 MBX4
4 MBX7 MBX6
5 MBX9 MBX8
6 MBX11 MBX10 Mailbox
7 MBX13 MBX12
8 MBX15 MBX14
9 MBX17 MBX16
10 MBX19 MBX18
11 MBX21 MBX20
Manual
Version 1.4.0, valid from FW Version 03.05.10(17)
WAGO-I/O-SYSTEM 750 Appendix 415
750-8212 PFC200; G2; 2ETH RS
753-648
The process image of the LON® FTT module consists of a control/status byte and
23 bytes of bidirectional communication data that is processed by the WAGO-I/O-
PRO function block "LON_01.lib". This function block is essential for the function
of the LON® FTT module and provides a user interface on the control side.
750-642
The EnOcean radio receiver has a total of 4 bytes of user data in both the Input
and Output Process Image (3 bytes of module data and 1 byte of control/status).
The following tables illustrate the Input and Output Process Image, which have 2
words mapped into each image. Word alignment is applied.
Manual
Version 1.4.0, valid from FW Version 03.05.10(17)
416 Appendix WAGO-I/O-SYSTEM 750
750-8212 PFC200; G2; 2ETH RS
750-643
The MP Bus Master Module has a total of 8 bytes of user data in both the Input
and Output Process Image (6 bytes of module data and 2 bytes of control/status).
The following table illustrates the Input and Output Process Image, which have 4
words mapped into each image. Word alignment is applied.
750-644
The size of the process image for the Bluetooth® module can be adjusted to 12,
24 or 48 bytes.
It consists of one control byte (input) or status byte (output); an empty byte; an
overlay able mailbox with a size of 6, 12 or 18 bytes (mode 2); and the Bluetooth®
process data with a size of 4 to 46 bytes.
Thus, each Bluetooth® module uses between 12 and 48 bytes in the process
image. The sizes of the input and output process images are always the same.
The first byte contains the control/status byte; the second contains an empty
byte.
Process data attach to this directly when the mailbox is hidden. When the
mailbox is visible, the first 6, 12 or 18 bytes of process data are overlaid by the
mailbox data, depending on their size. Bytes in the area behind the optionally
visible mailbox contain basic process data. The internal structure of the
Bluetooth® process data can be found in the documentation for the Bluetooth®
750-644 RF Transceiver.
The mailbox and the process image sizes are set with the startup tool WAGO-
I/O-CHECK.
Manual
Version 1.4.0, valid from FW Version 03.05.10(17)
WAGO-I/O-SYSTEM 750 Appendix 417
750-8212 PFC200; G2; 2ETH RS
Table 304: Bluetooth® RF-Transceiver 750-644
Input and Output Process Image
Process Byte Destination
image Offset Description
High Byte Low Byte
size
Control/status
0 - C0/S0 not used
byte
12 bytes 1 D1 D0
… … …
5 D9 D8
6 D11 D10
Mailbox (0, 6, 12 or 18 words)/
24 bytes … … …
Process data (4 … 46 words)
11 D21 D20
12 D23 D22
48 bytes*) ... ... ...
23 D45 D44
*) Factory Setting
750-645
Manual
Version 1.4.0, valid from FW Version 03.05.10(17)
418 Appendix WAGO-I/O-SYSTEM 750
750-8212 PFC200; G2; 2ETH RS
753-646
The KNX/TP1 module appears in router and device mode with a total of 24-byte
user data within the input and output area of the process image, 20 data bytes
and 2 control/status bytes. Even though the additional bytes S1 or C1 are
transferred as data bytes, they are used as extended status and control bytes.
The opcode is used for the read/write command of data and the triggering of
specific functions of the KNX/EIB/TP1 module. Word-alignment is used to assign
12 words in the process image. Access to the process image is not possible in
router mode. Telegrams can only be tunneled.
In device mode, access to the KNX data can only be performed via special
function blocks of the IEC application. Configuration using the ETS engineering
tool software is required for KNX.
750-655,
753-655
The length of the process image of the AS-interface master module can be set to
fixed sizes of 12, 20, 24, 32, 40 or 48 bytes.
It consists of a control or status byte, a mailbox with a size of 0, 6, 10, 12 or 18
bytes and the AS-interface process data, which can range from 0 to 46 bytes.
The first Input and output word, which is assigned to an AS-interface master
module, contains the status / control byte and one empty byte.
Manual
Version 1.4.0, valid from FW Version 03.05.10(17)
WAGO-I/O-SYSTEM 750 Appendix 419
750-8212 PFC200; G2; 2ETH RS
Subsequently the mailbox data are mapped, when the mailbox is permanently
superimposed (Mode 1).
In the operating mode with suppressible mailbox (Mode 2), the mailbox and the
cyclical process data are mapped next.
The following words contain the remaining process dat.
The mailbox and the process image sizes are set with the startup tool
WAGO-I/O-CHECK.
Manual
Version 1.4.0, valid from FW Version 03.05.10(17)
420 Appendix WAGO-I/O-SYSTEM 750
750-8212 PFC200; G2; 2ETH RS
750-606
The modules provide 2 bits of diagnostics in the Input Process Image for
monitoring of the internal power supply.
750-610, -611
The modules provide 2 bits of diagnostics in the Input Process Image for
monitoring of the internal power supply.
750-624/020-002, -626/020-002
750-622
Manual
Version 1.4.0, valid from FW Version 03.05.10(17)
WAGO-I/O-SYSTEM 750 Appendix 421
750-8212 PFC200; G2; 2ETH RS
The Binary Space Modules behave alternatively like 2 channel digital input
modules or output modules and seize depending upon the selected settings 1, 2,
3 or 4 bits per channel. According to this, 2, 4, 6 or 8 bits are occupied then either
in the process input or the process output image.
Table 311: Binary Space Module 750-622 (with Behavior like 2 Channel Digital Input)
Input and Output Process Image
Bit 7 Bit 6 Bit 5 Bit 4 Bit 3 Bit 2 Bit 1 Bit 0
(Data bit (Data bit (Data bit (Data bit (Data bit (Data bit Data bit Data bit
DI 8) DI 7) DI 6) DI 5) DI 4) DI 3) DI 2 DI 1
Manual
Version 1.4.0, valid from FW Version 03.05.10(17)
422 Appendix WAGO-I/O-SYSTEM 750
750-8212 PFC200; G2; 2ETH RS
All of the functions of the CODESYS system libraries listed below are supported.
Manual
Version 1.4.0, valid from FW Version 03.05.10(17)
WAGO-I/O-SYSTEM 750 Appendix 423
750-8212 PFC200; G2; 2ETH RS
Table 312: CODESYS System Libraries
Library Function C/IEC 61131
SysTaskInfo.lib Evaluation of task information in IEC 61131
the Online mode
Util.lib Various logical operations IEC 61131
Util_no_Real.lib Various logical operations IEC 61131
Additional information about the libraries is given in the online Help function for
CODESYS-IDE.
</dg_
18.3.1.2 SysLibCom.lib
- SysComClose
- SysComGetVersion2300
- SysComOpen
- SysComRead
- SysComSetSettings
- SysComSetSettingsEx
- SysComWrite
Additional information about this is given in the online Help function for
CODESYS-IDE.
18.3.1.3 SysLibFile.lib
- SysFileClose
- SysFileCopy
- SysFileDelete
- SysFileEOF
- SysFileGetPos
- SysFileGetSize
- SysFileGetTime
- SysFileOpen
- SysFileRead
- SysFileRename
- SysFileSetPos
- SysFileWrite
Manual
Version 1.4.0, valid from FW Version 03.05.10(17)
424 Appendix WAGO-I/O-SYSTEM 750
750-8212 PFC200; G2; 2ETH RS
Additional information about this is given in the online Help function for
CODESYS-IDE.
File and directory names distinguish between upper and lower case!
18.3.1.4 SysLibFileAsync.lib
- SysFileCloseAsync
- SysFileCopyAsync
- SysFileDeleteAsync
- SysFileEOFAsync
- SysFileGetPosAsync
- SysFileGetSizeAsync
- SysFileGetTimeAsync
- SysFileOpenAsync
- SysFileReadAsync
- SysFileRenameAsync
- SysFileSetPosAsync
Manual
Version 1.4.0, valid from FW Version 03.05.10(17)
WAGO-I/O-SYSTEM 750 Appendix 425
750-8212 PFC200; G2; 2ETH RS
- SysFileWriteAsync
Additional information about this is given in the online Help function for
CODESYS-IDE.
File and directory names distinguish between upper and lower case!
18.3.1.5 SysLibRtc.lib
- SysRtcGetHourMode
- SysRtcGetTime
- SysRtcSetTime
Additional information about this is given in the online Help function for
CODESYS-IDE.
Manual
Version 1.4.0, valid from FW Version 03.05.10(17)
426 Appendix WAGO-I/O-SYSTEM 750
750-8212 PFC200; G2; 2ETH RS
18.3.1.6 BusDiag.lib
- DiagGetBusState
- DiagGetState
The document containing a description of this library and the function blocks it
includes is available for download on the Internet at www.wago.com.
18.3.1.7 mod_com.lib
- ADD_PI_INFORMATION
- CRC16
- FBUS_ERROR_INFORMATION
- GET_DIGITAL_INPUT_OFFSET
- GET_DIGITAL_OUTPUT_OFFSET
- KBUS_ERROR_INFORMATION
- MOD_COM_VERSION
- PI_INFORMATION
- SET_DIGITAL_INPUT_OFFSET
- SET_DIGITAL_OUTPUT_OFFSET
- SLAVE_ADDRESS
The document containing a description of this library and the function blocks it
includes is available for download on the Internet at www.wago.com.
18.3.1.8 SerComm.lib
- SERCOMM
- SERCOMM_VERSION
The document containing a description of this library and the function blocks it
includes is available for download on the Internet at www.wago.com.
Manual
Version 1.4.0, valid from FW Version 03.05.10(17)
WAGO-I/O-SYSTEM 750 Appendix 427
750-8212 PFC200; G2; 2ETH RS
18.3.1.9 WagoConfigToolLIB.lib
The following table shows call-ups that allow you to configure and parameterize
the controller from the PLC program or Linux® via the “ConfigToolFB” function
block (see parameter “stCallString”). In addition to WBM and the CBM, this is
another variant to configure the controller for operational requirements.
Manual
Version 1.4.0, valid from FW Version 03.05.10(17)
428 Appendix WAGO-I/O-SYSTEM 750
750-8212 PFC200; G2; 2ETH RS
Table 316: Description of the Configuration Scripts for “Information”
Parameters Status Call-Up Output/Input Effective
Controller Details: Identifies various information about the controller
Product get_coupler_details
read Product description Immediately
Description product-description
get_coupler_details
Order Number read Item number of the controller Immediately
order-number
Firmware get_coupler_details Firmware version of the
read Immediately
Revision firmware-revision controller
Licence get_coupler_details
read CODESYS license details Immediately
Information license-information
Network Details X1: Identifies the parameters currently used for the ETHERNET interface
X1/X2 in “switched” mode or for the ETHERNET interface X1 in “separated” mode
Status of the interface.
get_actual_eth_config Possible return values:
State read Immediately
X1 state - enabled
- disabled
get_actual_eth_config
Mac Address read MAC address Immediately
X1 mac-address
get_actual_eth_config
IP Address read Current IP address Immediately
X1 ip-address
get_actual_eth_config
Subnet Mask read Current subnet mask Immediately
X1 subnet-mask
Path via which the interface
receives its IP address;
Configuration get_actual_eth_config Possible return values:
read Immediately
type X1 config-type - dhcp
- static
- bootp
Connection status;
get_actual_eth_config Possible return values:
Cable state read Immediately
X1 cable-state - connected
- disconnected
Status of the default gateway;
Deprecated! Replaced by:
get_default_gateway_config
get_actual_eth_config
Default-gateway read (See table: “Description of the Immediately
X1 default-gateway
Configuration Scripts for
‘Networking – TCP/IP’ >
‘Default Gateway’”)
Network Details X2: Identifies the parameters currently used for the ETHERNET interface X2
in “separated” mode
See “Network Details X1”. When calling these up, replace “X1” with “X2” (in “separated” mode only).
</dg_
Manual
Version 1.4.0, valid from FW Version 03.05.10(17)
WAGO-I/O-SYSTEM 750 Appendix 429
750-8212 PFC200; G2; 2ETH RS
Table 317: Description of the Configuration Scripts for “CODESYS”
Parameters Status Call Output/Input Effecti
ve
Information
CODESYS get_coupler_details
Version of the CODESYS Immedia
Webserver read codesys-Webserver-
Webserver tely
Version version
Project Details
get_rts_info Immedia
Date read
project date tely
get_rts_info Immedia
Title read
project title tely
Display of the project information
get_rts_info Immedia
Version read specified in CODESYS (Menu >
project version tely
Project > Project Information)
get_rts_info Immedia
Author read
project author tely
get_rts_info Immedia
Description read
project description tely
CODESYS State
get_rts_info Display of the CODESYS status Immedia
State read
state (RUN or STOP) tely
Home Directory (Boot Project Location)
Storage logation for the home
directory.
Possible return values:
get_runtime_config
read - enabled: The home directory
homedir-on-sdcard
is on the SD card.
- disabled: The home directory
Home Directory
is on the boot medium. After
(Boot Project
Storage logation for the home restart
Location)
directory.
config_runtime Possible entries for the value are:
write homedir-on- - enabled: Put the home
sdcard=<Wert> directory on the SD card.
- disabled: The home directory
is on the boot medium.
Manual
Version 1.4.0, valid from FW Version 03.05.10(17)
430 Appendix WAGO-I/O-SYSTEM 750
750-8212 PFC200; G2; 2ETH RS
Table 318: Description of the Configuration Scripts for “Networking - Host/Domain Name”
Parameters Status Call Output/Input Effecti
ve
Host Name
Display of the host name.
The return value is blank when
get_coupler_details Immedia
read /etc/hostname is empty.
hostname tely
Host Name For details see the parameter
“Actual Hostname.”
change_hostname Changing the host name. Immedia
write
hostname=<String> Input a host name for <String>. tely
The actual host name (if
Actual get_coupler_details /etc/hostname is empty, a unique Immedia
read
Hostname actual-hostname host name is generated from the tely
MAC address)
Domain Name
get_coupler_details
read Display of domain name
domain-name Immedia
Domain name
change_hostname Change the domain name. Enter tely
write
dnsdomain=<String> the domain name for <String>.
Manual
Version 1.4.0, valid from FW Version 03.05.10(17)
WAGO-I/O-SYSTEM 750 Appendix 431
750-8212 PFC200; G2; 2ETH RS
Table 319: Description of the Configuration Scripts for “Networking - TCP/IP”
Parameters Status Call Output/Input Effecti
ve
Default Gateway 1
Current status of the default
gateway 1.
get_default_gateway_
read Possible return values:
config number=1 state
Default - enabled Immedia
Gateway - disabled tely
config_default_gateway Possible entries for <Value>:
write number=1 - enabled
state=<stateval> - disabled
get_default_gateway_ Current IP address of the default
read
config number=1 value gateway 1
Enter the IP address of the
Default Immedia
default gateway 1 here.
Gateway config_default_gateway tely
write <gw> is an IP address with the
number=1 value=<gw>
format “Number. Number.
Number. Number.”
Current metric (cost factor) of the
get_default_gateway_
read default gateway 1
config number=1 metric
The default value is “20.”
Default Immedia
Enter the metric of the default
Gateway tely
config_default_gateway gateway 1 here.
write
number=1 metric=<n> <n> is a number between “0” and
“4.294.967.295.”
Default Gateway 2
See “Default Gateway 1.” When calling the gateway number, replace 1 with 2.
DNS Server 1
DNS server address with the
read get_dns_server 1
consecutive number 1
Set the address of the DNS
edit_dns_server server with 1 as the consecutive
dns-server-nr=1 number.
write/
change=change <Value> is an IP address with the Immedia
DNS Server 1 change
dns-server- format tely
name=<Value> “Number.Number.Number.Numbe
r.”
edit_dns_server
write/ Delete the DNS server with the
dns-server-nr=1
delete consecutive number 1.
delete=delete
DNS Server 2 … n
See “DNS Server 1.” When calling, adjust the server number (2 … n).
Add DNS Server
Add additional DNS addresses
here.
edit_dns_server
<Value> is an IP address with the Immedia
Add DNS server write add=add dns-server-
format tely
name=<Value>
“Number.Number.Number.Numbe
r.”
Manual
Version 1.4.0, valid from FW Version 03.05.10(17)
432 Appendix WAGO-I/O-SYSTEM 750
750-8212 PFC200; G2; 2ETH RS
Table 320: Description of the Configuration Scripts for “Networking - ETHERNET”
Parameters Status Call-Up Output/Input Effective
Switch Configuration
Query the switch
configuration:
read get_dsa_mode Possible return values:
- 0 = „switched“ mode
Interface Mode - 1 = „separated“ mode Immediately
Set the switch configuration:
set_dsa_mode -v Possible entries for <value>:
write
<value> - 0 = „switched“ mode
- 1 = „separated“ mode
Interface X1
Query the port state:
get_eth_config Possible return values:
read
X1 state - enabled
- disabled
Port State Immediately
config_ethernet port=X1
Activate port: enabled
state=enabled
write
config_ethernet port=X1
Deactivate port: disabled
state=disabled
Query the status of the
autonegotiation function:
get_eth_config
read Possible return values:
X1 autoneg
- on
- off
config_ethernet port=X1 Activate the autonegotiation
autoneg=on function: on
Deactivate the autonegotiation
function: off
Autonegotiation Note: You must also indicate Immediately
the speed and duplex value
config_ethernet port=X1 when you deactivate the
write
autoneg=off autonegotiation function.
speed=<value> Possible entries for speed:
duplex=<value> - 10M
- 100M
Possible entries for duplex:
- half
- full
get_eth_config
read Display of ETHERNET speed
X1 speed
get_eth_config
read Display of the Duplex mode
X1 duplex
Change the ETHERNET
Speed and speed and the Duplex mode. Immediately
Duplex Settings config_ethernet port=X1 Possible entries for speed:
autoneg=off - 10M
write
speed=<value> - 100M
duplex=<value> Possible entries for duplex:
- half
- full
Interface X2
See “Interface X1”. When calling these up, replace “X1” with “X2”.
</dg_
Manual
Version 1.4.0, valid from FW Version 03.05.10(17)
WAGO-I/O-SYSTEM 750 Appendix 433
750-8212 PFC200; G2; 2ETH RS
Table 321: Description of the Configuration Scripts for “NTP”
Parameters Status Call Output/Input Effecti
ve
Configuration Data
Query the status of the NTP
server
get_ntp_config
read Possible return values are:
state
- enabled Immedia
State
- disabled tely
Possible entries for <Value>:
config_sntp
write - enabled
state=<Value>
- disabled
get_ntp_config Port number of the NTP server
read
port Immedia
Port
config_sntp Enter the port number for tely
write
port=<Value> <Value>.
Query the IP address of the time
get_ntp_config
read server: N = 1 … 4 for querying
time-server-<N>
one of 4 time servers.
Enter the IP address of 4 time
Immedia
Time Server servers
config_sntp tely
<N> can be a value from 1 to 4.
write time-server-
<Value> is an IP address with the
<N>=<Value>
format “Number. Number.
Number. Number.”
Query the time in seconds
get_ntp_config
read between two requests to the time
Update Time update-time Immedia
server.
(seconds) tely
config_sntp Specify the time-server's query
write
update-time=<Value> cycle (in s) for <Value>.
Manual
Version 1.4.0, valid from FW Version 03.05.10(17)
434 Appendix WAGO-I/O-SYSTEM 750
750-8212 PFC200; G2; 2ETH RS
Table 322: Description of the Configuration Scripts for “Clock”
Parameters Status Call-Up Output/Input Effective
Clock
Time and Date
get_clock_data
read Local time and date
date-local
Date on device,
config_clock Immediately
local Change date. The format for
write type=local
<date> is: DD.MM.YYYY
date=<Datum>
get_clock_data
read Time/UTC
time-utc
Time on device,
Change time, based on UTC Immediately
UTC config_clock
write time. The format for <time> is:
type=utc time=<Time>
hh:mm:ss xx
get_clock_data
read Time/local time
time-local
Time on device,
Change time, based on local Immediately
local config_clock
write time. The format for <time> is:
type=local time=<Time>
hh:mm:ss xx
Presentation format either as
12 or 24-hour format:
get_clock_data
read Possible return values:
display-mode
- 12-hour-format
12-Hour- - 24-hour-format
Immediately
Format Set the presentation format
config_clock _ for the time.
write display_mode Possible entries for <Value>:
display-mode=<value> - 12-hour-format
- 24-hour-format
Time Zone
Currently set time zone –
get_clock_data
read original TZ string as stored in
tz-string
the operating system.
TZ-String Change TZ string directly. Immediately
config_timezone Example of <String>:
write
tz-string=<String> CET-1CEST,
M3.5.0/2,M10.5.0/3
Manual
Version 1.4.0, valid from FW Version 03.05.10(17)
WAGO-I/O-SYSTEM 750 Appendix 435
750-8212 PFC200; G2; 2ETH RS
Table 323: Description of the Configuration Scripts for "Administration"
Parameters Status Call Output/Input Effecti
ve
Configuration of Service Interface
User of the serial interface.
Active: Current value
Configured: Value set, but not
applied by a reboot
Possible return values are:
get_service_interface_ immedia
read - service (WAGO-I/O-CHECK,
config mode tely
WAGO-I/O-PRO,
Configuration of
e!COCKPIT)
Service
- linux (Linux® console)
Interface
- free (unused, free for
application)
User of the serial interface.
Possible entries for <value>:
config_service_interface after
write - service
_config mode=<value> Restart
- linux
- free
Reboot Controller
immedia
- write start_reboot Restart the controller.
tely
</dg_
</dg_
Manual
Version 1.4.0, valid from FW Version 03.05.10(17)
436 Appendix WAGO-I/O-SYSTEM 750
750-8212 PFC200; G2; 2ETH RS
Table 325: Description of Configuration Scripts for “Ports and Services” – “Network Services
Parameters Status Call-Up Output/Input Valid
Network Services
Telnet
Read the status of the Telnet
server.
get_port_state
read Possible return values:
telnet
- enabled Right
Telnet Port
- disabled away
config_port Possible entries for <Value>:
write port=telnet - enabled
state=<Value> - disabled
FTP
Read the status of the FTP
server.
config_ssl
read Possible return values:
ftp-status
- enabled Right
FTP Port
- disabled away
Possible entries for <Value>:
config_port
write - enabled
port=ftp state=<Value>
- disabled
FTPS
Read the status of the FTPS port.
Possible return values:
read config_ssl ftps-status
- enabled
- disabled Right
FTPS Port
Activate/Deactivate FTPS. away
config_port port=ftps Possible entries for <Value>:
write
state=<Value> - enabled
- disabled
HTTP
Read the status of the HTTP port.
Possible return values:
read config_ssl http-status
- enabled
- disabled Right
HTTP Port
Activate/Deactivate HTTP. away
config_port port=http Possible entries for <Value>:
write
state=<Value> - enabled
- disabled
HTTPS
Read the status of the HTTPS
port.
read config_ssl https-status Possible return values:
- enabled
Right
HTTPS Port - disabled
away
Activate/Deactivate HTTPS.
config_port port=https Possible entries for <Value>:
write
state=<Value> - enabled
- disabled
Manual
Version 1.4.0, valid from FW Version 03.05.10(17)
WAGO-I/O-SYSTEM 750 Appendix 437
750-8212 PFC200; G2; 2ETH RS
Table 326: Description of Configuration Scripts for “Ports and Services” – “PLC Runtime Services”
Parameters Status Call Output/Input Effecti
ve
General Settings
Version of the enabled PLC
runtime
get_runtime_config Possible return values:
read
running-version - 0 = no runtime enabled
- 2 = CODESYS V2 enabled
- 3 = e!RUNTIME enabled
PLC runtime Setting and, if necessary, Immedia
version stopping of the previous runtime tely
version and starting of required
config_runtime runtime- version
write
version=<value> Possible entries for <value>:
- 0 = do not enable runtime
- 2 = enable CODESYS V2
- 3 = enable e!RUNTIME
Memory location for a boot
project of the runtime application
Possible return values:
get_runtime_config
read - HOME:// (saving on internal
boot-project
memory)
Boot project - CARD:// (saving on the Immedia
location memory card) tely
Possible entries for <value>:
- HOME:// (saving on internal
config_runtime boot-
write memory)
project=<value>
- CARD:// (saving on the
memory card)
Calling web page when only
entering the IP address in the
web browser
get_runtime_config
read Possible return values:
default-webpage
- WBM (web based
Default web Immedia
management)
page tely
- Webvisu (web visualization)
Possible entries for <value>:
config_runtime default- - WBM (web based
write
webpage=<value> management)
- Webvisu (web visualization)
config_linux_user
Change user=admin new-
Change the PLC runtime access Immedia
authentication write password=<value>
password tely
password confirm-
password=<value>
Manual
Version 1.4.0, valid from FW Version 03.05.10(17)
438 Appendix WAGO-I/O-SYSTEM 750
750-8212 PFC200; G2; 2ETH RS
Table 326: Description of Configuration Scripts for “Ports and Services” – “PLC Runtime Services”
Parameters Status Call Output/Input Effecti
ve
CODESYS V2 Settings
Read status of the runtime-
get_runtime_config cfg- specific Webserver
read version=2 Webserver- Possible return values:
state - enabled
CODESYS2
- disabled Immedia
Webserver
Enable/disable runtime-specific tely
State
config_runtime cfg- Webserver
write version=2 Webserver- Possible entries for <value>:
state=<value> - enabled
- disabled
Read status of the port
authentication for communication
between the CODESYS V2 PC
get_runtime_config cfg-
read software and the controller
CODESYS2 version=2 authentication
Possible return values: Immedia
Port
- enabled tely
Authentication
- disabled
config_runtime cfg- Possible entries for <value>:
write version=2 - enabled
authentication=<value> - disabled
Read status of the port for
communication between the
CODESYS V2 PC software and
get_runtime_config
read the controller
service-state
CODESYS2 Possible return values: Immedia
Service State - enabled tely
- disabled
Possible entries for <value>:
config_runtime service-
write - enabled
state=<value>
- disabled
Read value of set network port
get_runtime_config for communication between PC
read
CODESYS2 comm-port and controller
Immedia
Communication Default value is 2455
tely
Port Change port number
config_runtime comm-
write Enter the TCP/IP port number for
port=<value>
<value>.
Manual
Version 1.4.0, valid from FW Version 03.05.10(17)
WAGO-I/O-SYSTEM 750 Appendix 439
750-8212 PFC200; G2; 2ETH RS
Table 326: Description of Configuration Scripts for “Ports and Services” – “PLC Runtime Services”
Parameters Status Call Output/Input Effecti
ve
e!Runtime Settings
Read status of the runtime-
get_runtime_config cfg- specific Webserver
read version=3 Webserver- Possible return values
state - enabled
e!RUNTIME
- disabled Immedia
Webserver
Enable/disable runtime-specific tely
State
config_runtime cfg- Webserver
write version=3 Webserver- Possible entries for <value>:
state=<value> - enabled
- disabled
Read status of the port
authentication for communication
between the e!COCKPIT PC
get_runtime_config cfg-
read software and the controller
e!RUNTIME version=3 authentication
Possible return values: Immedia
Port
- enabled tely
Authentication
- disabled
config_runtime cfg- Possible entries for <value>:
write version=3 - enabled
authentication= <value> - disabled
</dg_
Manual
Version 1.4.0, valid from FW Version 03.05.10(17)
440 Appendix WAGO-I/O-SYSTEM 750
750-8212 PFC200; G2; 2ETH RS
Table 327: Description of Configuration Scripts for “Ports and Services” – “SSH/TFTP”
Parameters Status Call-Up Output/Input Valid
SSH
SSH Server
Read the status of the SSH port.
Possible return values:
read get_ssh_config state
- enabled
- disabled
Indicates whether logon as root is
permitted.
get_ssh_config root-
read Possible return values:
access-state
- enabled
- disabled
Indicates whether authentication
by password (instead of PKI key
get_ssh_config files) is permitted.
read
password-request-state Possible return values:
- enabled
- disabled
get_ssh_config port- Right
SSH read Specifies the SSH port
number away
Activate/Deactivate SSH service.
config_ssh Possible entries for <Value>:
write
state=<Value> - enabled
- disabled
config_ssh port-
write Set the SSH port
number=<Value>
Permit/Prohibit logon as root.
config_ssh root-access- Possible entries for <Value>:
write
state-value=<Value> - enabled
- disabled
Permit/Prohibit authentication by
config_ssh password- password.
write request-state- Possible entries for <Value>:
value=<Value> - enabled
- disabled
TFTP
TFTP Server
Read the status of the TFTP port.
Possible return values:
read get_tftp_config state
- enabled
- disabled
get_tftp_config
read Read the TFTP main directory.
download-dir Right
TFTP
Activate/Deactivate TFTP port. away
config_tftp Possible entries for <Value>:
write
state=<Value> - enabled
- disabled
config_tftp download-
write Set the TFTP main directory.
dir=<Value>
<
Manual
Version 1.4.0, valid from FW Version 03.05.10(17)
WAGO-I/O-SYSTEM 750 Appendix 441
750-8212 PFC200; G2; 2ETH RS
Table 328: Description of Configuration Scripts for “SNMP”
Parameters Status Call-Up Output/Input Valid
General SNMP information parameters
get_snmp_data Specifies the SNMP parameter Right
read
device-name “sysName”. away
Name of device Change the SNMP parameter
config_snmp After
write “sysName”
device-name=<Value> * restart
(<Value> = string).
get_snmp_data Specifies the SNMP parameter Right
read
description “sysDescr”. away
Description Change the SNMP parameter
config_snmp After
write “sysDescr”
description=<Value> restart
(<Value> = string). *
get_snmp_data Specifies the SNMP Right
read
physical-location “sysLocation” parameter. away
Physical
config_snmp Change the SNMP parameter
location After
write physical- “sysLocation”
* restart
location=<Value> (<Value> = string).
get_snmp_data Specifies the SNMP “sysContact” Right
read
contact parameter. away
Contact Change the SNMP parameter
config_snmp After
write “sysContact”
contact=<Value> restart
(<Value> = string).
* When entering values, the blank characters must be filled by either “+” or “%20”. If this is not
Manual
Version 1.4.0, valid from FW Version 03.05.10(17)
442 Appendix WAGO-I/O-SYSTEM 750
750-8212 PFC200; G2; 2ETH RS
Table 328: Description of Configuration Scripts for “SNMP”
Parameters Status Call-Up Output/Input Valid
SNMP Trap Receiver Configuration for v1 and v2c
Any number of trap receivers can be configured. A trap receiver that has been set up is always
active; the data set must be completely deleted to deactivate it.
Specifies the IP address of the
trap receiver that the controller is
to send the v1 or v2 traps to.
Other parameters:
<Value2> = IP address
config_snmp
(number.number.number.number
v1-v2c-trap-receiver-
) that the controller is to send the
edit=<Value1>
traps to.
v1-v2c-trap-receiver-
Creating/ <Value3>: Community string
address=<Value2> After
deleting a trap write (string), which the controller
v1-v2c-trap-receiver- restart
receiver enters in the trap header.
community-
<Value4>: SNMP version, via
name=<Value3>
which the traps are sent (v1 or
v1-v2c-trap-receiver-
v2c).
version=<Value4>
Note:
All parameters must also be
entered when deleting a trap
receiver, as this is the only
means to uniquely identify the
data set.
Manual
Version 1.4.0, valid from FW Version 03.05.10(17)
WAGO-I/O-SYSTEM 750 Appendix 443
750-8212 PFC200; G2; 2ETH RS
Table 328: Description of Configuration Scripts for “SNMP”
Parameters Status Call-Up Output/Input Valid
Configuration of SNMP v3
Any number of SNMP v3 users can be created. A user that has been set up is always active; the
complete data set must be deleted to deactivate a user.
Specifies the user name for the
v3 user.
The <number> parameter
enables consecutive reading of
the related data from the
get_snmp_data individually configured trap
Authentication Right
read v3-auth-name receiver for a short period of time
Name away
<Nummer> (without interim changing of the
data). This is a consecutive
number that is not connected to
the data. If the number is not
included, the data of the first user
are read.
Specifies the type of encryption
that the v3 user uses (none,
Authentication get_snmp_data Right
read MD5, or SHA).
encryption type v3-auth-type <Number> away
Parameter <number> see
“Authentication Name”.
Specifies the key string for
Authentication get_snmp_data authentication. Right
read
key v3-auth-key <Nummer> Parameter <number> see away
“Authentication Name”.
Specifies the type of privacy
encryption for the v3 user (none,
Privacy get_snmp_data Right
read DES, or AES).
encryption type v3-privacy <number> away
Parameter <number> see
“Authentication Name”.
Specifies the key string for
privacy. If nothing is entered, the
get_snmp_data
SNMP agent uses the Right
Privacy key read v3-privacy-key
“Authentication Key”. away
<number>
Parameter <number> see
“Authentication Name”.
IP address of an SNMP manager
that the agent traps for this v3
get_snmp_data user are sent to. If nothing is
Trap receiver Right
read v3-notification-receiver entered here, no traps are sent
address away
<number> for this user.
Parameter <number> see
“Authentication Name”.
Manual
Version 1.4.0, valid from FW Version 03.05.10(17)
444 Appendix WAGO-I/O-SYSTEM 750
750-8212 PFC200; G2; 2ETH RS
Table 328: Description of Configuration Scripts for “SNMP”
Parameters Status Call-Up Output/Input Valid
Creating a new v3 user.
This must be a new, unique user
name.
Parameters:
User name (<Value1> = string,
min. 8 and max. 32 characters,
lower case letters (a … z), upper
case letters (A … Z), numbers
(0 … 9), special characters !()*~'.-
_ but no spaces)
Encryption method. (<Value2> =
none, MD5 or SHA).
config_snmp Key string for authentication,
v3-edit=add (<Value3> = String, min. 8 and
v3-auth-name=<Value1> max. 32 characters, lower case
v3-auth-type=<Value2> letters (a … z), upper case letters
Add new v3- v3-auth-key=<Value3> (A … Z), numbers (0 … 9), After
write
User v3-privacy=<Value4> special characters !()*~'.-_ but no restart
v3-privacy- spaces)
key=<Value5> Privacy encryption method
v3-notification- (<Value4> = none, DES or AES).
receiver=<Value6> Privacy key string (<Value5> =
String, min. 8 and max. 32
characters, lower case letters
(a … z), upper case letters
(A … Z), numbers (0 … 9),
special characters !()*~'.-_ but no
spaces), can also be blank; in
this case the authentication key
will be used. The IP address of a
trap receiver is transmitted as the
notification receiver (<Value6> =
number.number.number.number)
This parameter is not required if
no v3 traps are to be sent.
Deleting a v3 user that has been
set up.
Because the doubled allocation
config_snmp
of the same user name is After
Delete v3 user write v3-edit=delete
prevented when creating a user, restart
v3-auth-name=<Value>
the name is sufficient to uniquely
identify a data set (<Value> =
string).
18.3.1.10 WagoLibCpuUsage.lib
- CPU_Usage
The document containing the description of the library and the function block it
includes is available for download on the Internet at www.wago.com.
Manual
Version 1.4.0, valid from FW Version 03.05.10(17)
WAGO-I/O-SYSTEM 750 Appendix 445
750-8212 PFC200; G2; 2ETH RS
18.3.1.11 WagoLibDiagnosticIDs.lib
- DIAGNOSTIC_SEND_ID
- DIAGNOSTIC_SET_TEXT_FOR_ID
The document containing the description of the library and the function block it
includes is available for download on the Internet at www.wago.com.
18.3.1.12 WagoLibLed.lib
- LED_SET_STATIC
- LED_SET_BLINK
- LED_SET_FLASH
- LED_SET_ERROR
- LED_RESET_ERROR
- LED_RESET_ALL_ERRORS
- LED_GET_STATE
- LED_GET_STATE_ASYNC
The document containing a description of this library and the function blocks it
includes is available for download on the Internet at www.wago.com.
18.3.1.13 WagoLibNetSnmp.lib
- snmpGetValueCustomOID_INT32
- snmpGetValueCustomOID_STRING
- snmpGetValueCustomOID_UINT32
- snmpRegisterCustomOID_INT32
- snmpRegisterCustomOID_STRING
- snmpRegisterCustomOID_UINT32
- snmpSetValueCustomOID_INT32
- snmpSetValueCustomOID_STRING
- snmpSetValueCustomOID_UINT32
The document containing the description of the library and the function block it
includes is available for download on the Internet at www.wago.com.
18.3.1.14 WagoLibNetSnmpManager.lib
Manual
Version 1.4.0, valid from FW Version 03.05.10(17)
446 Appendix WAGO-I/O-SYSTEM 750
750-8212 PFC200; G2; 2ETH RS
- SNMPM_DINT_TO_TLV
- SNMPM_UDINT_TO_TLV
- SNMPM_STRING_TO_TLV
- SNMPM_TLV_TO_DINT
- SNMPM_TLV_TO_UDINT
- SNMPM_TLV_TO_STRING
- SNMPM_GET
- SNMPM_GET_V3
- SNMPM_SET
- SNMPM_SET_V3
The document containing a description of this library and the function blocks it
includes is available for download on the Internet at www.wago.com.
18.3.1.15 WagoLibSSL.lib
- SSL_CTX
- SSL_CTX_load_verify_locations
- SSL_CTX_sess_set_cache_size
- SSL_CTX_set_client_CA_list
- SSL_CTX_set_method
- SSL_CTX_use_certificate_file
- SSL_CTX_use_PrivateKey_file
- SSL_free
- SSL_get_error
- SSL_Hndshk_Accept
- SSL_Hndshk_Connect
- SSL_load_client_CA_file
- SSL_read
- SSL_shutdown
- SSL_write
The document containing a description of this library and the function blocks it
includes is available for download on the Internet at www.wago.com.
18.3.1.16 WagoLibTerminalDiag.lib
- GET_TERMINALDIAG
The document containing a description of this library and the function blocks it
includes is available for download on the Internet at www.wago.com.
Manual
Version 1.4.0, valid from FW Version 03.05.10(17)
WAGO-I/O-SYSTEM 750 List of Figures 447
750-8212 PFC200; G2; 2ETH RS
List of Figures
Figure 1: View ....................................................................................................29
Figure 2: Marking Area for Serial Numbers ........................................................31
Figure 3: CAGE CLAMP® connections ...............................................................32
Figure 4: Service Interface (Closed and Open Flap) ...........................................33
Figure 5: Network Connections – X1, X2 ............................................................34
Figure 6: RS-232/RS-485 – Communication Interface – X3................................35
Figure 7: Termination with DTE-DCE Connection (1:1) ......................................36
Figure 8: Termination with DCE-DCE Connection (Cross-Over).........................36
Figure 9: RS-485 Bus Termination .....................................................................37
Figure 10: Data Contacts ...................................................................................38
Figure 11: Power Jumper Contacts ....................................................................39
Figure 12: Power Supply Indicating Elements ....................................................40
Figure 13: Indicating Elements for Fieldbus/System ...........................................41
Figure 14: Indicating Elements, RJ-45 Jacks......................................................42
Figure 15: Indicating Elements, Memory Card Slot .............................................43
Figure 16: Mode Selector Switch ........................................................................44
Figure 17: Reset Button .....................................................................................45
Figure 18: Slot for SD Memory Card ..................................................................46
Figure 19: Schematic diagram............................................................................47
Figure 20: Example of Interface Assignment via WBM .......................................55
Figure 21: One Bridge with Two Ports ................................................................57
Figure 22: Two Bridges with One/One Ports ......................................................57
Figure 23: Connecting the Controller to a Cloud Service (Example) ...................70
Figure 24: Spacing .............................................................................................84
Figure 25: Release Tab of Controller ..................................................................86
Figure 26: Connecting a Conductor to a CAGE CLAMP® ...................................87
Figure 27: Power Supply Concept ......................................................................89
Figure 28: “Open DHCP”, Example Figure .........................................................93
Figure 29: CBM main menu (example) ...............................................................94
Figure 30: CBM – Selecting “Networking”...........................................................95
Figure 31: CBM – Selecting “TCP/IP” .................................................................95
Figure 32: CBM – Selecting “IP address” ...........................................................95
Figure 33: CBM – Selecting the IP Address .......................................................96
Figure 34: CBM – Entering a New IP Address ....................................................96
Figure 35: “WAGO Ethernet Settings” – Starting Screen (Example) ...................97
Figure 36: “WAGO Ethernet Settings” – “Network” Tab ......................................98
Figure 37: Example of a Function Test .............................................................100
Figure 38: Entering Authentication ...................................................................107
Figure 39: Password Reminder ........................................................................109
Figure 40: WBM Browser Window (Example) ...................................................112
Figure 41: WBM Header with Tabs that Cannot be Displayed (Example) .........112
Figure 42: WBM Status Bar (Example) .............................................................113
Figure 43: CBM main menu (example) .............................................................115
Figure 44: “WAGO Ethernet Settings” – Start Screen .......................................119
Figure 45: “WAGO Ethernet Settings” – Communication Link ..........................120
Figure 46: “WAGO Ethernet Settings” – Identification Tab (Example) ..............121
Figure 47: “WAGO Ethernet Settings” – Network Tab ......................................122
Manual
Version 1.4.0, valid from FW Version 03.05.10(17)
448 List of Figures WAGO-I/O-SYSTEM 750
750-8212 PFC200; G2; 2ETH RS
Figure 48: “WAGO Ethernet Settings” – Protocol Tab ......................................124
Figure 49: “WAGO Ethernet Settings” – Status Tab .........................................125
Figure 50: Target System Settings (1) ..............................................................127
Figure 51: Target System Settings (2) ..............................................................127
Figure 52: Creating a New Function Block .......................................................128
Figure 53: Programming Interface With the PLC_PRG Program Module..........128
Figure 54: “Resources” Tab..............................................................................129
Figure 55: Control Configuration – Edit ............................................................130
Figure 56: “Start WAGO-I/O-CHECK and Scan” Button ...................................130
Figure 57: WAGO-I/O-CHECK – Starting Screen .............................................131
Figure 58: I/O Configurator Empty ....................................................................132
Figure 59: “Add I/O Modules” Button ................................................................132
Figure 60: “Module Selection” Window .............................................................133
Figure 61: I/O Configurator with Defined I/O Modules ......................................133
Figure 62: Variable declaration.........................................................................134
Figure 63: Control Configuration: I/O Modules with Their Associated Addresses
................................................................................................................134
Figure 64: Program Function Block ..................................................................135
Figure 65: Input Assistant for Selecting Variables ............................................135
Figure 66: Example of an Allocation .................................................................136
Figure 67: Creating a Communication Link – Step 1 ........................................137
Figure 68: Creating a Communication Link – Step 2 ........................................138
Figure 69: Creating a Communication Link – Step 3 ........................................138
Figure 70: Task Configuration ..........................................................................140
Figure 71: Changing Task Names 1 .................................................................141
Figure 72: Call-up to Add to the Program Module .............................................142
Figure 73: Cyclic Task ......................................................................................143
Figure 74: Freewheeling Task ..........................................................................144
Figure 75: Debugging (Case 1) ........................................................................145
Figure 76: Debugging (Case 2) ........................................................................145
Figure 77: Debugging (Case 3) ........................................................................146
Figure 78: Debugging (Case 4) ........................................................................146
Figure 79: Debugging (Case 5) ........................................................................147
Figure 80: Debugging (Case 6) ........................................................................147
Figure 81: Debugging (Case 7) ........................................................................148
Figure 82: CODESYS – System Events ...........................................................149
Figure 83: CODESYS Program Provokes Division by “0” .................................151
Figure 84: CODESYS – Creating and Activating an Event Handler ..................151
Figure 85: CODESYS – New Module has been Generated ..............................152
Figure 86: CODESYS – Enter the Event in a Global Variable ...........................152
Figure 87: CODESYS – Variable Contents Prior to Division by “0” ...................153
Figure 88: CODESYS – Variable Contents After Division by “0” and Call-up of the
Event Handler .........................................................................................153
Figure 89: Process Image ................................................................................154
Figure 90: Flag Area ........................................................................................155
Figure 91: Local Bus Synchronization (Case 1) ................................................159
Figure 92: Local Bus Synchronization (Case 2) ................................................160
Figure 93: Local Bus Synchronization (Case 3) ................................................161
Figure 94: Local Bus Synchronization (Case 4) ................................................162
Figure 95: Local Bus (KBus) Settings ...............................................................163
Manual
Version 1.4.0, valid from FW Version 03.05.10(17)
WAGO-I/O-SYSTEM 750 List of Figures 449
750-8212 PFC200; G2; 2ETH RS
Figure 96: Program Memory (Example) ...........................................................166
Figure 97: Data Memory and Function Block Limitation (Example)...................167
Figure 98: Remanent Main Memory (Example) ................................................168
Figure 99: Flag and Retain Memory (Example) ................................................168
Figure 100: General Target System Settings ....................................................169
Figure 101: Selecting the Visualization Technique in the Target System Settings
................................................................................................................170
Figure 102: Creating the PLC_VISU Starting Visualization ...............................171
Figure 103: Remanent Main Memory ...............................................................179
Figure 104: CODESYS PLC Configuration - Modbus Settings .........................181
Figure 105: Modbus Process Image .................................................................187
Figure 106: Flag Area.......................................................................................188
Figure 107: State Diagram, STANDARD_WATCHDOG Operation Mode .........198
Figure 108: State Diagram, ALTERNATIVE_WATCHDOG Operation Mode ....199
Figure 109: State Diagram, Switchover Operation Mode ..................................200
Figure 110: Modbus Address Overview ............................................................209
Figure 111: State Diagram, ADVANCED_WATCHDOG Operation Mode.........212
Figure 112: State Diagram, SIMPLE_WATCHDOG Operation Mode ...............213
Figure 113: State Diagram, Switching Operation Modes ..................................213
Figure 114: Power Supply Indicating Elements ................................................221
Figure 115: Indicating Elements for Fieldbus/System .......................................222
Figure 116: Indicating Elements, RJ-45 Jacks ..................................................229
Figure 117: Indicating Elements, Memory Card Slot .........................................230
Figure 118: Flashing Sequence Process Diagram ............................................231
Figure 119: Inserting the Memory Card ............................................................240
Figure 120: Release Tab of Controller ..............................................................247
Figure 121: Marking Example According to ATEX and IECEx ..........................251
Figure 122: Text Detail – Marking Example According to ATEX and IECEx .....251
Figure 123: Marking Example for Approved Ex i I/O Module According to ATEX
and IECEx ...............................................................................................253
Figure 124: Text Detail – Marking Example for Approved Ex i I/O Module
According to ATEX and IECEx ................................................................253
Figure 125: Marking Example According to NEC..............................................255
Figure 126: Text Detail – Marking Example According to NEC 500 ..................255
Figure 127: Text Detail – Marking Example for Approved Ex i I/O Module
According to NEC 505.............................................................................256
Figure 128: Text Detail – Marking Example for Approved Ex i I/O Module
According to NEC 506.............................................................................256
Figure 129: Text Detail – Marking Example for Approved Ex i I/O Modules
According to CEC 18 attachment J .........................................................257
Figure 130: Graphical Representation of the “ConfigToolFB” Function Block ...427
Manual
Version 1.4.0, valid from FW Version 03.05.10(17)
450 List of Tables WAGO-I/O-SYSTEM 750
750-8212 PFC200; G2; 2ETH RS
List of Tables
Table 1: Variants ................................................................................................14
Table 2: Number Notation ..................................................................................18
Table 3: Font Conventions .................................................................................18
Table 4: Legend for Figure “View” ......................................................................29
Table 5: Legend for figure “CAGE CLAMP® connections” ..................................32
Table 6: Service Interface ..................................................................................33
Table 7: Legend for Figure “Network Connections – X1, X2” ..............................34
Table 8: Legend for Figure “RS-232/RS-485 – Communication Interface – X3” .35
Table 9: Function of RS-232 Signals for DTE/DCE ............................................36
Table 10: Legend for Figure “Power Jumper Contacts” ......................................39
Table 11: Legend for Figure “Power Supply Indicating Elements” ......................40
Table 12: Legend for Figure “Fieldbus/System Indicating Elements” ..................41
Table 13: Legend for Figure “Indicating Elements, RJ-45 Jacks” ........................42
Table 14: Legend for Figure “Indicating Elements, Memory Card Slot” ...............43
Table 15: Mode Selector Switch .........................................................................44
Table 16: Mode Selector Switch .........................................................................44
Table 17: Technical Data – Mechanical Data .....................................................48
Table 18: Technical Data – System Data ...........................................................48
Table 19: Technical Data – Power Supply ..........................................................48
Table 20: Technical Data – Clock .......................................................................49
Table 21: Technical Data – Programming ..........................................................49
Table 22: Technical Data – Local Bus ................................................................49
Table 23: Technical Data – ETHERNET.............................................................50
Table 24: Technical Data – Communication Interface ........................................50
Table 25: Technical Data – Field Wiring .............................................................50
Table 26: Technical Data – Power Jumper Contacts ..........................................50
Table 27: Technical Data – Data Contacts .........................................................50
Table 28: Technical Data – Climatic Environmental Conditions ..........................51
Table 29: MAC ID and IP Address Assignment for One Bridge with Two Ports ..57
Table 30: MAC ID and IP Address Assignment for Two Bridges with One/One
Ports .........................................................................................................57
Table 31: WBM Users ........................................................................................59
Table 32: Linux® Users .......................................................................................59
Table 33: List of Parameters Transmitted via DHCP ..........................................68
Table 34: Components of the Cloud Connectivity Software Package .................71
Table 35: Loading a Boot Project .......................................................................79
Table 36: WAGO DIN Rails ................................................................................84
Table 37: Filter Modules for 24 V Supply ............................................................89
Table 38: Default IP Addresses for ETHERNET Interfaces ................................92
Table 39: Network Mask 255.255.255.0 .............................................................92
Table 40:User Settings in the Default State ......................................................109
Table 41: Access Rights for WBM Pages .........................................................109
Table 42: CBM Menu Structure ........................................................................116
Table 43: Syntax of Logical Addresses ............................................................139
Table 44: Events ..............................................................................................150
Table 45: Access to the Process Images of the Input and Output Data – Local
Bus .........................................................................................................156
Manual
Version 1.4.0, valid from FW Version 03.05.10(17)
WAGO-I/O-SYSTEM 750 List of Tables 451
750-8212 PFC200; G2; 2ETH RS
Table 46: Access to the Process Images of the Input and Output Data – Modbus
................................................................................................................157
Table 47: Access to the Process Images of the Input and Output Data – Flags157
Table 48: Arrangement of the I/O Modules for the Addressing Example ..........157
Table 49: Addressing Example.........................................................................157
Table 50: Local Bus (KBus) Settings ................................................................164
Table 51: Errors and Remedies ........................................................................174
Table 52: CODESYS V3 Priorities ....................................................................178
Table 53: Modbus Settings ...............................................................................182
Table 54: Modbus TCP Settings .......................................................................183
Table 55: Modbus UDP Settings ......................................................................183
Table 56: Modbus RTU Settings ......................................................................184
Table 57: Modbus Mapping for Read Bit Services FC1, FC2............................189
Table 58: Modbus Mapping for Write Bit Services FC5, FC15 ..........................190
Table 59: Modbus Mapping for Read Register Services FC3, FC4, FC23 ........191
Table 60: Modbus Mapping for Write Register Services FC6, FC16, FC22, FC23
................................................................................................................193
Table 61: WAGO Modbus Registers ................................................................195
Table 62: Watchdog Commands ......................................................................201
Table 63: Watchdog Status ..............................................................................202
Table 64: Watchdog Configuration ...................................................................203
Table 65: Watchdog Operation Modes .............................................................204
Table 66: Diagnostics for the Error Server ........................................................206
Table 67: WAGO Modbus Registers ................................................................210
Table 68: Watchdog Commands ......................................................................214
Table 69: Watchdog Status ..............................................................................215
Table 70: Watchdog Configuration ...................................................................216
Table 71: System Power Supply Diagnistics ....................................................221
Table 72: Field-Side Supply Diagnostics ..........................................................221
Table 73: Diagnostics via SYS LED .................................................................223
Table 74: Diagnostics via SYS LED .................................................................224
Table 75: Diagnostics RUN LED ......................................................................225
Table 76: RUN LED Diagnostics ......................................................................226
Table 77: Diagnostics I/O LED .........................................................................227
Table 78: MS-LED Diagnostics ........................................................................228
Table 79: LNK-LED Diagnostics .......................................................................229
Table 80: ACT-LED Diagnostics .......................................................................229
Table 81: Diagnostics via Memory Card Slot LED ............................................230
Table 82: Overview of Error Codes, I/O LED ....................................................233
Table 83: Error Code 1, Explanation of Blink Codes and Procedures for
Troubleshooting ......................................................................................234
Table 84: Error Code 2, Explanation of Blink Codes and Procedures for
Troubleshooting ......................................................................................235
Table 85: Error Code 3, Explanation of Blink Codes and Procedures for
Troubleshooting ......................................................................................236
Table 86: Error Code 4, Explanation of Blink Codes and Procedures for
Troubleshooting ......................................................................................237
Table 87: Error Code 5, Explanation of Blink Codes and Procedures for
Troubleshooting ......................................................................................237
Manual
Version 1.4.0, valid from FW Version 03.05.10(17)
452 List of Tables WAGO-I/O-SYSTEM 750
750-8212 PFC200; G2; 2ETH RS
Table 88: Error Code 7, Explanation of Blink Codes and Procedures for
Troubleshooting ......................................................................................237
Table 89: Error Code 9, Explanation of Blink Codes and Procedures for
Troubleshooting ......................................................................................238
Table 90: Overview of MS-LED Error Codes ....................................................239
Table 91: Error Code 1, Explanation of Blink Codes and Procedures for
Troubleshooting ......................................................................................239
Table 92: Description of Marking Example According to ATEX and IECEx.......252
Table 93: Description of Marking Example for Approved Ex i I/O Module
According to ATEX and IECEx ................................................................254
Table 94: Description of Marking Example According to NEC 500 ...................255
Table 95: Description of Marking Example for Approved Ex i I/O Module
According to NEC 505.............................................................................256
Table 96: Description of Marking Example for Approved Ex i I/O Modules
According to NEC 506.............................................................................256
Table 97: Description of Marking Example for Approved Ex i I/O Modules
According to CEC 18 attachment J .........................................................257
Table 98: WBM “Device Status” Page – “Device Details” Group ......................261
Table 99: WBM “Device Status” Page – “Network TCP/IP Details” Group ........262
Table 100: WBM “PLC Runtime Information” Page – “Runtime” Group ............264
Table 101: WBM “PLC Runtime Information” Page – “Project Details” Group ..265
Table 102: WBM “PLC Runtime Information” Page – “Task n” Group(s)...........265
Table 103: WBM “PLC Runtime Configuration” Page – “General PLC Runtime
Configuration” Group...............................................................................270
Table 104: WBM “PLC Runtime Configuration” Page – “Webserver Configuration”
Group ......................................................................................................271
Table 105: WBM “TCP/IP Configuration” Page – “TCP/IP Configuration” Group
................................................................................................................273
Table 106: WBM “TCP/IP Configuration” Page – “DNS Server” Group .............274
Table 107: WBM “Ethernet Configuration” Page – “Bridge Configuration” Group
................................................................................................................275
Table 108: WBM “Ethernet Configuration” Page – “Switch Configuration” Group
................................................................................................................276
Table 109: WBM “Ethernet Configuration” Page – “Ethernet Interface
Configuration” Group...............................................................................277
Table 110: WBM “Configuration of Host and Domain Name” Page – “Hostname”
Group ......................................................................................................278
Table 111: WBM “Configuration of Host and Domain Name” Page – “Domain
Name” Group ..........................................................................................278
Table 112: WBM “Routing” Page – “IP Forwarding through multiple interfaces”
Group ......................................................................................................280
Table 113: WBM “Routing” Page – “Default Static Routes“ Group ...................281
Table 114: WBM “Routing” Page – “IP-Masquerading” Group ..........................282
Table 115: WBM “Routing” Page – “Port Forwarding” Group............................283
Table 116: WBM “Clock Settings” Page – “Timezone and Format” Group ........284
Table 117: WBM “Clock Settings” Page – “UTC Time and Date” Group ...........284
Table 118: WBM “Clock Settings” Page – “Local Time and Date” Group ..........285
Table 119: WBM “Configuration of Serial Interface RS232” Page – “Assign
Owner of Serial Interface” Group.............................................................286
Manual
Version 1.4.0, valid from FW Version 03.05.10(17)
WAGO-I/O-SYSTEM 750 List of Tables 453
750-8212 PFC200; G2; 2ETH RS
Table 120: WBM “Configuration of Service Interface” Page – “Assign Owner of
Service Interface” Group .........................................................................287
Table 121: WBM “Create Bootable Image” Page – “Create bootable image from
active partition” Group .............................................................................288
Table 122: WBM “Firmware Backup” Page – “Firmware Backup” Group ..........289
Table 123: WBM “Firmware Restore” Page – “Firmware Restore” Group .........291
Table 124: WBM “Active System” Page – “Boot Device” Group .......................293
Table 125: WBM “Active System” Page – “System <n> (Internal Flash)” Group
................................................................................................................293
Table 126: WBM “Mass Storage” Page – “Devices” Group ..............................294
Table 127: WBM “Mass Storage” Page – “Create new Filesystem on Memory
Card” Group ............................................................................................294
Table 128: WBM “Software Uploads” Page – “Upload New Software” Group ...295
Table 129: WBM “Configuration of Network Services” Page – “Telnet” Group ..296
Table 130: WBM “Configuration of Network Services” Page – “FTP” Group .....296
Table 131: WBM “Configuration of Network Services” Page – “FTPS” Group ..296
Table 132: WBM “Configuration of Network Services” Page – “HTTP” Group ..297
Table 133: WBM “Configuration of Network Services” Page – “HTTPS” Group 297
Table 134: WBM “Configuration of Network Services” Page – “I/O-CHECK“
Group ......................................................................................................297
Table 135: WBM “Configuration of NTP Client” Page – “NTP Client Configuration”
Group ......................................................................................................298
Table 136: WBM “PLC Runtime Services” Page – “General Configuration” Group
................................................................................................................299
Table 137: WBM “PLC Runtime Services” Page – “CODESYS V2” Group .......299
Table 138: WBM “PLC Runtime Services” Page – “e!RUNTIME” Group ..........300
Table 139: WBM “SSH Server Settings” Page – “SSH Server” Group ..............301
Table 140: WBM “TFTP Server” Page – “TFTP Server” Group ........................302
Table 141: WBM “DHCP Server Configuration” Page – “DHCP Configuration
Bridge <n>” Group ..................................................................................303
Table 142: WBM “Configuration of DNS Server” Page – “DNS Server” Group .304
Table 143: WBM “Status Overview” Page – “Service” Group ...........................305
Table 144: WBM “Status Overview” Page – “Connection <n>” Group ..............305
Table 145: WBM “Configuration of Connection <n>” Page – “Configuration”
Group ......................................................................................................306
Table 146: Dependencies of the Selection and Input Fields for the Selected
Cloud Platform ........................................................................................308
Table 147: WBM “Configuration of General SNMP Parameters” Page – “General
SNMP Configuration” Group ...................................................................310
Table 148: WBM “Configuration of SNMP v1/v2c Parameters” Page – “SNMP
v1/v2c Manager Configuration” Group.....................................................311
Table 149: WBM “Configuration of SNMP v1/v2c Parameters” Page – “Actually
Configured Trap Receivers” Group .........................................................312
Table 150: WBM “Configuration of SNMP v3” Page – “Actually configured v3
Users” Group ..........................................................................................313
Table 151: WBM “WBM User Configuration” Page – “Change Passwords” Group
................................................................................................................315
Table 152: WBM “OPC UA Configuration” Page – “OPC UA Server” Group ....316
Table 153: WBM “OPC UA Configuration” Page – “General OPC UA Server
Configuration” Group...............................................................................316
Manual
Version 1.4.0, valid from FW Version 03.05.10(17)
454 List of Tables WAGO-I/O-SYSTEM 750
750-8212 PFC200; G2; 2ETH RS
Table 154: WBM “OPC UA Configuration” Page – “OPC UA Endpoints” Group
................................................................................................................317
Table 155: WBM “OPC UA Configuration” Page – “OPC UA Security Settings”
Group ......................................................................................................318
Table 156: WBM “Modbus Services Configuration” Page – “Modbus TCP” Group
................................................................................................................319
Table 157: WBM “Modbus Services Configuration” Page – “Modbus UDP” Group
................................................................................................................319
Table 158: WBM “OpenVPN / IPsec Configuration” Page – “OpenVPN” Group
................................................................................................................320
Table 159: WBM “OpenVPN / IPsec Configuration” Page – “IPsec” Group ......321
Table 160: WBM “General Firewall Configuration” Page – “Global Firewall
Parameter” Group ...................................................................................322
Table 161: WBM “Interface Configuration” Page – “Firewall Configuration Bridge
<n> / VPN” Group ...................................................................................323
Table 162: Ports for Telecontrol Functionality ..................................................324
Table 163: WBM “Configuration of MAC Address Filter” Page – “Global MAC
address filter state” Group .......................................................................325
Table 164: WBM “Configuration of MAC Address Filter” Page – “MAC address
filter state Bridge <n>” Group ..................................................................326
Table 165: WBM “Configuration of MAC Address Filter” Page – “MAC address
filter whitelist” Group ...............................................................................326
Table 166: WBM “Configuration of User Filter” Page – “User Filter” Group .....327
Table 167: WBM “Configuration of OpenVPN and IPsec” Page – “Certificate List”
Group ......................................................................................................329
Table 168: WBM “Configuration of OpenVPN and IPsec” Page – “Private Key
List” Group ..............................................................................................329
Table 169: “Security Settings” WBM Page – “TLS Configuration” Group ..........330
Table 170: WBM “Advanced Intrusion Detection Environment (AIDE)” Page –
“Run AIDE check at startup” Group .........................................................331
Table 171: WBM “Advanced Intrusion Detection Environment (AIDE)” Page –
“Control AIDE and show log” Group ........................................................331
Table 172: WBM “Diagnostic Information” Page ...............................................333
Table 173: “Information” Menu .........................................................................334
Table 174: “Information” > “Controller Details” Submenu..................................334
Table 175: “Information” > “Network Details” Submenu ....................................335
Table 176: “PLC Runtime” Menu ......................................................................336
Table 177: “PLC Runtime” > “Information” Submenu........................................336
Table 178: “PLC Runtime” > “Information” > “Runtime Version” Submenu .......337
Table 179: “PLC Runtime” > “Information” > “Webserver Version” Submenu ...337
Table 180: “PLC Runtime” > “Information” > “State” Submenu .........................337
Table 181: “PLC Runtime” > “Information” > “Number of Tasks” Submenu ......338
Table 182: “PLC Runtime” > “Information” > “Project Details” Submenu...........338
Table 183: “PLC Runtime” > “Information” > “Tasks” Submenu ........................338
Table 184: “PLC Runtime” > “Information” > “Tasks” > “Task n” Submenu .......339
Table 185: “PLC Runtime” > “General Configuration” Submenu .......................339
Table 186: “PLC Runtime” > “General Configuration” > “PLC Runtime Version”
Submenu ................................................................................................340
Table 187: “PLC Runtime” > “General Configuration” > “Home Dir On SD Card”
Submenu ................................................................................................340
Manual
Version 1.4.0, valid from FW Version 03.05.10(17)
WAGO-I/O-SYSTEM 750 List of Tables 455
750-8212 PFC200; G2; 2ETH RS
Table 188: “PLC Runtime” > “WebVisu” Submenu ...........................................341
Table 189: “Networking” Menu .........................................................................342
Table 190: “Networking” > “Host/Domain Name” Submenu ..............................342
Table 191: “Networking” > “Hostname” Submenu ............................................343
Table 192: “Networking” > “Host/Domain Name” > “Domain Name” Submenu .343
Table 193: “Networking” > “TCP/IP” Submenu .................................................343
Table 194: “Networking” > “IP Address” Submenu ...........................................344
Table 195: “Networking” > “TCP/IP” > “IP Address” Submenu > “Xn” ...............344
Table 196: “Networking” > “TCP/IP” > “Default Gateway” Submenu .................345
Table 197: “Networking” > “TCP/IP” > “Default Gateway” > “Default Gateway n”
Submenu ................................................................................................345
Table 198: “Networking” > “TCP/IP” > “DNS Server” Submenu ........................346
Table 199: “Networking” > “Ethernet” Submenu ...............................................346
Table 200: “Networking” > “Ethernet” > “Switch Configuration” Submenu.........347
Table 201: “Networking” > “Ethernet” > “Ethernet Ports” Submenu ..................347
Table 202: “Networking” > “Ethernet” > “Ethernet Ports” > “Interface Xn”
Submenu ................................................................................................348
Table 203: “Firewall” Menu ...............................................................................349
Table 204: “Firewall” > “General Configuration” Submenu................................350
Table 205: “Firewall” > “General Configuration” > “Interface xxx” Submenu .....351
Table 206: Ports for Telecontrol Functionality ..................................................352
Table 207: “Firewall” > “MAC Address Filter” Submenu ...................................353
Table 208: “Firewall” > “MAC Address Filter” > “MAC address filter whitelist”
Submenu ................................................................................................354
Table 209: “Firewall” > “MAC Address Filter” > “MAC address filter whitelist” >
“Add new / No (n)” Submenu ...................................................................354
Table 210: “Firewall” > “User Filter” Submenu ..................................................355
Table 211: “Firewall” > “User Filter” > “Add New / No (n)” Submenu ................356
Table 212: “Clock” Menu ..................................................................................357
Table 213: “Administration” Menu.....................................................................358
Table 214: “Administration” > “Users” Submenu ...............................................359
Table 215: “Administration” > “Create Image” Submenu...................................359
Table 216: “Package Server” Menu ..................................................................360
Table 217: “Package Server” > “Firmware Backup” Menu ................................360
Table 218: “Package Server” > “Firmware Backup” > “Auto Update Feature”
Menu .......................................................................................................361
Table 219: “Package Server” > “Firmware Backup” > “Auto Update Feature”
Menu .......................................................................................................361
Table 220: “Package Server” > “Firmware Restore” Menu ...............................362
Table 221: “Package Server” > “Firmware Restore” > “Select Package” Menu.362
Table 222: “Package Server” > “System Partition” Submenu ...........................363
Table 223: “Mass Storage” Menu .....................................................................364
Table 224: “Mass Storage” > “SD Card” Menu .................................................364
Table 225: “Ports and Services” Menu .............................................................366
Table 226: “Ports and Services” > “Telnet” Submenu .......................................367
Table 227: “Ports and Services” > “FTP” Submenu ..........................................367
Table 228: “Ports and Services” > “FTPS” Submenu ........................................368
Table 229: “Ports and Services” > “HTTP” Submenu .......................................368
Table 230: “Ports and Services” > “HTTPS” Submenu .....................................369
Table 231: “Ports and Services” > “NTP” Submenu..........................................369
Manual
Version 1.4.0, valid from FW Version 03.05.10(17)
456 List of Tables WAGO-I/O-SYSTEM 750
750-8212 PFC200; G2; 2ETH RS
Table 232: “Ports and Services” > “SSH” Submenu .........................................370
Table 233: “Ports and Services” > “TFTP” Submenu ........................................370
Table 234: “Ports and Services” > “DHCPD” Submenu ....................................371
Table 235: “Ports and Services” > “DHCPD” > “Xn” Submenu .........................371
Table 236: “Ports and Services” > “DNS” Submenu .........................................372
Table 237: “Ports and Services” > “IOCHECK PORT” Submenu ......................373
Table 238: “Ports and Services” > “Modbus TCP” Submenu ............................373
Table 239: “Ports and Services” > “Modbus UDP” Submenu ............................374
Table 240: “Ports and Services” > “OPC UA” Submenu ...................................374
Table 241: “Ports and Services” > “Firewall Status” Submenu..........................375
Table 242: “Ports and Services” > “PLC Runtime Services” Submenu .............376
Table 243: “Ports and Services” > “PLC Runtime Services” > “CODESYS 2”
Submenu ................................................................................................377
Table 244: “Ports and Services” > “PLC Runtime Services” > “e!RUNTIME”
Submenu ................................................................................................378
Table 245: “SNMP” Menu .................................................................................379
Table 246: “SNMP” > “General SNMP Configuration” Submenu ......................379
Table 247: “SNMP” > “SNMP v1/v2c Manager Configuration” Submenu ..........380
Table 248: “SNMP” > “SNMP v1/v2c Trap Receiver Configuration” Submenu ..380
Table 249: “SNMP” > “SNMP v3 Configuration” Submenu ...............................381
Table 250: “SNMP” > “(Secure )SNMP firewalling” Submenu ...........................382
Table 251: 1 Channel Digital Input Module with Diagnostics ............................384
Table 252: 2 Channel Digital Input Modules .....................................................384
Table 253: 2 Channel Digital Input Module with Diagnostics ............................384
Table 254: 2 Channel Digital Input Module with Diagnostics and Output Process
Data ........................................................................................................385
Table 255: 4 Channel Digital Input Modules .....................................................385
Table 256: 8 Channel Digital Input Modules .....................................................385
Table 257: 8 Channel Digital Input Module NAMUR with Diagnostics and Output
Process Data ..........................................................................................386
Table 258: 8 Channel Digital Input Module PTC with Diagnostics and Output
Process Data ..........................................................................................387
Table 259: 16 Channel Digital Input Modules ...................................................388
Table 260: 1 Channel Digital Output Module with Input Process Data ..............389
Table 261: 2 Channel Digital Output Modules ..................................................389
Table 262: 2 Channel Digital Input Modules with Diagnostics and Input Process
Data ........................................................................................................390
Table 263: 2 Channel Digital Input Modules with Diagnostics and Input Process
Data 75x-506 ..........................................................................................390
Table 264: 4 Channel Digital Output Modules ..................................................391
Table 265: 4 Channel Digital Output Modules with Diagnostics and Input Process
Data ........................................................................................................391
Table 266: 8 Channel Digital Output Module ....................................................391
Table 267: 8 Channel Digital Output Modules with Diagnostics and Input Process
Data ........................................................................................................392
Table 268: 16 Channel Digital Output Modules ................................................392
Table 269: 8 Channel Digital Input/Output Modules .........................................393
Table 270: 1 Channel Analog Input Modules ....................................................394
Table 271: 2 Channel Analog Input Modules ....................................................394
Table 272: 2-Channel Analog Input Modules HART .........................................396
Manual
Version 1.4.0, valid from FW Version 03.05.10(17)
WAGO-I/O-SYSTEM 750 List of Tables 457
750-8212 PFC200; G2; 2ETH RS
Table 273:: 2 Channel Analog Input Modules HART + 6 bytes Mailbox ............396
Table 274: 4 Channel Analog Input Modules ....................................................396
Table 275: 8 Channel Analog Input Modules ....................................................397
Table 276: 3-Phase Power Measurement Module ............................................398
Table 277: 3-Phase Power Measurement Modules 750-494, -495, (and all
variations) ...............................................................................................399
Table 278: 2 Channel Analog Output Modules .................................................400
Table 279: 4 Channel Analog Output Modules .................................................400
Table 280: Counter Modules 750-404, (and all variations except of /000-005),
753-404, -404/000-003............................................................................401
Table 281: Counter Modules 750-404/000-005, 753-404/000-005 ...................402
Table 282: Counter Modules 750-633 ..............................................................403
Table 283: Counter Modules 750-638, 753-638 ...............................................403
Table 284: Pulse Width Modules 750-511, /xxx-xxx, 753-511 ..........................404
Table 285: Serial Interface Modules with Alternative Data Format....................405
Table 286: Serial Interface Modules with Standard Data Format ......................405
Table 287: Serial Interface Modules 750-652, 753-652 ....................................406
Table 288: Data Exchange Module 750-654, -654/000-001 .............................406
Table 289: SSI Transmitter Interface Modules .................................................407
Table 290: SSI Transmitter Interface I/O Modules with an Alternative Data Format
(/000-004, -005, -007) .............................................................................407
Table 291: Incremental Encoder Interface Modules 750-631/000-004, --010, -
011 ..........................................................................................................407
Table 292: Incremental Encoder Interface Modules 750-634............................408
Table 293: Incremental Encoder Interface Modules 750-637, (and all variations)
................................................................................................................408
Table 294: Digital Pulse Interface Modules 750-635, 753-635..........................409
Table 295: DC-Drive Controller 750-636, -636/000-700, -636/000-800 ............409
Table 296: Stepper Controller 750-670, -671, -672 ..........................................410
Table 297: RTC Module 750-640 .....................................................................411
Table 298: DALI/DSI Master Module 750-641 ..................................................411
Table 299: DALI Multi-Master Module 753-647 in the "Easy" Mode ..................412
Table 300: DALI Multi-Master Module 753-647 in the "Full" Mode ....................414
Table 301: LON® FTT Module 753-648 ............................................................415
Table 302: EnOcean Radio Receiver 750-642 .................................................415
Table 303: MP Bus Master Module 750-643 ....................................................416
Table 304: Bluetooth® RF-Transceiver 750-644 ...............................................417
Table 305: Vibration Velocity/Bearing Condition Monitoring VIB I/O 750-645 ...417
Table 306: KNX/EIB/TP1 Module 753-646 .......................................................418
Table 307: AS-interface Master Module 750-655, 753-655 ..............................419
Table 308: System Modules with Diagnostics 750-606, -611............................420
Table 309: System Modules with Diagnostics 750-610, -611............................420
Table 310: Filter Modules 750-624/020-002, 750-626/020-002 ........................420
Table 311: Binary Space Module 750-622 (with Behavior like 2 Channel Digital
Input).......................................................................................................421
Table 312: CODESYS System Libraries ..........................................................422
Table 313: Possible Macros for File Access .....................................................424
Table 314: Possible Macros for File Access .....................................................425
Table 315: Input Variable “DEVICENUMBER”..................................................426
Table 316: Description of the Configuration Scripts for “Information” ................428
Manual
Version 1.4.0, valid from FW Version 03.05.10(17)
458 List of Tables WAGO-I/O-SYSTEM 750
750-8212 PFC200; G2; 2ETH RS
Table 317: Description of the Configuration Scripts for “CODESYS” ................429
Table 318: Description of the Configuration Scripts for “Networking - Host/Domain
Name” .....................................................................................................430
Table 319: Description of the Configuration Scripts for “Networking - TCP/IP” .430
Table 320: Description of the Configuration Scripts for “Networking - ETHERNET”
................................................................................................................432
Table 321: Description of the Configuration Scripts for “NTP” ..........................433
Table 322: Description of the Configuration Scripts for “Clock” .........................434
Table 323: Description of the Configuration Scripts for "Administration" ...........434
Table 324: Description of Configuration Scripts for “Package Server” ..............435
Table 325: Description of Configuration Scripts for “Ports and Services” –
“Network Services ...................................................................................436
Table 326: Description of Configuration Scripts for “Ports and Services” – “PLC
Runtime Services” ...................................................................................437
Table 327: Description of Configuration Scripts for “Ports and Services” –
“SSH/TFTP” ............................................................................................440
Table 328: Description of Configuration Scripts for “SNMP” .............................441
Manual
Version 1.4.0, valid from FW Version 03.05.10(17)
WAGO-I/O-SYSTEM 750 459
750-8212 PFC200; G2; 2ETH RS
Manual
Version 1.4.0, valid from FW Version 03.05.10(17)
WAGO Kontakttechnik GmbH & Co. KG
Postfach 2880 • D - 32385 Minden
Hansastraße 27 • D - 32423 Minden
Phone: +49 571 887 – 0
Fax: +49 571 887 – 844169
E-Mail: info@wago.com
Internet: www.wago.com